Mercedes GL Suv 2009 x164 Owners Manual 01

Disclaimer
All
Daslanguage
folgende versions of the für
PDF-Dokument following PDF document for
dieses Fahrzeugmodell this sich
bezieht vehicle model
in allen
relate
The solely toversion
Sprachversionen
following vehicles intended
nur aufofdie for sale
theFahrzeuge,
Owner‘s on the
die für
Manual den German allmarket
deutschen
describes Marktand
models, which
bestimmt
series and
correspond
special to German
sind undequipment
die den regulations.
deutschen
of your Vorschriften entsprechen. Bitte
vehicle. Country-specific wenden
language Sie sich an
variations are
Ihren autorisierten
possible. Mercedes-Benz
Please note Servicestützpunkt,
that your vehicle might not be um equipped
ein gedrucktes
withExemplar
all the
Please
describedcontact
für andere your authorised
Fahrzeugmodelle
functions. Mercedes-Benz
und affects
This also Fahrzeugmodelljahre Service
safety-relevant Centreand
zu erhalten.
systems to obtain
functions.
a printed
Please version
contact forauthorised
your other vehicle models and vehicle
Mercedes-Benz model
dealership years.
if you Thislike
would PDF
document
Dieses
to receive aisprinted
the latest
PDF-Dokument version.
stellt
Owner‘s Possible
die Manual
aktuelle variations
Version
for otherdar. to your
Mögliche
vehicle vehicle
Abweichungen
models mayzu
and vehicle not
be taken
Ihrem
model into account
konkreten
years. Fahrzeugaskönnten
Mercedes-Benz constantlysein,
nicht berücksichtigt updates their vehicles to
da Mercedes-Benz
the
seinestate of the art
Fahrzeuge and introduces
ständig dem neuesten changes
Standinderdesign andanpasst,
Technik equipment.sowiePlease
therefore
The onlinenote
Änderungen that this
in Form
Owner‘s und PDF is
Manual document
Ausstattung in no
vornimmt.
the current way
and replaces
Bitte
validbeachten the
version. Itprinted
Sie daher,
is version
dass
possible that
which was affecting
deviations deliveredyour
dieses PDF-Dokument with yourFall
in keinem vehicle.
specific das gedruckte
vehicle could Exemplar ersetzt,
not be taken intodas mit
account
dem
as Fahrzeug ausgeliefert
Mercedes-Benz wurde.
constantly adapts its vehicles according to the latest
technology and makes changes to the form and the equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner‘s Manual, supplementary documents and
the digital Owner‘s Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All rights reserved. All texts, images and graphics are subject to copyright
and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be
copied or changed for any commercial use or for the purpose of being passed
on nor used on other webistes.
Internal use only

Dateiname: 6515431202_buchblock.pdf; erzeugt am 01. Apr 2009 00:16:29; WK
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 1

wobuchh, Version: 2.11.8.1
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz lish in the interactive Owner's Manual on

Before you drive off, familiarise yourself with the Internet at:
your vehicle and read this manual. This will www.mercedes-benz.de/
help you to obtain the maximum pleasure betriebsanleitung
from your vehicle and to avoid endangering The technical documentation team at
yourself and others. Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
Items of optional equipment are marked with motoring.
an asterisk *.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on the:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry specification
Ravailability
Some warning and indicator lamps may have

no function.
The illustrations in this manual show a left-
hand-drive vehicle. In right-hand-drive vehi-
cles, the arrangement and location of vehicle
parts and controls differ accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its
vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
You cannot therefore base any claims on the
illustrations or descriptions in this manual.
The following are integral parts of the vehicle:
ROwner's Manual
RBrief Instructions
RService Booklet
RSupplements relating to vehicle equipment
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass
the documents on to the new owner.
i You can get to know the important fea-
tures of your vehicle in German and in Eng-
1645842083Z102 É1645842083Z102GËÍ
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 2

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 3

Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 21
Introduction ......................................... 17 Safety ................................................... 33
Controls ............................................... 57
Operation ........................................... 171
Practical advice ................................ 207
Technical data ................................... 283

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 4

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 234

Rear-compartment air condition-
4ETS (Electronic Traction Support) . . . 53 ing ................................................. 139
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Rear window heating ..................... 146
drive) .................................................. 112 Setting the air distribution ............. 144
Setting the airflow ......................... 145
A Setting the air vents ...................... 143
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ......... 50 Setting the temperature ................ 142
Display message .................... 212, 213 Setting the temperature (rear
Warning lamp ................................. 235 compartment) ................................ 142
Accident Switching the residual heat func-
Notes ............................................. 240 tion on/off ..................................... 147
Acoustic warning tone Thermatic 2-zone automatic cli-
see Warning tone ........................... 239 mate control .................................. 138
Active Service System PLUS Thermotronic luxury multi-zone
see ASSYST PLUS service interval automatic climate control .............. 139
display ........................................... 199 Air-conditioning system
Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 51 see Air conditioning
Adaptive Damping System Air filter
See ADS ....................................... 129 Display message ............................ 228
AdBlue® Air pressure
Display message ............................ 213 see Tyre pressure
Service indicator ............................ 200 Ambient lighting
AdBlue® service indicator ................ 200 Setting (on-board computer) .......... 106
Additional functions (on-board Anti-glare film .................................... 169
computer) .......................................... 109 Anti-lock braking system
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ..... 129 See ABS ........................................... 50
Airbags Anti-theft alarm system
Activation ......................................... 35 See EDW .......................................... 54
Control unit ...................................... 35 Anti-theft systems ............................... 54
Driver's ............................................ 38 Ashtray ............................................... 162
Front ................................................ 38 ASSYST PLUS
Front passenger ............................... 38 see ASSYST PLUS service interval
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning display ........................................... 199
lamp ............................................. 234 ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
Sidebag ............................................ 39 play ..................................................... 199
System ............................................. 37 Calling up the date (on-board
Windowbag ...................................... 39 computer) ...................................... 200
Air conditioning Display message ............................ 199
Activating/deactivating ................. 140 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ............ 54
Activating/deactivating air-recir- Switching off the alarm .................... 54
culation mode ................................ 146 AUTO lights
Auxiliary heating/ventilation .......... 147 Display message ............................ 225
Controlling automatically ............... 141 Automatic car wash .......................... 201
Convenience opening/closing
(air-recirculation mode) ................. 147
Demisting the windscreen ............. 145
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 5

Index 5
Automatic transmission Belt tensioners

DIRECT SELECT lever ....................... 92 Activation ......................................... 35
Display mes- Belt warning ......................................... 77
sage .............................. 213, 216, 217 BlueTEC
Driving tips ...................................... 94 AdBlue® ......................................... 288
Emergency running mode .............. 244 Bonnet
Gear indicator .................................. 93 Bonnet catch ................................. 175
Kickdown ......................................... 94 Display message ............................ 219
Malfunction .................................... 244 Opening/closing ........................... 174
Program selector button .................. 95 Bonnet release lever
Shift ranges ..................................... 94 Release lever ................................. 175
Trailer towing ................................... 94 Boot
Transmission positions .................... 93 Automatic opening ........................... 62
Auxiliary heating ............................... 147 Boot lid
Display message .................... 231, 232 Opening/closing .............................. 60
Notes ............................................. 147 Brake Assist
Remote control .............................. 148 See BAS ........................................... 50
Setting (on-board computer) .......... 107 Brake fluid .......................................... 291
Auxiliary ventilation .......................... 147 Display message ............................ 221
Brake lamps
B Adaptive ........................................... 51
Backrest angle Display message ............................ 226
Adjusting (2nd row of seats) ............ 67 Brakes
Ball coupling Parking brake ................................... 91
Fitting ............................................ 194 Warning lamp ........................ 235, 236
Folding in ....................................... 198 Brake system
Folding out ..................................... 193 Display message ............................ 220
Removing ....................................... 198 Bulbs .................................................. 254
BAS (Brake Assist) ............................... 50 Brake lamp .................................... 260
Battery Dipped-beam headlamps ............... 258
Changing (auxiliary heating Display message ............................ 225
remote control) .............................. 254 Licence plate lamp ......................... 260
Charging ........................................ 275 Main-beam headlamps ................... 258
Checking (key) ............................... 253 Overview ........................................ 256
Check lamp (key) ........................... 253 Parking lamp .......................... 258, 260
Disconnecting ................................ 273 Rear foglamp ................................. 260
Display message ............................ 220 Replacing ............................... 258, 259
Jump-starting ................................. 276 Reversing lamp .............................. 260
Maintenance (vehicle) .................... 272 Side lamp ....................................... 258
Reconnecting ................................. 276 Tail lamp ........................................ 260
Removing/fitting ........................... 274 Turn signal lamp .................... 258, 260
Vehicle battery .............................. 272 see Lamp
Belt force limiters
Activation ......................................... 35
Belt height adjustment ....................... 77
Belt reel (Easy-Pack fix kit) .............. 160
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 6

6 Index
C Child seat
Automatic recognition ..................... 43
Calling up a fault Automatic recognition (malfunc-
see Display message ..................... 211 tion) ............................................... 234
Care Child seat lock ................................ 47
Automatic car wash ....................... 201 Display message ............................ 216
Care products ................................ 201 ISOFIX .............................................. 47
Cleaning agents ............................. 201 On the front-passenger seat ............ 42
Dashboard ..................................... 204 Recommendations ........................... 46
Display ........................................... 204 Suitable positions ............................ 44
Exterior .......................................... 201 TopTether ........................................ 48
Headlamps ..................................... 203 Child seat lock ..................................... 47
High-pressure cleaners .................. 202 Cigarette lighter ................................ 163
Interior ........................................... 204 Cleaning agents ................................. 201
Paintwork ...................................... 202 Cleaning the sensors ........................ 203
Plastic trim .................................... 205 Climate control
Reversing camera .......................... 203 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 141
Seat covers .................................... 204 Misted up windows ........................ 146
Sensors ......................................... 203 Cockpit
Steering wheel boss ...................... 204 Overview .......................................... 23
Tail pipes ....................................... 203 Collapsible wheel
Trailer tow hitch ............................. 203
Technical data ............................... 297
Trim strips ..................................... 205
COMAND display
Wheels ........................................... 202
Cleaning ......................................... 204
Windows ........................................ 202
Compass ............................................ 166
Wiper blades .................................. 202
Display message ............................ 216
Wooden trim .................................. 205
Constant headlamp mode
Care products .................................... 201
see Daytime driving lights .............. 105
CD player/CD changer
Consumption statistics (on-board
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 101
computer) .......................................... 110
Central locking
Convenience closing ........................... 87
Automatic locking (on-board com-
Convenience opening .......................... 87
puter) ............................................. 107
Coolant
Key .................................................. 58
Checking the level ......................... 177
Central locking/unlocking button ..... 59
Display mes-
Central unlocking
sage ....................................... 219, 224
Key .................................................. 58
Mixture ratio .................................. 291
Centre console
Temperature gauge ........................ 100
Overview .......................................... 29
Cornering lights
Changing a wheel
Display message ............................ 225
see Flat tyre
Cruise control .................................... 117
Checklist (off-road driving) .............. 189
Display message .................... 218, 219
Child-proof locks
Cup holder ......................................... 153
Rear doors ....................................... 49
Children
in the vehicle ................................... 41
Restraint systems ............................ 41
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 7

Index 7
D Door
Automatic locking ............................ 60
Dashboard Display message ............................ 219
Cleaning ......................................... 204 Emergency locking ........................ 251
see Instrument cluster ..................... 96 Emergency unlocking ..................... 250
see Cockpit Opening (from the inside) ................ 59
Dashboard lighting Door control panel
see Instrument lighting .................... 25 Overview .......................................... 31
Date Downhill Speed Regulation
Setting (on-board computer) .......... 104 See DSR ........................................ 113
Daytime driving lights ......................... 80 Drinks holder
Setting (on-board computer) .......... 105 see Cup holder
Delayed switch-off Driver's airbag ..................................... 38
Exterior lighting (on-board com- Driver's door
puter) ............................................. 105 Unlocking (KEYLESS GO) ................. 58
Interior lighting (on-board com- Driver's seat position .......................... 78
puter) ............................................. 106 Driving abroad ................................... 193
Diesel Driving information
Low outside temperatures ............. 174 Off-road ......................................... 189
Diesel engine Tyre ruts ........................................ 193
Winter driving ................................ 174 Driving safety systems ....................... 49
Differential locks ............................... 116 4ETS ................................................ 53
Display message .................... 222, 223 ABS .................................................. 50
Digital speedometer ......................... 100 Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 51
Setting the unit (on-board com- BAS .................................................. 50
puter) ............................................. 104 Distance warning system (vehi-
Dipped-beam headlamps cles with Distronic) .......................... 53
Display message ............................ 225 EBV .................................................. 52
Symmetrical ................................... 193
ESP® ............................................... 51
DIRECT SELECT lever
Driving systems ................................ 117
see Automatic transmission
Cruise control ................................ 117
Display messages ............................. 211
Distronic ........................................ 119
ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- Level control .................................. 129
play ................................................ 199 Parktronic ...................................... 133
Symbol messages .................. 219, 249 Reversing camera .......................... 135
Text messages ............................... 212 Speedtronic ................................... 126
Distance warning function (vehi-
Driving tips .......................................... 94
cles with Distronic) ............................. 53
Braking .......................................... 187
Activating/deactivating (on- Distronic ........................................ 125
board computer) ............................ 109 Driving abroad .............................. 193
Distance warning system Driving on wet roads ..................... 188
see Distance warning function ....... 109 Fording ................................. 188, 192
Distronic ............................................ 119 Trailer towing ................................. 196
Display mes- Winter ............................................ 186
sage ....................................... 214, 218 DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) .... 113
Driving tips .................................... 125 Display message ............................ 223
On-board computer ....................... 109
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 8

8 Index
DVD audio Engine oil .......................................... 289

Operating (on-board computer) ..... 101 Capacities ...................................... 177
DVD video Checking the oil level (dipstick) ..... 177
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 102 Checking the oil level (on-board
computer) ...................................... 176
E Consumption ................................ 176
Display mes-
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
sage .............................. 176, 228, 229
Activating/deactivating (on- Filler neck ...................................... 177
board computer) ............................ 108 Topping up ..................................... 177
EASY-ENTRY feature ............................ 72
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-
Activating/deactivating (on-
gram) .................................................... 51
board computer) ............................ 108
Activating/deactivating ................... 52
EASY-EXIT feature ............................... 72
Display mes-
Crash-responsive ............................. 72
sages ............................................. 215
Easy-Pack fix kit ................................ 159
Trailer stabilisation .......................... 51
EBV (electronic brake force distri-
Warning lamp .................. 51, 235, 236
bution) .................................................. 52
Exterior lighting
Display message ............................ 220
Delayed switch-off (on-board
Electronic brake force distribution
computer) ...................................... 105
See EBV ........................................... 52
Exterior mirrors
Electronic Stability Program
Adjusting ......................................... 72
see ESP® ......................................... 51 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .......... 73
Electronic Traction System Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 73
see 4ETS .......................................... 53 Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 73
Emergency key element Folding in when locking (on-board
Lost ............................................... 247 computer) ...................................... 109
Emergency locking Malfunction .................................... 246
Vehicle ........................................... 251 Parking position ............................... 74
Emergency release Resetting ......................................... 73
Fuel filler flap ................................. 251 Storing settings ............................... 74
Spare wheel bracket ...................... 251 Exterior view
Emergency running mode Overview .......................................... 22
Automatic transmission ................. 244
Emergency unlocking F
Vehicle ........................................... 250
Engine Fault message
Running irregularly ......................... 243 see Display message ..................... 211
Starting problems .................. 242, 243 Fire extinguisher ............................... 208
Starting with KEYLESS GO ............... 89 First-aid kit ......................................... 208
Starting with the key ........................ 88 Flat tyre
Switching off .................................... 91 Equipment ..................................... 262
Engine diagnostics warning Preparing the vehicle ..................... 262
lamp .................................................... 237 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 263
Engine electronics ............................. 284 Floormat ............................................. 168
Malfunction .................................... 242 Foglamps
Engine number .................................. 287 Display message ............................ 227
Fording ....................................... 188, 192
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 9

Index 9
Frequencies H
Garage door opener ....................... 298
Telephone ...................................... 285 Handbrake
Front airbag ......................................... 38 Display message ............................ 221
Front-passenger airbag ....................... 38 Headlamp cleaning system .............. 178
Fuel ..................................................... 287 Headlamps
Diesel ............................................ 173 Cleaning ......................................... 203
Loss ............................................... 241 Cleaning system .............................. 83
Petrol ............................................. 173 Misting up ...................................... 245
Fuel consumption Headlamps delayed switch-off
Notes ............................................. 288 see Exterior lighting delayed switch-off
Fuel filler flap Head restraints
Emergency release ........................ 251 Adjusting (front) ............................... 65
Opening/closing ........................... 172 Adjusting (rear) ................................ 68
Fuel filter Luxury .............................................. 66
Display message ............................ 221 NECK-PRO ....................................... 40
Fuel gauge ............................................ 25 Removing (rear) ............................... 69
Fuel level Resetting triggered NECK-PRO
Calling up the range (on-board head restraints .............................. 252
computer) ...................................... 111 Resetting triggered NECK-PRO
Display ............................................. 25 luxury head restraints .................... 252
Fuel line Heating
Malfunction .................................... 241 see Air conditioning
Fuel tank High-pressure cleaners .................... 202
Defect ............................................ 241 Hill start assist .................................... 90
Fuse allocation chart ........................ 280 HomeLink®
Fuse box see Garage door opener
Dashboard ..................................... 281
Engine compartment ..................... 281 I
Luggage compartment ................... 281 Immobiliser .......................................... 54
Fuses .................................................. 280 Indicator and warning lamp
Automatic child seat recognition
G (malfunction) ................................. 234
Garage door Brakes (red) ........................... 235, 236
Opening/closing (with the remote Engine diagnostics ......................... 237
control) .......................................... 166 ESP® .............................................. 235
Garage door opener .......................... 165 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ........ 43, 234
Clearing the memory ..................... 166 Reserve fuel ................................... 239
Frequencies ................................... 298 Seat belt ........................................ 238
Programming the remote control ... 165 SRS .......................................... 35, 236
Gear indicator ...................................... 93 Thermotronic (malfunction) ........... 234
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 284 Indicator and warning lamps ........... 235
Glove compartment .......................... 152 Indicator lamp
Gradient-climbing capability (max- see Indicator and warning lamp ..... 235
imum) ................................................. 191 Instrument cluster .............................. 96
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 10

10 Index
Overview .......................................... 25 Key positions

Selecting the language (on-board Key .................................................. 63
computer) ...................................... 104 KEYLESS GO .................................... 63
Instrument lighting ............................. 25 Kickdown ....................................... 94, 96
Intelligent Light System
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 106 L
Interior lighting
Lamp
Ambient lighting (on-board com-
see Indicator and warning lamp ..... 235
puter) ............................................. 106
Lashing eyelets ................................. 156
Automatic control system ................ 84
Level control ...................................... 129
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 106 Licence plate lighting
Emergency lighting .......................... 84 Display message ............................ 227
Manual control ................................. 83 Lighting
Reading lamp ................................... 83 see Lights
Interior motion sensor ........................ 55 Lights
Activating/deactivating (on- Active light function ......................... 82
board computer) ............................ 110 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 80
ISOFIX child seat securing system .... 47 Combination switch ......................... 78
Daytime driving lights ...................... 80
Dipped-beam headlamps ................. 80
J
Display messages .......................... 225
Jack ..................................................... 209 Foglamps ................................... 80, 83
Operation ....................................... 268 Hazard warning lamps ..................... 81
Jump-starting ..................................... 276 Headlamp flasher ............................. 80
Jump leads ..................................... 276 Light switch ..................................... 78
Main-beam headlamps ..................... 81
K Motorway mode ............................... 82
Rear foglamp ................................... 81
Key ........................................................ 58
Switching off (display message) ..... 227
Checking the battery ..................... 253
Turn signals ..................................... 81
Convenience closing ........................ 87
LIM indicator lamp
Convenience opening ...................... 87
Cruise control ................................ 118
Display mes-
Distronic ........................................ 121
sage
Variable Speedtronic ..................... 126
.............................................. 230, 231
Loading guidelines ............................ 151
Loss ............................................... 247
Locking
Malfunction .................................... 247
Automatic ........................................ 60
Modifying the programming ............. 59
Emergency locking ........................ 251
KEYLESS GO
From the inside (central locking
Button .............................................. 63
button) ............................................. 59
Changing the battery ..................... 254
LOW RANGE
Checking the battery ..................... 253
Display mes-
sage ............................................... 223
Locking ............................................ 58
Off-road gear ................................ 114
Malfunction .................................... 247
LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 114
Starting the engine .......................... 89
Luggage compartment enlarge-
Unlocking ......................................... 58
ment ................................................... 154
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 11

Index 11
Luggage cover ................................... 157 Mobile telephone

Luggage net see Mobile phone .......................... 164
Front-passenger footwell ............... 154 Modifying the programming
Front seats (behind) ....................... 154 Key .................................................. 59
Lumbar support MP3 .................................................... 101
4-way ............................................... 66 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 101
Luxury head restraint ......................... 66 see separate operating instructions
Multicontour seat ................................ 67
M Multi-function display ......................... 98
Setting the display when the igni-
Main-beam headlamps
tion is switched off (on-board
Display message ............................ 227
computer) ...................................... 107
Maintenance
Multi-function steering wheel ............ 97
Battery ........................................... 272
Overview .......................................... 28
Making calls
N
Memory card ...................................... 101
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 101 Navigation .......................................... 102
see separate operating instructions On-board computer ....................... 102
Memory function ................................. 74 see separate operating instructions
Menu NECK-PRO head restraints ................. 40
Overview of the menus .................... 99 Resetting after being triggered ...... 252
Menu (on-board computer) ................. 99 NECK-PRO luxury head restraints ...... 40
Additional functions ....................... 109 Resetting after being triggered ...... 252
Audio ............................................. 100 Notes on running in a new vehicle . . 172
Distronic ........................................ 124
DVD ............................................... 102 O
Navi ............................................... 102
Odometer
Off-road ......................................... 102
see Trip meter ............................... 110
Resetting to factory settings .......... 103
Off-road
Settings ......................................... 103
4MATIC .......................................... 112
Standard display .............................. 99
Differential locks ............................ 116
Telephone ...................................... 111
DSR ............................................... 113
Trip computer ................................ 110
LOW RANGE off-road gear ............. 114
TV .................................................. 101
Off-road 4ETS .................................. 53
Message
Off-road ABS .................................... 50
see Display message ..................... 211
Off-road 4ETS ....................................... 53
see Indicator and warning lamp ..... 235
Off-road ABS ........................................ 50
Minispare emergency spare wheel
Off-road driving
Technical data ............................... 297
Mirrors Checklist ........................................ 189
Information .................................... 189
Sun visor ........................................ 162
see Exterior mirrors or Rear-view mirror Off-road ESP® ....................................... 52
Mobile phone ..................................... 164 Off-road terrain
Display message .................... 216, 232 Off-road ESP .................................... 52
Installation ..................................... 285 Oil
Operation (on-board computer) ..... 111 Consumption ................................. 176
Topping up ..................................... 177
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 12

12 Index
Oil level Parking position

Checking (dipstick) ........................ 177 Exterior mirror on the front-
Checking (on-board computer) ...... 176 passenger side ................................. 74
On-board computer ............................. 97 PARKTRONIC ...................................... 133
Additional functions menu ............. 109 Activating/deactivating ................. 135
Audio menu ................................... 100 Malfunction .................................... 244
Convenience submenu .................. 108 Range of the sensors ..................... 134
Display messages .......................... 211 Trailer towing ................................. 135
DVD menu ..................................... 102 Warning display ............................. 134
Factory settings ............................. 103 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
Heating submenu ........................... 107 lamp ............................................. 43, 234
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 103 Permanent four-wheel drive
Lighting submenu .......................... 105 see 4MATIC ................................... 112
Navi menu ..................................... 102 Permanent Speedtronic .................... 128
Off-road menu ............................... 102 Petrol
Overview .......................................... 99 Minimum grade ............................. 173
Settings menu ............................... 103 see Fuel
Standard display menu .................... 99 Plastic trim
Telephone menu ............................ 111 Cleaning ......................................... 205
Time/date submenu ...................... 104 Power supply (trailer) ....................... 199
Trip computer menu ...................... 110 Power window switch
TV menu ........................................ 101 see Side windows
Vehicle submenu ........................... 106 Pre-emptive occupant safety system
On-board computer language .......... 104 see PRE-SAFE®
Operating system PRE-SAFE® system .............................. 40
see On-board computer ................... 97 Display message ............................ 217
Outside temperature display ............ 97 Program selector button
On-board computer ....................... 100 Automatic transmission ................... 95
Override feature Pulling away ......................................... 89
Rear side windows ........................... 49
R
P
Radio
Paint code .......................................... 286 Changing a station (on-board
Paintwork computer) ...................................... 100
Cleaning ......................................... 202 see separate operating instructions
Panel Radio-controlled equipment
Removing (third row of seats) .......... 68 Installation ..................................... 168
Parking ................................................. 90 Rain closing feature
Parking aid Sliding/tilting sunroof ................... 151
Exterior mirror on the front- Range (on-board computer) ............. 111
passenger side ................................. 74 Rear bench seat
PARKTRONIC ................................. 133 Folding forward/back .................... 155
Reversing camera .......................... 135 Rear compartment
Parking brake ...................................... 91 Activating/deactivating the air
Display message ............................ 221 conditioning ........................... 140, 141
Parking lamps Setting the air vents ...................... 144
Display message ............................ 227 Setting the temperature ................ 142
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 13

Index 13
Rear-compartment seats .................... 67 Seat belt

Rear foglamp Adjusting the driver's and front-
Display message ............................ 227 passenger seat belt ......................... 77
Rear-view mirror Adjusting the height ......................... 77
Adjusting ......................................... 72 Fastening ......................................... 75
Anti-dazzle (manual) ......................... 72 Warning lamp ........................... 77, 238
Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) .......... 73 Seat covers
Rear window heating ........................ 146 Cleaning ......................................... 204
Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 234 Seat heating ......................................... 70
Rear window wiper ............................. 85 Seat ventilation ................................... 69
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 262 Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 233
Refuelling ........................................... 172 Securing a load .................................. 156
Remote control Securing hooks .................................. 157
Auxiliary heating ............................ 148 Service indicator
Changing the batteries (auxiliary see ASSYST PLUS service interval
heating) ......................................... 254 display ........................................... 199
Garage door opener ....................... 165 Service products ............................... 287
Programming (garage door AdBlue® additives .......................... 288
opener) .......................................... 165 Brake fluid ..................................... 291
Reserve Coolant .......................................... 291
Warning lamp ................................. 239 Engine oil ....................................... 289
Reserve fuel ....................................... 287 Fuel ................................................ 287
Display message ............................ 232 Windscreen washer fluid ................ 291
Fuel tank ........................................ 287 Settings
Warning lamp ................................. 239 Calling up a stored setting ............... 74
Reset button ........................................ 25 Factory (on-board computer) ......... 103
Restraint system On-board computer ....................... 103
See SRS .......................................... 35 Setting the unit (on-board computer)
Restraint systems Speedometer ................................. 103
For children ..................................... 41 Shift ranges
Rev counter .......................................... 97 Automatic transmission ................... 94
Reversing camera ............................. 135 Sidebag ................................................ 39
Cleaning ......................................... 203 Side windows
Reversing lamps Convenience closing ........................ 87
Display message ............................ 228 Convenience opening ...................... 87
Roof carrier ....................................... 161 Fault .............................................. 246
Hinged side windows ....................... 86
S Opening/closing .............................. 85
resetting .......................................... 86
Safety net ........................................... 158
Sliding/tilting sunroof ...................... 150
Seat
Adjusting ................................... 64, 65
Convenience opening ...................... 87
Correct driver's seat position ........... 78
Rain closing feature ....................... 151
Folding down/up (3rd row of
Resetting ....................................... 151
seats) ............................................... 67
Sliding sunroof
Storing settings ............................... 74
see Sliding/tilting sunroof
Snow chains ...................................... 186
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 14

14 Index
Socket ................................................ 163 Cup holder ..................................... 153

Cockpit .......................................... 163 Glove compartment ....................... 152
Luggage compartment ................... 164 Submenu (on-board computer)
Rear compartment ......................... 163 Convenience .................................. 108
Spare wheel Heating .......................................... 107
Fitting ............................................ 268 Instrument cluster ......................... 103
Storage location ............................ 209 Lighting .......................................... 105
Technical data ............................... 297 Time/Date ..................................... 104
Spare wheel bracket ........................... 60 Vehicle ........................................... 106
Emergency release ........................ 251 Summer opening
Speed limiter see Convenience opening
Speedtronic ................................... 126 Sun visor ............................................ 161
Speedometer Supplemental Restraint System
Additional speedometer (on- See SRS ........................................... 35
board computer) ............................ 100 Surround lighting
Segments ......................................... 97 Switching on/off (on-board com-
Setting the unit (on-board computer) ............................................. 105
puter) ............................................. 103 Switching off the alarm
Speedtronic ....................................... 126 ATA .................................................. 54
Display message ............................ 218
Permanent ..................................... 128 T
Variable ......................................... 126
Tailgate
SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-
Display message ............................ 219
tem) ...................................................... 35
Limiting the opening angle ............... 63
Display message ............................ 221
Tail lamps
Warning lamp ........................... 35, 236
Standard display (on-board com- Display message ............................ 228
Tail pipes
puter) .................................................... 99
Cleaning ......................................... 203
Station
Tank
see Radio ....................................... 100
see Fuel tank
Status line (on-board computer) ........ 98
Tank capacity .................................... 287
Selecting the display ...................... 104
Technical data
Steering
GL 350 BlueTEC ............................. 293
Display message ............................ 225
GL 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFI-
Steering wheel
CIENCY .......................................... 293
Adjusting ................................... 70, 71
GL 450 4MATIC ............................. 292
Buttons (on-board computer) ........... 97
GL 450 CDI 4MATIC ...................... 294
Storing settings ............................... 74
GL 500 4MATIC ............................. 292
Steering wheel boss
Trailer loads ................................... 298
Cleaning ......................................... 204
Tyres ...................................... 296, 297
Steering wheel heating ....................... 71
Wheels ................................... 296, 297
Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 233
Telescopic lever ................................ 193
Stowage compartments ................... 152
Telescopic rod (Easy-Pack fix kit) .... 160
Armrest (under) ............................. 153
Temperature
Centre console .............................. 152
Outside temperature ........................ 97
Centre console (rear) ..................... 153
Thermatic
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 15

Index 15
Thermotronic Trip computer

Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 234 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 110
Third brake lamp Trip computer (on-board com-
Display message ............................ 226 puter) .................................................. 110
Tightening torque .............................. 271 Trip meter ............................................ 99
Time Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 110
Setting (on-board computer) .......... 104 Turn signal lamps
Setting the time (on-board com- Display message ............................ 226
puter) ............................................. 104 TV
TIREFIT kit Operating (on-board computer) ..... 101
Using ............................................. 263 Two-way radio
TopTether ............................................. 48 Installation ..................................... 285
Total distance recorder .................... 100 Type identification plate
Tow-away protection .......................... 55 see vehicle identification plate ...... 286
Switching on/off (on-board com- Tyre
puter) ............................................. 109 Direction of rotation ...................... 180
Towing ................................................ 279 Tyre grip ............................................. 188
Towing eye Tyre pressure .................................... 180
Fitting ............................................ 278 Calling up (on-board computer) .... 183
Removing ....................................... 279 Display message ........... 217, 218, 229
Trailer Tyre pressure loss warning system
7-pin connector ............................. 199 ............................................................ 182
Coupling up .................................. 195 Tyre pressure monitor
Decoupling ..................................... 196 Warning lamp ................................. 237
Display message .................... 225, 226 Tyres
Power supply ................................. 199 General notes ................................ 179
Trailer coupling Technical data ....................... 296, 297
see Trailer tow hitch Tyre tread ........................................... 180
Trailer loads
Technical data ............................... 298 U
Trailer tow hitch ................................ 193
Unlocking
Cleaning ......................................... 203
Emergency unlocking ..................... 250
Trailer towing
From the inside (central unlocking
Driving tips .................................... 196
button) ............................................. 59
ESP® ................................................ 51
Malfunction .................................... 248
V
Mounting dimensions .................... 297
Parktronic ...................................... 135 Vanity mirror
Transmission Sun visor ........................................ 162
Display message ............................ 216 Variable Speedtronic ........................ 126
Transmission output (maximum) Vehicle
Telephone/two-way radio .............. 285 Emergency unlocking ............ 250, 251
Transmission positions ....................... 93 Individual settings (on-board com-
Transport (vehicle) ............................ 279 puter) ............................................. 103
Travelling uphill ................................. 190 Leaving parked up ......................... 249
Trim strips Towing ........................................... 279
Cleaning ......................................... 205 Transporting .................................. 279
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 16

16 Index
Vehicle battery .................................. 272 Windscreen wipers ............................. 84

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 295 Malfunction .................................... 245
Vehicle electronics ........................... 284 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 261
Vehicle identification number Winter diesel ..................................... 174
(VIN) .................................................. 286 Winter driving ............................ 185, 186
Vehicle identification plate .............. 286 Winter tyres ....................................... 185
Vehicle level Limiting the speed (on-board com-
Display mes- puter) ............................................. 128
sage Wiper blades
.............................................. 221, 222 Cleaning ......................................... 202
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 209 Replacing ....................................... 261
Wooden trim
W Cleaning ......................................... 205
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS (yellow) ................................... 235
ESP® ........................................ 51, 236
LIM (cruise control) ........................ 118
LIM (Distronic) ............................... 121
LIM (variable Speedtronic) ............. 126
Tyre pressure monitor ................... 237
Warning tone ..................................... 239
Warning triangle ................................ 208
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 232
Washer fluid reservoir .............. 178, 291
Filling capacity ............................... 291
Wearing seat belts .............................. 75
Wheel bolts
Tightening torque ........................... 271
Wheel chock
Use ................................................ 268
Wheels
Cleaning ......................................... 202
General notes ................................ 179
Interchanging ................................. 184
Technical data ....................... 296, 297
Windowbag .......................................... 39
Windows
Cleaning ......................................... 202
see Side windows
Windscreen
Infrared reflective .......................... 168
Windscreen washer fluid .................. 291
Topping up ..................................... 178
Windscreen washer system ..... 178, 291
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 17

Introduction 17
Protection of the environment Personal driving style

Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when
H Environmental note starting the engine.
Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle
environmental protection. stationary.
The objectives are for the natural resources
Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance
which form the basis of our existence on this
from the vehicle in front.
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
which takes the requirements of both nature Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.
and humanity into account. Rchange gear in good time and use each gear
You too can help to protect the environment only up to 2/3 of its maximum engine speed.
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.
tally-responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on
the following factors: Returning used vehicles
Roperating conditions of your vehicle Mercedes-Benz will take back your
Mercedes-Benz to dispose of it in an environ-
Ryour personal driving style mentally-responsible manner, in accordance
You can influence both factors. with the European Union (EU) End of Life
You should bear the following in mind: Vehicles Directive.
Operating conditions The End of Life Vehicles Directive applies to
Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
vehicles of up to 3.5 t gross vehicle weight, in
accordance with national regulations. For
sumption.
several years, Mercedes-Benz has been
Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are meeting all the legal requirements for a
always correct. design which allows for recycling and re-use.
Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. There is a network of return points and dis-
assembly plants which can recycle your vehi-
Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
cle in an environmentally-responsible man-
tion. ner. The options for recycling vehicles and
Rremove roof racks once you no longer need parts are constantly being developed and
them. improved. This means that your Mercedes-
Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Benz will also continue to meet even the
to environmental protection. You should increased recycling quotas in the future in
therefore adhere to the service intervals. good time. You can obtain further information
from your national Mercedes-Benz homepage
Ralways have maintenance work carried out or your national hotline number.
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 18

18 Introduction
Operating safety your vehicle to be damaged, which in turn

might lead to an accident. This also applies to
Safety notes vehicles which are equipped with underbody
G Risk of accident and injury protection.
Always have work on the vehicle carried out You should therefore drive over obstacles
by a qualified specialist workshop. In particu- slowly and prevent the vehicle from bottom-
lar, work relevant to safety or on safety-rela- ing out when driving off-road. If necessary,
ted systems as well as maintenance work have your vehicle inspected at a qualified spe-
must be carried out at a qualified specialist cialist workshop.
workshop. The workshop must have the nec-
essary specialist knowledge and tools to carry G Risk of accident
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- If work on electronic equipment and its soft-
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz ware is carried out incorrectly, this equipment
Service Centre for this purpose. could stop working. The electronic systems
are networked via interfaces. Tampering with
G Risk of accident and injury these electronic systems could cause mal-
Some safety systems only function when the functions in systems which have not been
engine is running. You should therefore never modified. Malfunctions such as these can
switch off the engine when driving. Otherwise, seriously jeopardise the vehicle's operating
the safety systems of your vehicle may not safety and therefore your own safety.
function correctly and as a result will no lon- You should therefore have all work and mod-
ger protect you and other persons as inten- ifications to electronic components carried
ded. In addition, there is a risk that you may out at a qualified specialist workshop.
lose control of your vehicle and thus cause an
accident.
Vehicle registration
G Risk of accident and injury
Mercedes-Benz may ask its Service Centres
Work carried out incorrectly, or alterations
to carry out technical inspections on certain
made to the vehicle, e.g. re-routing of cables
vehicles to improve their quality or safety.
under coverings, could cause the safety sys-
tems of your vehicle to stop working properly. If you did not purchase your vehicle from an
The safety systems would thus no longer pro- authorised specialist dealer and your vehicle
tect you and other persons as intended. In has never been inspected at a Mercedes-
addition, there is a risk that you may lose con- Benz Service Centre, it is possible that your
trol of your vehicle and thus cause an acci- vehicle is not registered in your name with
dent. Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can only
inform you about vehicle checks if it has your
All work and alterations to the vehicle, e.g.
registration data.
installations or modifications, should there-
fore be carried out at a qualified specialist It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
workshop. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible
G Risk of accident about any change in address or vehicle own-
If you drive over obstacles at high speed or if ership.
the vehicle bottoms out in rough terrain, it
could cause heavy impacts to the vehicle
underbody, tyres or wheels. This could cause
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 19

Introduction 19
Correct use After a fault has been rectified, the informa-

tion is deleted from the memory. Other mem-
Observe the following information when using ory data is constantly overwritten.
your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this manual
Rthe "Technical data" section in this manual Other devices that store data
Rnational road traffic regulations Depending on its equipment, your vehicle
may feature communications and/or enter-
Rnational road traffic licensing regulations tainment systems (e.g. navigation devices,
G Risk of injury telephone systems). These allow you to save
and edit data required for the operation of the
Various warning stickers are affixed to your
respective device.
vehicle. Their purpose is to draw your atten-
tion, and the attention of others, to various Further information on operation (e.g. on
dangers. Therefore, do not remove any warn- deleting data) can be found in the separate
ing stickers unless the sticker clearly states operating instructions.
that you may do so.
If you remove the warning stickers, you or
others could be injured by failing to recognise
certain dangers.
Data stored in the vehicle

Fault data
Components critical for vehicle operation are
equipped with fault data memories as stand-
ard. There are also memories dedicated to
storing the technical reactions of vehicle
components to driving situations (e.g. the
triggering of an airbag, ESP® intervention).
This data is used exclusively to:
Rassist in the rectification of faults and
defects
Rhelp Mercedes-Benz optimise and develop
vehicle functions.
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced by Mercedes-
Benz, this technical information can be read
from the fault memories. This is performed by
authorised employees of the Mercedes-Benz
service network using special diagnostic
computers.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 20

20
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 21

21
Exterior view ....................................... 22

Cockpit ................................................. 23
Instrument cluster .............................. 25
At a glance
Multi-function steering wheel ............ 28
Centre console .................................... 29
Overhead control panel ...................... 30
Door control panel .............................. 31
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 22

22 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Luggage compartment 60 C Demisting the windscreen 145
Vehicle tool kit 209 Cleaning the windows 202
Exterior spare wheel D Windscreen wipers 84
bracket* 60
E Opening the bonnet 174
; Rear window heating 146
Engine oil 176
= Lights 256 Coolant 177
? Fuel filler flap 172 F Towing 277
A Exterior mirrors 72 G Tyres and wheels 179
B Roof carrier* 161 Flat tyre 262
Sliding/tilting sunroof* 150
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 23

Cockpit 23
Cockpit
Left-hand-drive vehicles
At a glance
: Combination switch 78 E Adjusts the steering wheel
manually 71
; Cruise control lever 117
F Opens the bonnet 174
= Instrument cluster 25
G Releases the parking brake 90
? DIRECT SELECT lever 92
H Parking brake 90
A PARKTRONIC* warning dis-
play 134 I Light switch 78
B Overhead control panel 30 J Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically* 71
C Controls Thermatic or
Thermotronic* 136 Steering wheel heating* 71
D Ignition lock 63
Start/Stop button* 63
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 24

24 Cockpit
Right-hand-drive vehicles
At a glance

: PARKTRONIC* warning dis- F Ignition lock* 63
play 134 Start/Stop button* 63
; Overhead control panel 30 G Adjusts the steering wheel
= Combination switch 78 manually 71
? Cruise control lever 117 H Adjusts the steering wheel

electrically* 71
A Instrument cluster 25 Steering wheel heating* 71
B DIRECT SELECT lever 92 I Releases the parking brake 90
C Light switch 78 J Controls Thermatic or
D Parking brake 90 Thermotronic* 136
E Opens the bonnet 174
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 25

Instrument cluster 25
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster, kilometres
At a glance
i Please refer to the overview of the indicator and warning lamps (Y page 27).
: Speedometer (the unit can A Adjusts the instrument
be changed to miles in the cluster lighting: brighter
on-board computer) 103
B Rev counter 97
; Display unit for the speed-
C Fuel gauge
ometer
= D Multi-function display 98
Adjusts the instrument
cluster lighting: dimmer E Clock 104
? Reset button
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 26

26 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster, miles

At a glance
i Please refer to the overview of the indicator and warning lamps (Y page 27).
: Speedometer B Rev counter 97
; Display unit for the speed- C Fuel gauge
ometer
D Multi-function display 98
= Adjusts the instrument
E Clock 104
cluster lighting: dimmer
? Reset button
A Adjusts the instrument
cluster lighting: brighter
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 27

Instrument cluster 27
Indicator and warning lamps
At a glance
: ABS warning lamp (Anti- F Diesel engine: preglow indi-
lock Braking System) 235 cator lamp 89
; LIM indicator lamp 126 G SRS (Supplemental
Restraint System) warning
= ESP® (Electronic Stability lamp 236
Program) warning lamp 235
H Dipped-beam headlamps
? Distance warning lamp*1 53 indicator lamp 80
A Brake warning lamp 236 I Engine diagnostics warning
B Tyre pressure monitor lamp 237
warning lamp* 237 J Main-beam headlamps indi-
C Turn signal indicator lamp 81 cator lamp 81
D K Reserve fuel warning lamp 239

Turn signal indicator lamp 81
E Seat belt warning lamp 238
1 On vehicles without Distronic*, the symbol lights up briefly but has no function.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 28

28 Multi-function steering wheel
Multi-function steering wheel

At a glance
i Further information on operating the multi-function steering wheel (Y page 97).

: Multi-function display 98 ? V U Selects menus:
scrolls back and forth 99
; COMAND APS*/audio sys-
tem; see the separate oper- A Switches off Lingua-
ating instructions. tronic* – please refer to the
separate operating instruc-
= 6 ~ Makes/accepts tions.
or rejects/ends a call 111 & * Scrolls back
W X Selects subme- and forth within a menu 99
nus in the Settings...
menu 103
Changes values
Adjusts the volume
? Switches on Lingua-
tronic* – please refer to the
separate operating instruc-
tions
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 29

Centre console 29
Centre console
At a glance
: Operates COMAND APS* E LOW RANGE off-road gear 114
or the audio system
F DSR 113
; Hazard warning lamps 81
G Level control 129
= Selects the drive program 95
H ESP® 52
? Adjusts the seat heating* 70
I Select ADS settings 129
A Seat ventilation* 69 J PARKTRONIC* 133
B Auxiliary heating* 147 K Stowage compartment 152
C 4 2 warning L Stowage compartment 153
lamp2 43
M Cup holder 153
D Engages the differential
locks 116
2 The warning lamp also lights up briefly when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock on vehicles
without automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat*. It has no function, however, and does
not indicate that the front-passenger seat is equipped with automatic child seat recognition.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 30

30 Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel

At a glance

: p To switch the left- A p To switch the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 83 hand reading lamp on/off 83
; u To switch the rear B 2 To open/close the
interior lighting on/off 83 sliding/tilting sunroof* 150
= | To switch the auto- C Rear-view mirror 72
matic interior lighting con-
D Transmitter buttons for the
trol on/off 84
garage door opener* 165
? c To switch the front
interior lighting on/off 83
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 31

Door control panel 31
Door control panel
At a glance
: Opens the door 59 B n Activates/deacti-
vates the override feature
; % & Locks/unlocks
for the side windows in the
the vehicle 59 rear compartment 49
= 7 Adjusts the exterior C ± Opens/closes the
mirrors 73 hinged power side win-
? Z ª \ Selects dows* 86
the exterior mirror, electri- D q Opens/closes the
cally folds the exterior mir-
tailgate* 62
rors in/out* 73
A W Opens/closes the
side windows 85
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 32

32
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 33

33
Occupant safety .................................. 34

Driving safety systems ....................... 49
Anti-theft systems .............................. 54
Safety
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 34

34 Occupant safety
Occupant safety Rthe seat belt helps to keep the vehicle

occupant in the best position in relation
Notes on occupant safety to the airbag.
Seat belts, together with belt tensioners, belt Rfor example, in a head-on collision, the
force limiters and airbags, are complemen- seat belt can more adequately prevent
Safety
tary, coordinated restraint systems. They the occupant from being propelled
reduce the risk of injury in specific, pre- towards the point of the impact, and is
defined types of accident situations and thus better suited to prevent injury.
thereby increase occupant safety. However,
Therefore, in accident situations where an
seat belts and airbags generally do not pro-
airbag is deployed, it only provides protec-
tect against objects penetrating the vehicle
tion in addition to the seat belt if the seat
from the outside.
belt is being worn correctly.
To ensure that the restraint systems can
deliver their full potential protection, make G Risk of accident and injury
sure that: Always have maintenance work carried out at
Rthe seat and head restraint are adjusted a qualified specialist workshop which has the
properly (Y page 64). necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required.
Rthe seat belt has been fastened properly
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
(Y page 75).
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
Rthe airbags can inflate properly if they are pose.
deployed (Y page 37). In particular, work relevant to safety or on
Rthe steering wheel is adjusted properly safety-related systems must be carried out at
(Y page 70). a qualified specialist workshop. If this work is
Rthe
not carried out correctly, the operating safety
restraint systems have not been modi-
of your vehicle may be affected. There is a risk
fied.
of an accident and injury.
i An airbag increases the protection of
vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt. G Risk of injury
However, airbags are only an additional The restraint system may not work as inten-
restraint system which complements, but ded if the following components have been
does not replace, the seat belt. All vehicle modified or work on these components has
occupants must wear their seat belt cor- not been performed correctly:
rectly at all times, even if the vehicle is Rrestraint system, consisting of the seat
equipped with airbags. This is because – on belts and anchorages, belt tensioners, belt
the one hand – airbags are not deployed in force limiters, airbags
all types of accident, as in some situations
Rwiring
airbag deployment would not increase the
protection afforded to vehicle occupants, Rnetworked electronic systems
provided they are wearing their seat belt Airbags or belt tensioners could then fail, e.g.
correctly. On the other hand, airbag deploy- in the event of an accident in which the decel-
ment only provides increased protection if eration force would normally be high enough
the seat belt is worn correctly because: to trigger the systems, or they could be trig-
gered unintentionally. Never carry out any
modifications on the restraint systems.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 35

Occupant safety 35
Never tamper with electronic components Triggering of belt tensioners, belt force
and their software. limiters and airbags
In the event of a collision, the airbag control
unit evaluates important physical data such
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) as duration, direction and force of the vehicle
Safety
The SRS reduces the risk of occupants com- deceleration or acceleration. Based on the
ing into contact with the vehicle's interior in evaluation of this data and in the event of lon-
the event of an accident. It can also reduce gitudinal deceleration in a collision, the airbag
the forces to which occupants are subjected control unit pre-emptively triggers the belt
during an accident. tensioners, depending on the rate of deceler-
ation, in the first stage.
The SRS consists of:
RThe + warning lamp i The front belt tensioners can only be trig-
gered if the belt tongue is correctly
Rbelt tensioners engaged in the seat belt buckle.
Rbelt force limiters The front airbags are only deployed if there is
Rairbags an even higher rate of vehicle deceleration in
a longitudinal direction.
The + warning lamp Your vehicle has adaptive, dual stage front
airbags. When the first activation threshold is
The SRS functions are checked regularly reached, the front airbag is filled with enough
when you turn on the ignition and when the propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions The front airbag is only fully inflated if a sec-
can be detected in good time. ond threshold is reached within a few milli-
The + warning lamp in the instrument seconds, due to the control unit having detec-
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched ted further deceleration.
on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
after the engine is started. Criteria for triggering belt tensioners and
airbags
G Risk of injury In the first stage of a collision, the airbag con-
If SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems trol unit evaluates the duration and direction
may be activated unintentionally or not be of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in
deployed in the event of an accident with order to determine whether it is necessary to
heavy braking. trigger the belt tensioner and/or airbag.
A malfunction has occurred if the + warn- The belt tensioner and airbag triggering
ing lamp: thresholds are variable and are adapted to the
Rdoes not light up when you switch on the rate of deceleration of the vehicle. This proc-
ignition ess is pre-emptive in nature as the airbag
must be deployed during – and not at the end
Rdoes not go out after the engine has been of – the collision.
running for a few seconds
i Airbags are not deployed in all types of
Rlights up again once the engine is running
accidents. They are controlled by complex
In this case, have SRS checked immediately sensor technology and evaluation logic.
at a qualified specialist workshop. This process is pre-emptive in nature as
airbag deployment must take place during
the impact and must be adapted to provide
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 36

36 Occupant safety
calculated, additional protection for the ! Do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
vehicle occupants. Not all airbags are buckle on the front-passenger seat if the
deployed in an accident. seat is not occupied. The belt tensioners
The different airbag systems work inde- could otherwise be triggered in an acci-
pendently of each other. However, the dent.
deployment of each individual system will
Safety
If the seat belt is also equipped with a belt

depend on the type of accident determined force limiter, the force exerted by the seat
by the control system in the first stages of belt on the seat occupant is reduced.
the collision (head-on collision, side impact Belt tensioners tighten the seat belts in an
and overturn) and the extent of the acci- accident, pulling them close against the body.
dent (in particular, the vehicle's rate of
deceleration or acceleration). i Belt tensioners do not correct incorrect
seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-
belts.
tion and the direction of the force are essen-
tially determined by: Belt tensioners do not pull occupants back
towards the backrest.
Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-
sion The front belt force limiters are synchronised
with the front airbags, which distribute a pro-
Rthe collision angle portion of the deceleration forces exerted on
Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehi- the occupant over a greater area.
cle When the ignition is switched on, the belt ten-
Rthe characteristics of the object with which sioners/belt buckle tensioners cannot be
the vehicle collides, e.g. the other vehicle triggered unless:
Factors which can only be seen and measured Rthe
restraint systems are operational; see
after a collision has occurred do not play a + warning lamp.
decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
nor do they provide an indication of it. each lap-shoulder belt in the front of the
The vehicle may be deformed significantly, vehicle.
e. g. on the bonnet or the wing, without an Depending on the type and severity of an
airbag being deployed. This is the case if only accident, the belt tensioners/belt buckle ten-
parts which are relatively easily deformed are sioners may be triggered:
affected and the necessary deceleration does
Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end colli-
not occur. Conversely, airbags may be
deployed even though the vehicle suffers only sion if the vehicle decelerates or acceler-
minor deformations. For example, this is the ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur-
case if very rigid vehicle parts such as longi- ing the initial stages of impact
tudinal body members are affected and suf- Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicle
ficient deceleration occurs as a result. is subjected to high lateral acceleration/
deceleration
Belt tensioners, belt force limiters Rin certain situations if the vehicle over-
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts turns, and the system determines that it
in the second row are equipped with belt ten- can provide additional protection
sioners. The front seat belts are also fitted If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a
with belt buckle tensioners. bang and a small amount of powder may also
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 37

Occupant safety 37
affect your hearing. The powder that escapes G Risk of injury

does not generally constitute a health hazard. Airbags provide additional protection; they
The + warning lamp lights up. are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
i If the belt buckle tensioners have been Observe the following notes to reduce the risk
triggered on the front seats, the buckle will of serious or even fatal injury if an airbag is
Safety
be pulled down and will be almost flush with deployed:
the upper edge of the seat. The + warn- Rall vehicle occupants ― in particular, preg-
ing lamp comes on. nant women ― must wear their seat belt
G Risk of injury correctly at all times and lean back against
the backrest, which should be positioned
The belt buckle tensioners on the front seats
as close to the vertical as possible. The
only function if the belt buckles can be pulled
head restraint must support the back of the
down without obstruction. They must not be
head at about eye level.
restricted in any way. For this reason, do not
hold the belt buckles and do not place any Ralways secure children less than 1.50 m tall
objects under the belt buckles. Otherwise, the or under 12 years of age in suitable child
tensioning of the belt by the buckle is restric- restraint systems.
ted or will not function and will not provide Rall vehicle occupants must select a seat
any additional protection. position that is as far away from the airbag
as possible. The driver's seat position must
G Risk of injury allow the vehicle to be driven safely. The
If the seat belt tensioners have been trig- driver's chest should be as far away from
gered, they provide no additional protection the middle of the driver's front airbag cover
in the event of another accident. Therefore, as possible.
have belt tensioners which have been trig-
Rmove the front-passenger seat as far back
gered replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop. as possible, especially if a child is secured
in a child restraint system on the seat.
Comply with safety regulations when dispos-
ing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Rvehicle occupants – in particular, children
Service Centre can provide details of these – must not lean their head into the area of
regulations. the window in which the sidebag/window-
bag is deployed.
Airbags Rrearward-facing child restraint systems
must not be fitted to the front-passenger
Airbag deployment slows down and restricts seat unless the front-passenger front air-
the movement of the vehicle occupant. bag has been disabled. The front-passenger
If the airbags are deployed, you will hear a front airbag of a vehicle fitted with auto-
bang and a small amount of powder may also matic child seat recognition* is only disa-
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang bled when a child restraint system with
affect your hearing. The powder that escapes automatic child seat recognition is fitted to
does not generally constitute a health hazard. the front-passenger seat. The 4
The + warning lamp lights up. PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp
The SRS/AIRBAG identification indicates the must be continuously lit.
location of the airbags. If the front-passenger seat of your vehicle
does not have automatic child seat recog-
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 38

38 Occupant safety
nition*, or your rearward-facing child G Risk of injury

restraint system does not have automatic The airbag's functionality can only be guaran-
child seat recognition, children must be teed if the following parts are not covered and
secured in a child restraint system on a no badges or stickers are attached to them:
suitable seat in the rear. If you secure a Rpadded steering wheel boss
Safety
forward-facing child restraint system to the

front-passenger seat, you must move the Rfront-passenger front airbag cover
front-passenger seat as far back as possi- Router side of seats
ble.
Rmake sure there are no heavy or sharp- G Risk of injury
edged objects in pockets of clothing. When an airbag deploys, a small amount of
Rdo not lean forwards, e.g. over the cover of powder is released. The powder may cause
the driver's/front-passenger front airbag, short-term breathing difficulties to persons
particularly when the vehicle is in motion. suffering from asthma or other pulmonary
conditions.
Rdo not put your feet on the dashboard.
In order to prevent potential breathing diffi-
Ronly hold the steering wheel by the rim. This culties, you should leave the vehicle as soon
allows the airbag to deploy fully. You could as it is safe to do so. You can also open the
be injured if the airbag is deployed and you window to allow fresh air to enter the interior.
are holding the inside of the steering wheel. The powder generally does not constitute a
Rdo not lean on the doors from inside the health hazard and does not indicate that there
vehicle. is a fire in the vehicle.
Rmake sure that there are no people, ani- G Risk of injury
mals or objects between the vehicle occu- The airbag parts are hot after the airbag has
pants and the area of deployment of the been deployed. Do not touch them; other-
airbag. wise, you may burn yourself.
Rdo not place any objects between the seat Have the airbags checked at a qualified spe-
backrest and the door. cialist workshop. Otherwise, occupants are
Rdo not hang any hard objects, for example, not protected by the airbags in the event of
coat hangers, on the grab handles or coat another accident.
hooks.
Front airbags
Rdo not attach accessories, e.g. cup holders,
The front airbags are designed to increase
to the doors. protection for the driver's and front passeng-
It is not possible to rule out a risk of injuries er's head and chest.
caused by an airbag due to the high speed at
which the airbag is required to deploy.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 39

Occupant safety 39
Driver's front airbag : deploys in front of the G Risk of injury

steering wheel; front-passenger front air- Sensors to control the airbags are located in
bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove the doors. Therefore, do not make any modi-
compartment. They are deployed: fications to the doors or door trim, e.g. retro-
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate fitting loudspeakers. Damage to the doors
Safety
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a can affect operation of the sidebags.
longitudinal direction
The purpose of sidebag deployment is to
Rif the system determines that airbag enhance the level of protection for the thorax
deployment can offer additional protection (but not the head, neck or arms) of the vehicle
to that provided by the seat belt occupants on the side of the vehicle on which
Rif the seat belt is fastened the impact occurs.
Rindependently of other airbags in the vehi-
cle
Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the sys-
tem detects high vehicle deceleration in a
longitudinal direction
On vehicles with automatic child seat recog-
nition in the front-passenger seat*, front-
passenger front airbag ; is only deployed if
the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning
lamp in the centre console is not lit
(Y page 43). This means that there is not a Front sidebags : or rear-compartment side-
child restraint system with automatic child bags* ; deploy next to the outer seat cush-
seat recognition* fitted to the front- ions. They are deployed:
passenger seat or that a child restraint sys- Ron the side on which an impact occurs
tem with automatic child seat recognition*
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
has been fitted to the front-passenger seat
incorrectly. of lateral vehicle deceleration or accelera-
tion, e.g. in a side impact
Sidebags Rindependently of the seat belt use
G Risk of injury Rindependently of the front airbags
If you wish to use seat covers, Mercedes-Benz
Rindependently of the belt tensioners
recommends that, for safety reasons, you
only use seat covers that have been approved Rif the vehicle overturns, but only if the sys-
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. tem detects high vehicle deceleration in a
The seat covers must have a special tear seam lateral direction and determines that side-
for sidebags. Otherwise, a head/thorax sidebag deployment can offer additional pro-
bag cannot deploy correctly and would fail to tection to that provided by the seat belt
provide the intended protection in the event
of an accident. Appropriate seat covers can
Windowbags
be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz Service The purpose of the windowbags is to enhance
Centre. the level of protection for the head (but not
chest or arms) of the vehicle occupants on
the side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 40

40 Occupant safety
The windowbags are integrated into the side If you are driving faster than approximately
of the roof frame They are located between 30 km/h, PRE-SAFE® may take the following
the front door (A-pillar) and the rear windows measures in these situations:
(D-pillar). Rit tensions the front seat belts.
Ron vehicles with memory functions*: it
Safety
adjusts the front-passenger seat if this is in

an unfavourable position.
Rif the vehicle skids, it closes the sliding/
tilting sunroof* and the side windows so
that only a small gap remains.
if the hazardous situation passes without
resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens
the belt pretensioning. You can then reverse
all settings made by PRE-SAFE®.
Windowbags : are deployed:
If the seat belts are not released:
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of vehicle acceleration or deceleration in a X Move the backrest or the seat back slightly
lateral direction until the belt tension is reduced.
The locking mechanism releases.
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rindependently of the front airbags G Risk of injury
Rregardless
When adjusting the seat, make sure that
of whether the front-passenger
nobody can become trapped.
seat is occupied
Rindependently of the seat belt use ! Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats when adjusting
the seats. You could otherwise damage the
PRE-SAFE®* system seats and the objects.
PRE-SAFE® system takes pre-emptive meas-
ures to protect you in certain hazardous sit-
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-
uations.
PRO luxury head restraints*
PRE-SAFE® intervenes in the event of:
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
Remergency braking situations, e.g. if the head restraints are designed to increase pro-
BAS Brake Assist intervenes tection of the driver’s and front-passenger’s
Rcritical situations involving driving dynam- head and neck. To this end, the head
ics, e.g. if the vehicle oversteers or under- restraints on the driver's and front-passenger
steers significantly due to physical limits seats are moved forwards and upwards in the
being exceeded event of a rear-end collision when viewed in
the direction of travel. This provides better
head support.
G Risk of injury
Head restraint covers prevent NECK-PRO
head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 41

Occupant safety 41
restraints from triggering properly. The NECK- G Risk of injury

PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head An unsecured or an incorrectly positioned
restraints can therefore not provide the inten- load increases the risk of injury for the child
ded protection. Do not use head restraint cov- and all other occupants, during:
ers.
Ran accident
Safety
If NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO Ra braking manoeuvre
luxury head restraints have been triggered in
Ra sudden change of direction
an accident, you must reset the head
restraints on the driver’s and front-passenger Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the
seat (Y page 252). Head restraints that have vehicle unless they are secured. You will find
been triggered are tilted forwards. further information under "Loading guide-
lines" in the index.
Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems

If a child is travelling in your vehicle, secure Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
the child using a child restraint system which use the child restraint systems listed on
is appropriate to the size and age of the child (Y page 46).
and is recommended for Mercedes-Benz
vehicles. You should fit the restraint system G Risk of injury
to a suitable rear seat. Ensure that the child To reduce the risk of serious or even fatal
is secured throughout the trip. injury to the child in the event of a sudden
You can obtain information about the correct change in direction, braking or an accident:
child restraint system from any Mercedes- Rchildren less than 1.50 m tall and under
Benz Service Centre. twelve years of age must always be secured
i It is advisable to use Mercedes-Benz care in special child restraint systems on a suit-
able vehicle seat. This is necessary
products to clean child restraint systems.
because the seat belts are not designed for
Information about this can be obtained
children of this size.
from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Rdo not secure children less than 1.50 m tall
G Risk of injury or under twelve years of age on the front-
Do not leave children unsupervised in the passenger seat. Exception: the child is
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child secured in a vehicle with automatic child
restraint system. Children could injure them- seat recognition on the front-passenger
selves on parts of the vehicle. They could also seat* and is secured in a child restraint
be seriously or even fatally injured by pro- system with automatic child seat recogni-
longed exposure to extreme heat or cold. tion.
Do not expose the child restraint system to Rif you secure a forward-facing child
direct sunlight. Parts of the child restraint sys-
restraint system to the front-passenger
tem could heat up and the child could burn
seat, you must move the front-passenger
herself/himself on them.
seat as far back as possible.
If a child opens a door, the child or other per-
Rchildren must never travel sitting on the lap
sons could be injured as a result. The child
could get out and be injured in the process or of another occupant. Due to the forces
be injured by a passing vehicle. occurring in the event of a sudden change
of direction, heavy braking or an accident,
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 42

42 Occupant safety
it would not be possible to restrain the

child. The child could be thrown against
parts of the vehicle interior and be seriously
or even fatally injured.
G Risk of injury
Safety
The child restraint system cannot perform its

protective function if it is not correctly fitted
to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be
restrained in the event of a sudden change of
direction, heavy braking or an accident. This Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child
may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For restraint system
this reason, when fitting a child restraint sys-
tem, observe the manufacturer's installation G Risk of injury
instructions and the correct use of the child If the front-passenger front airbag is not dis-
restraint system. abled:
Child restraint systems should be fitted to the Ra child secured in a child restraint system
rear seats. Children are generally better pro- on the front-passenger seat could be seri-
tected there. ously and even fatally injured by the front-
The entire base of the child restraint system passenger front airbag deploying. This is
must always rest on the seat cushion. Never especially a risk if the child is in the imme-
place objects, e.g. a cushion, under the child diate vicinity of the front-passenger front
restraint system. airbag when it deploys.
Only use child restraint systems with their Ra child must never be secured on the front-
original covers. Only replace damaged covers passenger seat in a rearward-facing child
with genuine Mercedes-Benz covers. restraint system. Only secure a rearward-
For safety reasons, you should only use child facing child restraint system on a suitable
restraint systems which have been approved rear seat.
for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Ralways move the front-passenger seat to
the rearmost position if you secure a child
Child seat on the front-passenger seat
in a forward-facing child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat.
The front-passenger front airbag is not disa-
bled:
Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
recognition in the front-passenger seat*.
Ron vehicles without automatic child seat
recognition on the front-passenger seat*, if
no special child restraint system with auto-
matic child seat recognition has been fitted
Warning on the front-passenger sun visor to the front-passenger seat.
Ron vehicles with automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat*, if
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 43

Occupant safety 43
the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning bag has not been disabled. If the front-
lamp is not lit. passenger front airbag is deployed, the child
To alert you to this danger, a corresponding could be seriously or even fatally injured.
warning sticker is located on the dashboard Proceed as follows:
and on both sides of the sun visor on the front- Rdo not use a rearward-facing child restraint
Safety
passenger side. system on the front-passenger seat.
Information about recommended child Rfit a rearward-facing child restraint system
restraint systems is available at any on a suitable rear seat.
or
Automatic child seat recognition on the Ronly use a forward-facing child restraint
front-passenger seat system on the front-passenger seat and
If your vehicle does not have automatic child move the front-passenger seat to its rear-
seat recognition on the front-passenger seat, most position.
this is indicated by a special sticker. The Rhave the automatic child seat recognition
sticker is affixed to the side of the dashboard checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
on the front-passenger side. It is visible when
you open the front-passenger door. To ensure that the automatic child seat rec-
ognition on the front-passenger seat func-
The warning lamp3 is located on the centre
tions correctly, never place objects (such as
console.
a cushion) under the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion. An
incorrectly fitted child restraint system can-
not perform its intended protective function
in the event of an accident, and could lead to
injuries.
i The windowbag, the sidebag and the belt

tensioner on the front-passenger side are
still active even if the front-passenger front
airbag is disabled by the automatic child-
The sensors for the automatic child seat rec- seat recognition on the front-passenger
ognition on the front-passenger seat detects seat.
whether a special Mercedes-Benz child seat
with automatic child seat recognition has G Risk of injury
been fitted. In such cases, 4 PASSENGER Do not place electronic devices on the front-
AIRBAG OFF warning lamp : lights up. The passenger seat, e.g.:
front-passenger front airbag is disabled. Rlaptops, when switched on
G Risk of injury Rmobile phones
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or
lamp does not light up when the child restraint access cards
system is fitted, the front-passenger front air-
3 Vehicles without automatic child seat recognition in the front-passenger seat: the warning lamp lights up
briefly when you turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. However, it has no function and does not
indicate that there is automatic child seat recognition on the front-passenger seat.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 44

44 Occupant safety
Signals from electronic equipment can cause This means that the front-passenger front air-
interference in the automatic child seat rec- bag will not deploy during an accident. It is
ognition sensor system. This could lead to a also possible that the 6 SRS warning lamp
system malfunction. This may cause the lights up and/or the 4 PASSENGER AIR-
4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp BAG OFF warning lamp does not light up
Safety
to light up without there being a child seat briefly when you turn the key in the ignition
with automatic child seat recognition fitted. lock to position 2.
Suitable positioning of the child restraint system

Weight categories and ages Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0+: up to 13 kg
Up to approximately up to approximately
9 months 18 months
Child restraint system on the Vehicles with automatic Vehicles with automatic
front-passenger seat child seat recognition* on child seat recognition* on
the front-passenger seat: as the front-passenger seat:
recommended4 as recommended4
Child restraint system on the Universal Universal
left-hand and right-hand rear
seats and the third row of
seats*.
Child restraint system on the - -
centre rear seat
Weight categories and ages Group I: 9 to 18 kg Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg;

between approximately between approximately
8 months and 4 years 3½ and 12 years
Child restraint system on the As recommended5 As recommended5
front-passenger seat
Child restraint system on the Universal Universal
left-hand and right-hand rear
seats and the third row of
seats*.
Child restraint system on the Britax-Römer DUO PLUS Britax-Römer KID
centre rear seat
4 Only use child restraint systems with automatic child seat recognition.
5 If you are using a child restraint system without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger
seat to its rearmost position.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 45

Occupant safety 45
"Universal" category child restraint systems

can be recognised by their orange approval
label.
Safety
Example of an approval label on the child restraint
system
Suitable seat positions for ISOFIX child restraint systems
Weight categories
Carrycot 0: up to 0+: up to 13 kg
10 kg
Size cate- F G E E D C
gory
Equipment ISO/L1 ISO/L2 ISO/R1 ISO/R1 ISO/R2 ISO/R3
Rear bench X6 X6 IUF7 IUF7 IUF7 IUF7
seat, left and
right
third row of X6 X6 X6 X6 X6 X6
seats* left
and right
Weight category
I: 9 to 18 kg
Size category D C B B1 A
Equipment ISO/R2 ISO/R3 ISO/F2 ISO/F2X ISO/F3
6 X: this position is unsuitable.

7 IUF: suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the Universal category and
are approved for use in this weight category.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 46

46 Occupant safety
Weight category
I: 9 to 18 kg
Rear bench IUF8 IUF8 IUF8 IUF8 IUF8
seat, left and
Safety
right
third row of X9 X9 IUF8 IUF8 IUF8
seats* left and
right
Recommended child restraint systems

Weight categories and ages Group 0: up to 10 kg Group 0+: up to 13 kg
Up to approximately up to approximately
9 months 18 months
Manufacturer Britax-Römer Britax-Römer
Type BABY SAFE PLUS BABY SAFE PLUS
Approval number E1 03 301146 E1 03 301146
E1 04 301146 E1 04 301146
Daimler order number A 000 970 10 00 A 000 970 10 00
Automatic child seat recognition Yes Yes
Weight categories and ages Group I: 9 to 18 kg Group II/III: 15 to

between approx- 36 kg;
imately 8 months and between approx-
4 years imately 3½ and
12 years
Manufacturer Britax-Römer Britax-Römer
Type DUO PLUS KID
Approval number E1 03 301133 E1 03 301148
E1 04 301133 E1 04 301148
Automatic child seat recognition Yes Yes
8 IUF: suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child seat securing systems that belong to the Universal category and
are approved for use in this weight category.
9 X: this position is unsuitable.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 47

Occupant safety 47
Weight categories and ages Group I: 9 to 18 kg Group II/III: 15 to

between approx- 36 kg;
imately 8 months and between approx-
4 years imately 3½ and
12 years
Safety
Automatic child seat recognition No10 No10
Child seat lock* more than 22 kg, secure the child restraint
system using a lap-shoulder belt.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
seat belts on the rear bench seats may be fit-
G Risk of injury
ted with a child seat lock.
The child restraint system cannot perform its
X Insert the seat belt tongue into the buckle.
protective function if it is not correctly fitted
X Pull the belt out completely and let it be to a suitable vehicle seat. The child cannot be
reeled back in by the inertia reel. restrained in the event of a sudden change of
The child seat lock ensures that the belt direction, heavy braking or an accident. This
does not slacken once the child seat is may lead to serious or even fatal injuries. For
secured. this reason, when fitting a child restraint sys-
X To release the child seat lock: roll up the tem, observe the manufacturer's installation
belt completely after removing the child instructions and the correct use of the child
seat. restraint system.
On the rear seats, only use child restraint sys-
ISOFIX child seat securing system in tems with an ISOFIX child seat securing sys-
the rear compartment tem which have been recommended for use
in Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for
An incorrectly fitted child restraint system
specially-designed child restraint systems on
could come loose and seriously or even fatally
the rear seats. Securing rings for two child
injure the child or other vehicle occupants.
restraint systems are fitted on the left and
When fitting the child restraint system, make
right of the rear seat backrests.
sure that it is engaged in the securing rings
On vehicles with a third row of seats*, the on both sides.
third row of seats is also fitted with securing
rings. G Risk of injury
G Risk of injury Please note that if child restraint systems, or
their retaining systems, are damaged or sub-
A child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX
jected to a load in an accident, they may not
child seat securing system does not provide
be able to provide their protective function.
sufficient protection for children weighing
This could result in serious or even fatal inju-
more than 22 kg. For this reason, do not
ries to the secured child in the event of an
secure children weighing more than 22 kg in
accident, heavy braking or a sudden change
a child restraint system secured by the ISOFIX
in direction.
child seat securing system. If the child weighs
10 Forchild restraint systems without automatic child seat recognition, move the front-passenger seat to the
rearmost position.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 48

48 Occupant safety
For this reason, have child restraint systems

and their anchorages which have been dam-
aged or subjected to a load in an accident
checked immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Safety
! When fitting the child restraint system,

make sure that the seat belt for the centre
seat does not become trapped. Otherwise,
it could be damaged.
X Remove respective covering cap : of the

TopTether anchorage.
X Remove covers :.
; Securing rings
TopTether X Move head restraint = upwards.

TopTether provides an additional connection X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with
between the child restraint system secured TopTether*. Comply with the manufactur-
with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce er's installation instructions.
the risk of injury even further. X Guide TopTether belt* B under head
The TopTether anchorages are located on the restraint = between the two head restraint
rear side of the rear seat backrests. rods.
For the third row of seats*, use the lashing X Guide TopTether belt* B downwards
eyelets in the luggage compartment floor.
between luggage compartment cover :
and rear seat backrest ;.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 49

Driving safety systems 49
X Hook TopTether hook* A into TopTether Override feature for the rear side win-
anchorage ?. dows
X Tighten TopTether belt* B. Comply with G Risk of accident and injury
the manufacturer's installation instruc- Activate the child-proof locks for the rear
tions. doors and the override switch for the rear
Safety
X Move head restraint = back down again windows if children are travelling in the vehi-
slightly if necessary (Y page 68). Make cle. Otherwise, the children could open doors
sure that you do not interfere with the cor- or windows while the vehicle is in motion and
rect routing of TopTether belt* B. injure themselves or others.
Child-proof locks
If children are travelling in the vehicle, you can
activate the child-proof locks for the rear
doors.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
The child-proof locks on the rear doors enable
you to secure each door individually. A locked
door cannot be opened from the inside. The
door can be opened from the outside if the
vehicle is unlocked. X To activate: press button :.
G Risk of accident and injury Button : engages. The rear side windows
Activate the child-proof locks for the rear can only be operated using the switches on
doors and the override switch for the rear the driver's door.
windows if children are travelling in the vehi- X To deactivate: press button :.
cle. Otherwise, the children could open doors Button : pops out and is flush with the
or windows while the vehicle is in motion and other buttons. You can operate the rear
injure themselves or others. side windows using the switches in the rear
compartment.
Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
RBAS (Brake Assist System)

RAdaptive brake lamps
X To activate: press latch ; downwards.
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
REBV (electronic brake-power distribution)
working properly.
X To deactivate: press latch : upwards.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 50

50 Driving safety systems
R4ETS (Electronic Traction Support) X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the

RDistance warning function* (vehicles with brake pedal with force until the braking sit-
Distronic*) uation is over.
i In wintry driving conditions, always use X To make a full brake application:

Safety
winter tyres (M+S tyres) and if necessary, depress the brake pedal with full force.
snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-
ing safety systems described in this section G Risk of accident
work as effectively as possible. If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. This limits the steerability of the vehi-
G Risk of accident cle when braking and the braking distance
The risk of an accident is significantly may increase.
increased by driving too fast. This is particu- If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunction,
larly the case when cornering as well as on then BAS and ESP are also deactivated. There
wet or slippery roads or when driving too close is an increased risk of your vehicle skidding in
to the vehicle in front. certain situations.
The driving safety systems described in this You should always adapt your driving style to
section can neither reduce this risk nor over- suit prevailing road and weather conditions.
ride the laws of physics.
For this reason, always adapt your driving
Off-road ABS
style to suit prevailing road and weather con-
ditions. Maintain sufficient distance from An ABS system specifically suited to off-road
other road users and objects on the road. terrain is activated automatically if the LOW
RANGE (Y page 114) off-road gear is selec-
ted.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) At speeds below 30 km/h, the front wheels
lock cyclically under braking. The resulting
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way
digging-in effect reduces the stopping dis-
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
tance on off-road terrain. This limits steering
This allows you to continue steering the vehi-
capability.
cle when braking.
ABS works from a speed of about 8 km/h
upwards, regardless of road-surface condi- BAS (Brake Assist)
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even
when you only brake gently. BAS operates in emergency braking situa-
tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,
G Risk of accident BAS automatically boosts the braking force,
Do not depress the brake pedal several times thus shortening the stopping distance.
in quick succession (pumping). Depress the X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
brake firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake the emergency braking situation is over.
pedal reduces the braking effect. ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
Braking release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
G Risk of accident
a pulsing in the brake pedal.
If BAS has malfunctioned, the braking system
remains available with full brake boosting
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 51

effect. However, braking force is not auto- Rdo not deactivate ESP® under any circum-
matically increased in emergency braking sit- stances.
uations and the stopping distance may Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
increase.
necessary when pulling away.
Radapt your driving style to suit the prevail-
Safety
Adaptive brake lamps ing road and weather conditions.
Otherwise, the vehicle could skid.
i Adaptive brake lamps are only available in
certain countries. ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an accident if
you drive too fast. ESP® cannot override the
If you brake sharply from a speed of more laws of physics.
than 25 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS,
the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way, ! Only operate the vehicle briefly (for a max-
traffic travelling behind you is warned in an
imum of ten seconds) on a brake dyna-
even more noticeable manner.
mometer. Turn the key in the ignition lock
If you brake sharply from a speed of more to position 0 or 1. You could otherwise
than 70 km/h to a standstill, the hazard warn- damage the drive train or the brake system.
ing lamps are activated automatically. If the
brakes are applied again, the brake lamps ! A function or performance test should
light up continuously. The hazard warning only be carried out on a twin-axle dyna-
lamps switch off automatically if you travel mometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle
faster than 10 km/h. You can also switch off on such a dynamometer, please consult a
the hazard warning lamps using the hazard Mercedes-Benz Service Centre in advance.
warning switch button (Y page 81). You could otherwise damage the drive train
or the brake system.
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) i Only use wheels with the recommended
tyre sizes. Only then will ESP® function
ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,
properly.
i.e. power transmission between tyres and
the road surface.
ESP® trailer stabilisation
If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one If your trailer begins to lurch, you can only
or more wheels are braked to stabilise the stabilise the vehicle/trailer combination by
vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also depressing the brake firmly.
modified to keep the vehicle on the desired In this situation, ESP® assists you and can
course within physical limits. ESP® assists detect when the trailer begins to lurch.
the driver when pulling away on wet or slip- ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and
pery roads. ESP® can also stabilise the vehi- limiting the engine output until the vehicle/
cle during braking. trailer combination has stabilised.
When ESP® intervenes, the d warning Trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. about 65 km/h.
G Risk of accident G Risk of accident
If the d warning lamp in the instrument If road and weather conditions are poor,
cluster flashes, proceed as follows: trailer stabilisation will not be able to prevent
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 52

52 Driving safety systems
the trailer from swerving and will thus be

unable to reduce the risk of an accident. Trail-
ers with a high centre of gravity can tip over
before ESP® can detect this.
Trailer stabilisation does not work if ESP® is

Safety
deactivated or disabled because of a mal-

function.
Activating/deactivating ESP®
ESP® is activated automatically when the X To deactivate: press button :.
engine is running.
The d warning lamp in the instrument
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- cluster lights up.
lowing situations:
Rwhen using snow chains G Risk of accident
Rin
If the d warning lamp in the instrument
deep snow
cluster is continuously lit when the engine is
Ron sand or gravel running, ESP® is deactivated or not available
due to a malfunction. There is an increased
G Risk of accident
risk of your vehicle skidding in certain situa-
Activate ESP® as soon as the situations tions.
described above no longer apply. ESP® will
You should always adapt your driving style to
otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle
suit prevailing road and weather conditions.
if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts
to spin. X To activate: press button :.
If you deactivate ESP®: The d warning lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
RESP® no longer improves driving stability.
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and
Off-road ESP®
the drive wheels can spin. Spinning of the
wheels results in a cutting action, which An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road
provides better grip. terrain is activated automatically if the LOW
Rtraction control is still activated. RANGE off-road gear (Y page 114) is selec-
ted. It intervenes with a delay if there is over-
RESP® still provides support when you steering or understeering, thus improving
brake. traction.
i If ESP® is deactivated and one or more
wheels start to spin, the d warning lamp EBV (electronic brake force distribu-
in the instrument cluster flashes. In such tion)
situations, ESP® will not stabilise the vehi-
cle. EBV monitors and controls the brake pres-
sure on the rear wheels to improve driving
stability when braking.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 53

G Risk of accident ! A function or performance test should

If EBV is malfunctioning, the brake system is only be carried out on a twin-axle dyna-
still available with full brake boosting effect. mometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle
However, the rear wheels can still lock, e.g. on such a dynamometer, please consult a
under full braking. This could cause you to Mercedes-Benz Service Centre in advance.
You could otherwise damage the drive train
Safety
lose control of your vehicle and cause an acci-
dent. You should therefore adapt your driving or the brake system.
style to the different handling characteristics.
i If the brakes are subjected to heavy loads,
4ETS switches off automatically for a brief
period so that the brakes do not heat up
4ETS (Electronic Traction System) further. If, for this reason, 4ETS does not
4ETS makes it possible to pull away or accel- engage, the d warning lamp in the
erate on a slippery surface. It brakes the instrument cluster lights up. The message
wheels individually if they start to spin. ABS, ESP unavailable see Owner's
The d warning lamp in the instrument Manual also appears in the multi-function
cluster lights up briefly when the engine is display.
started. This indicates that the warning lamp
is operational.
! The engine must be off when the parking
brake is being checked on the brake dyna-
X Activate the LOW RANGE off-road gear
mometer. Application of the brakes via
(Y page 114) if appropriate to driving con- 4ETS may otherwise destroy the braking
ditions. system.
The d warning lamp in the instrument
cluster flashes at any speed if at least one tyre Off-road terrain-4ETS (Electronic Trac-
has exceeded its tyre grip limit. tion System)
G Risk of accident A 4ETS system specifically suited to off-road
If the d warning lamp in the instrument terrain is activated automatically if the LOW
cluster flashes, proceed as follows: RANGE* off-road gear is selected
Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as (Y page 114).
necessary when pulling away.
Raccelerate less when driving. Distance warning function* (vehicles
Radapt your driving style to suit the prevail- with Distronic*)
ing road and weather conditions.
This function will issue a warning at speeds of
Otherwise, the vehicle could skid. around 30 km/h or more if:
If you drive too fast, 4ETS cannot reduce the Rfor a period of several seconds, the dis-
risk of an accident. 4ETS cannot override the tance to the vehicle in front is too short for
laws of physics. the speed at which you are travelling. The
· distance warning lamp in the instru-
! Only operate the vehicle briefly (for a max- ment cluster will light up.
imum of ten seconds) on a brake dyna- Ryou are approaching the vehicle in front too
mometer. Turn the key in the ignition lock
rapidly. An intermittent warning tone will
to position 0 or 1. You could otherwise
then sound and the · distance warning
damage the drive train or the brake system.
lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 54

54 Anti-theft systems
In order to maintain the appropriate distance ATA* (anti-theft alarm system)

to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a
crash, you must apply the brakes yourself. A visual and audible alarm is triggered when
the alarm system is primed and you open:
G Risk of accident Ra door
Pay particular attention to the traffic condi-
Safety
Ra door using the emergency key element

tions if the distance warning lamp · in the
instrument cluster lights up or an intermittent Rthe tailgate
warning tone sounds. Rthe bonnet
If necessary, brake or manoeuvre to avoid an
obstacle. The alarm is not switched off even if you close
an open door again.
X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-
tivate the distance warning function in the
on-board computer (Y page 109).
After activation, the Ä symbol is dis-
played in the lower multi-function display.
For more information on the distance warning
function, see the Distronic section*
(Y page 119).
Anti-theft systems
X To prime: lock the vehicle using the key.
Immobiliser On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, the locking
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from button on the door handle can also be used.
being started without the correct key. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm sys-
tem is primed after approximately 10 sec-
Activating the immobiliser onds.
X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle using the
X With the key: remove the key from the
ignition lock. key. On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, you
can also unlock the vehicle by grasping the
X With KEYLESS GO*: press the start/stop door handle.
button on the dashboard.
The engine switches off. Deactivating the alarm
Deactivating the immobiliser X With the key: insert the key into the igni-
tion lock.
X With the key: turn the key to position 2 in The alarm is deactivated.
the ignition lock. or
X With KEYLESS GO*: press the start/stop X Press the % or & button on the key.
button on the dashboard twice without The alarm is deactivated.
depressing the brake.
i The immobiliser is always deactivated
when you start the engine.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 55

Anti-theft systems 55
X With KEYLESS GO*: grasp the door han- contained in the Vehicle submenu,
dle. The key must be outside the vehicle. (Y page 107) the following message appears
The alarm is deactivated. in the multi-function display after switching
or off the ignition:
X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
Safety
board. The key must be inside the vehicle.
The alarm is deactivated.
Tow-away protection*
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if the
vehicle's angle of inclination is altered while
X Press X.
tow-away protection is primed. For example, The Tow-away protection off message
this occurs if the vehicle is jacked up on one appears in the multi-function display.
side. i If you press W, tow-away protection
will remain primed.
Priming tow-away protection
X Lock the vehicle with the key or, on vehicles
X Make sure that all the doors and the tail- with KEYLESS GO*, also using the locking
gate are closed. button on the door handle.
X Lock the vehicle with the key or, on vehicles Tow-away protection remains deactivated
with KEYLESS GO*, with the locking button until:
on the door handle. Rthe vehicle is unlocked again.
Tow-away protection is primed after Ra door is opened and closed again.
approximately 30 seconds.
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
Deactivating tow-away protection
When you unlock your vehicle using the key
Interior motion sensor*
or KEYLESS GO*, tow-away protection is
automatically deactivated. If the interior motion sensor is primed, a vis-
Deactivate tow-away protection manually to ual and audible alarm is triggered when move-
prevent a false alarm if your vehicle: ment is detected in the vehicle interior while
the vehicle is locked. This occurs, for exam-
Ris being transported ple, if someone breaks the side windows of
Ris being loaded, e.g. onto a ferry or car your vehicle or reaches into the vehicle's inte-
transporter rior.
Ris parked on a movable surface, e.g. split-
level garages Priming the interior motion sensor
It is possible to switch off tow-away protec- X Make sure that:
tion on the on-board computer for the next Rthe side windows are closed
time the vehicle is locked (Y page 109). Tow- Rthe hinged side windows* are closed
away protection remains deactivated until
you unlock and lock the vehicle again.
If you select Tow-away protection in the
"Display with ignition switched off" function
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 56

56 Anti-theft systems
Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* is closed. X Press X.

Rthere are no objects, e.g. mascots, hang- The Interior motion sensor off mes-
ing on the rear-view mirror or on the grab sage appears in the multi-function display.
handles on the roof trim. i If you press W, the interior motion sen-
This will prevent false alarms. sor will remain activated.
Safety
X Make sure that all the doors and the tail-

gate are closed.
with KEYLESS GO*, also using the locking
button on the door handle.
with KEYLESS GO*, also using the locking The interior motion sensor remains deacti-
button on the door handle. vated until:
The interior motion sensor is primed after Rthe vehicle is unlocked again.
approximately 40 seconds.
Ra door is opened and closed again.
Deactivating the interior motion sensor Rthe vehicle is locked again.
When you unlock your vehicle using the key
or KEYLESS GO*, the interior motion sensor
is automatically deactivated.
To prevent a false alarm, deactivate the inte-
rior motion sensor if you lock your vehicle
and:
Rpeople or animals remain in the vehicle.
Ra side window remains open.
Ra hinged side window* remains open.
Rthe sliding/tilting sunroof* remains open.
It is possible to deactivate the interior motion
sensor using the on-board computer for the
next time the vehicle is locked
(Y page 109). The interior motion sensor
remains deactivated until you unlock and lock
the vehicle again.
If you select Vehicle in the "Display with
ignition switched off" function in the Inte‐
rior motion sensor submenu,
(Y page 107) the following message appears
in the multi-function display after switching
off the ignition:
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 57

57
Opening and closing ........................... 58

Tailgate ................................................ 60
Key positions ....................................... 63
Seats .................................................... 64
Steering wheel .................................... 70
Mirrors ................................................. 72
Controls
Memory functions* ............................. 74
Seat belts ............................................. 75
Lights ................................................... 78
Windscreen wipers ............................. 84
Side windows ...................................... 85
Driving and parking ............................ 88
Transmission ....................................... 91
Instrument cluster .............................. 96
On-board computer ............................. 97
Off-road driving ................................. 112
Driving systems ................................ 117
Air conditioning ................................. 136
Sliding sunroof .................................. 149
Loading and stowing ........................ 151
Features ............................................. 161
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 58

58 Opening and closing
Opening and closing The vehicle relocks automatically if you do not

open a door or the tailgate within 40 seconds
Key of unlocking the vehicle.
The key centrally locks/unlocks:
Rthe
KEYLESS GO*
doors
Rthe tailgate You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
the KEYLESS GO key. To do this, you only
Rthe fuel filler flap need carry the key with you. When you touch
Controls
the surface of the sensors on the vehicle's

G Risk of accident
door handles, KEYLESS GO establishes a
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
radio connection between the vehicle and the
they could:
key.
Ropen a door from the inside at any time,
The distance to the door handle from which
even if it has been locked
you wish to lock or unlock the vehicle must
Rstart the vehicle using a key which has been not be greater than 1 m.
left in the vehicle When starting the engine and whilst driving,
Rrelease the parking brake KEYLESS GO also checks whether a valid key
is in the vehicle by periodically establishing
They could thereby endanger themselves and
radio contact.
others. Never leave children unsupervised in
the vehicle. Always take the key with you
when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only
leaving it for a short time.
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner

surface of the door handle.
X To lock the vehicle: press locking but-
: & To lock the vehicle

ton :.
; F To open/close the tailgate* If you pull on the handle of the tailgate, only
the luggage compartment of the vehicle is
= Emergency key element unlocked.
? % To unlock the vehicle
i If the vehicle has been parked for a long
A Battery check lamp
time, you must pull the door handle to acti-
When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. vate KEYLESS GO.
When locking, they flash three times.
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 59

Opening and closing 59
Individual settings Opening the doors from the inside

You can change the setting of the locking You can open a door from the inside even if it
system in such a way that only the driver's has been locked, unless the child-proof locks
door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This have been activated (Y page 49).
could be useful if you frequently travel on your
own.
X To change the setting: press the %
Controls
and & buttons simultaneously for
approximately six seconds until the battery
check lamp flashes twice.
The key now functions as follows:
X To unlock the driver's door: press the
% button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton twice. X Pull door handle ;.
X To lock centrally: press the & button. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
up. The door is unlocked and can be
The KEYLESS GO* function is changed as fol-
opened.
lows:
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the Locking/unlocking the vehicle from
driver's door. the inside
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
face of the door handle on the front-
from the inside. This feature may be useful if,
passenger door or the rear door.
for example, you wish to unlock the front-
X To lock centrally: press locking but-
passenger door from the inside or lock the
ton : on one of the door handles. vehicle before you pull away.
i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally
Restoring the factory settings
from the inside if the vehicle has been
X Press the % and & buttons simulta- locked with the key or KEYLESS GO*.
neously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp flashes twice. i It is only possible to lock the vehicle cen-
trally if the front-passenger door is closed.
Additional information
RConvenience opening (Y page 87)
RConvenience closing (Y page 87)
ROpening and closing in an emergency
(Y page 250)
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 60

60 Tailgate
X To unlock: press button :. The tailgate can be:

Ropened and closed manually
X To lock: press button ;.
(Y page 61)
Ropened and closed* automatically from
Automatic locking
outside (Y page 62)
The vehicle will lock automatically once you
Ropened and closed* automatically from
have pulled away.
You can switch the automatic locking func- inside (Y page 62)
Controls
tion on and off using the on-board computer

(Y page 107).
Spare wheel bracket*
i The vehicle is locked automatically when
the ignition is switched on and the wheels G Risk of accident
begin to turn. There is a risk of being locked While the spare wheel bracket is folded to the
out when the vehicle is being pushed or side, the tail lamps may be blocked from view.
tested on a dynamometer. Other road users may then fail to see you and
crash into your vehicle. Additionally, secure
your vehicle using a warning lamp or a warn-
Tailgate ing triangle.
Points to remember Do not drive with the spare wheel bracket fol-
ded out.
G Risk of poisoning Make sure that the spare wheel bracket is
Exhaust fumes could enter the vehicle interior closed correctly.
if the engine is running and the tailgate is Otherwise, the freely moving spare wheel
open. This could poison you. Therefore, you bracket could injure people or cause an acci-
should make sure that the tailgate is always dent.
closed when the engine is running.
! Do not wash vehicles equipped with a
! The tailgate swings up and to the rear spare wheel bracket in an automatic car
when opened. Therefore, make sure that wash.
there is sufficient clearance above and
behind the tailgate. Opening the spare wheel bracket
Do not leave the key in the luggage compart-
ment. Otherwise, you could lock yourself out.
On vehicles with a spare wheel bracket*, you
can only open the tailgate after first opening
the spare wheel bracket* completely.
i You will find details of the tailgate opening
dimensions in the Technical data section
(Y page 295).
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 61

Tailgate 61
X To unlock centrally: press the % but- G Risk of injury

ton on the key. Make sure that nobody can become trapped
X Pull handle ; and pull spare wheel as you close the tailgate.
bracket : to the side in the direction of
the arrow.
Controls
X To close: pull down the tailgate using one
of recesses :.
X Turn handle : in the direction of the arrow
X Push the tailgate closed from the outside.
from position 2 to position 3.
X Lock the vehicle, if necessary, with
The spare wheel bracket is locked in the
open position. the & button on the key or with KEY-
LESS GO* (Y page 58).
Closing the spare wheel bracket
Opening the tailgate from inside
X Turn handle : from position 3 to posi-
tion 2. You can unlock and open the tailgate from the
The spare wheel bracket is released. inside.
X Close the spare wheel bracket until you feel The handle is located on the lower part of the
it engage. window frame of the tailgate on the right-
hand side when viewed in the direction of
travel.
Opening and closing manually
X To open: press the % button on the key.
X Pull handle :.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 62

62 Tailgate
X Press handle : in the direction of

arrow ; as far as it will go and hold it there.
X From this position, pull handle : in the
direction of arrow = as far as it will go and
hold it there.
X Swing the tailgate upwards.
i Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate*:

Controls
If you do not open the tailgate after unlock-

ing, it will lock again automatically after a
few seconds.
X To close: press closing button : on the
tailgate or press and hold down the F
Automatically opening/closing* the button until the tailgate closes.
vehicle from inside X To close and lock simultaneously:
Press locking button ; on the tailgate.
G Risk of injury
Monitor the tailgate opening and closing pro- i The tailgate can only be opened and
cedures to make sure that nobody can closed with the key if there is no key in the
become trapped. To halt the opening or clos- ignition lock.
ing procedure, press the closing button* on If the tailgate touches an object while clos-
the tailgate again or pull the handle on the ing, the closing procedure is interrupted
outside of the tailgate. and the tailgate reopens.
Opening the spare wheel bracket i Only with KEYLESS GO*: if you leave a
KEYLESS GO key* in the luggage compart-
You can open the tailgate automatically using
ment, the tailgate will not lock.
the key or the handle in the tailgate.11
The tailgate is not closed unless a KEYLESS
X To open: press and hold the F button
GO* key is recognised.
on the key until the tailgate opens.
or
X When the tailgate is unlocked, pull the han- Automatically opening/closing* the
dle and let it go again immediately. vehicle from inside
You can open/close the tailgate from the
Closing the spare wheel bracket driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary.
You can close the tailgate automatically using G Risk of injury
the key11, using the closing button11 or lock- Monitor the tailgate opening and closing pro-
ing button12. cedures to make sure that nobody can
become trapped. To halt the opening or clos-
ing procedure, press or pull the tailgate's
remote operating button from the driver's
seat again.
11 Only on vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate*.

12 Only on vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate* and KEYLESS GO*.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 63

Key positions 63
Deactivating
X Press and hold the closing button
(Y page 62) in the tailgate until you hear
two short tones.
Key positions
Controls
Key
X To open: pull remote operating switch :

until the tailgate opens.
X To close: turn the key to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
X Press remote operating switch for tail-
gate : until the tailgate is closed.
Limiting the tailgate opening angle* g To remove the key

You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate 1 Power supply for some consumers, such
in the top half of its opening range. This could as the windscreen wipers
be useful, for example, when there is insuffi- 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
cient space above the tailgate. and drive position
! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to 3 To start the engine
open the tailgate fully when setting the
opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise i Even if the key is not for the vehicle in
be damaged. Ideally, limit the opening question, it will still turn in the ignition lock.
angle outside. The ignition is not switched on. The engine
cannot be started.
Activating
X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on KEYLESS GO*
the tailgate.
If you press the Start/Stop button repeatedly
X To stop the opening procedure at the
without depressing the brake pedal, its func-
desired position: press the closing button
tion corresponds to the different key posi-
(Y page 62) in the tailgate or pull the handle
tions in the ignition lock.
on the outside of the tailgate again.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
X Press and hold the closing button in the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
tailgate until you hear a short tone.
ately.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 64

64
Controls Seats
X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
yet been pressed, this corresponds to "key lock ;.
removed".
X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :
i If you switch from key mode to KEYLESS
GO mode, the system requires a two-sec-
once.
ond recognition period before you can use
It is now possible to switch on the wind-
the Start/Stop button.
screen wipers, for example.
i If you press Start/Stop button : in this
position twice, the power supply is discon- Seats
nected again. Points to remember
X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop but- For information about folding the rear bench
ton : twice. seat forwards, see the "Luggage compart-
ment enlargement" section (Y page 154).
i If you press Start/Stop button : in this
position, the power supply is disconnected G Risk of injury
again. The seats can still be adjusted when there is
no key in the ignition lock. For this reason,
Removing the Start/Stop button children should never be left unsupervised in
the vehicle. They could become trapped when
You can remove the Start/Stop button from
adjusting a seat.
the ignition lock and start the vehicle with a
key as usual. G Risk of accident
i You do not need to remove the Start/ Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle
Stop button from the ignition lock when you is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted
leave the vehicle. from the road and traffic conditions and you
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of
i Switching between KEYLESS GO mode the seat moving. This could cause an acci-
and key mode is only possible when the dent.
transmission is in position P.
G Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
when you adjust the seat.
Observe the notes concerning the airbag sys-
tem.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 65

Seats 65
Secure children as recommended; see "Chil- i If PRE-SAFE® is triggered in vehicles with

dren in the vehicle" section. the memory function*, the front-passenger
seat will be moved to a better position if it
G Risk of injury was previously in an unfavourable position.
Make sure that the central area of the head
restraint supports the back of your head at Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
about eye level. You could seriously injure
your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
X Slide the button forwards or back in the
direction of arrow =.
Controls
ported by the head restraint in the event of an
accident. Never travel without a correctly
adjusted and engaged head restraint. Backrest angle
X Slide the button forwards or back in the
! When you move the seats, make sure that direction of arrow ;.
there are no objects in the footwell or
behind the seats. Otherwise, you could
damage the seats and the objects. Seat height
X Slide the button up or down in the direction
! When the rear bench seat is folded for- of arrow A.
wards, the front seats cannot be moved to
their rearmost position. Otherwise, you
could damage the seats and the rear bench Seat cushion angle
seat. Adjust the angle so that your thighs are gently
supported.
! Make sure that the sun visor is folded up
before setting the backrest angle and head
of arrow ?.
restraint height. Otherwise, the head
restraint and sun visor could collide when
the head restraint is fully extended. Head restraint height
i The rear-compartment head restraints G Risk of injury

can be removed (Y page 69). Make sure that the central area of the head
Please contact a Mercedes-Benz Service restraint supports the back of your head at
Centre for more information. about eye level. You could seriously injure
your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
ported by the head restraint in the event of an
Adjusting the seat electrically accident. Never travel without a correctly
adjusted and engaged head restraint.
Vehicles with memory function*

of arrow :.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 66

66 Seats
Vehicles without memory function

Controls
X To adjust the head restraint side bol-

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the sters: push or pull right and/or left-hand
desired position. side bolster : into the desired position.
X To lower: press release catch : in the X To move the head restraint back and
direction of the arrow and push the head forth: push or pull the head restraint in the
restraint down to the desired position. direction of arrow ;.
Head restraint angle

Four-way lumbar support*
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
support for your back.
X Push or pull the lower edge of the head

restraint in the direction of the arrow.
Luxury head restraint* : To raise the backrest contour

; To soften the backrest contour
G Risk of injury
When folding back the head restraint side bol- = To lower the backrest contour
sters, do not put your hands between the side ? To harden the backrest contour
bolster and the cushion holder. There is a
danger of becoming trapped. i When the door is unlocked, opened or the
key is in position 1 in the ignition lock, the
setting of the lumbar support is automati-
cally checked and, if necessary, the indi-
vidual setting is restored.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 67

Seats 67
Multicontour seat*
You can set the contour of the seat to provide
optimum support for your back.
Controls
X Pull backrest release ; in the direction of
the arrow.
Backrest : folds forwards.
X Adjust the backrest angle as desired.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 in
the ignition lock.
Folding the seats down/up (third row
X Use switch ? to move the thigh cushion
of seats*)
into the desired position.
X Press the W or X button to adjust the The third row of seats* consists of two elec-
contour of the backrest to suit your back. trically foldable individual seats, which can be
lowered into the luggage compartment.
X Press button = to move the point of great-
est backrest curvature downwards to the If the seat is not correctly locked in position,
lumbar region and press button ; to move you will see the following message, for exam-
ple, in the instrument cluster display: 3rd
it upwards to the upper back region.
row of seats, right-hand side not
X Adjust the side cushions of the backrest
locked.
using button : so that you have good lat-
eral support. ! Make sure that there is nothing on the
folded-down seats in the luggage compart-
ment. The luggage compartment must be
Adjusting seats in the 2nd and 3rd* empty for the third row of seats to be folded
up. The seats or the objects in the luggage
rows
compartment could, otherwise, be dam-
Adjusting the backrest angle (second aged.
row of seats) Make sure that the seats in the third row
The backrest angle can be adjusted to five are empty and not blocked before folding
different positions. them down.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 68

68
Controls Seats
From the rear door

X To open: fold the corresponding seat up or
X To fold up: fold the right-hand seat in the down (Y page 67).
second row of seats forwards. X When the seat is halfway folded up or down,
X Briefly press switch :. lock the backrest manually.
The seat folds up. X Grasp the panel recess.
X To fold down: briefly press button ;. X Pull the panel in the direction of the arrow
The seat folds down. and remove it.
X To close: fold the corresponding seat up or
down (Y page 67).
X When the seat is halfway folded up or down,
lock the backrest manually.
X Attach the panel using the guide pins.
X Push the panel downwards until it engages.
X Fold the seat up and down fully to check
that the panel is seated correctly.
From the tailgate Rear seat head restraints

X To fold up: briefly press switch :. G Risk of injury
The seat folds up. Occupants should only travel sitting on seats
X To fold down: briefly press button ;. which have the head restraints fitted. On a
The seat folds down. seat which is occupied, pull the head restraint
up into the upright position. This reduces the
risk of injury to the passenger in the event of
Detachable panel (third row of seats*) an accident.
If you drop objects underneath the seats in
the third row, you can remove the panel in Adjusting the head restraint height
order to reach beneath the seat.
G Risk of injury
! If there are objects underneath the seat, Make sure that the central area of the head
the seat can no longer be folded up or down restraint supports the back of your head at
correctly. The seat could be damaged. about eye level. You could seriously injure
Only drive with the panel fitted correctly. your neck if your head is not correctly sup-
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 69

Seats 69
ported by the head restraint in the event of an Removing and fitting the head
accident. Never travel without a correctly restraints
adjusted and engaged head restraint.
G Risk of injury
Occupants should only travel sitting on seats
which have the head restraints installed. This
reduces the risk of injury to the passengers in
the rear in the event of an accident.
Controls
If the head restraint is fully inserted, it is nec-
essary to press release catch :.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired height.
X To lower: press release catch : and push X To remove: pull the head restraint up to
the head restraint down until it is in the the stop.
desired position. X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
Adjusting the head restraint angle
X To refit: insert the head restraint so that
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close the notches on the bar are on the left when
as possible to your head. viewed in the direction of travel.
You can only adjust the two outer head X Push the head restraint down until you hear
restraints. it click into place.
Seat ventilation*
The three blue indicator lamps in the button
indicate the ventilation level you have selec-
ted.
X Using both hands, reach backwards and

grasp the sides of the head restraint.
X Pull the lower edge of the head restraint
forwards or backwards until it is in the
desired position.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 70

70 Steering wheel
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or i The system automatically switches down
2 in the ignition lock. from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly five minutes.
until the required ventilation level is set. The system automatically switches down
from level 2 to level 1 after approximately
i If you open the side windows and the slid- ten minutes.
ing/tilting sunroof* using the key
The system automatically switches off
(Y page 87), the seat ventilation of the
approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
Controls
driver's seat automatically switches to the

level 1.
highest level.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
2 in the ignition lock.
until all indicator lamps go out.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat until the desired heating level is set.
ventilation may switch off. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all indicator lamps go out.
Seat heating* i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat

heating may switch off.
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
Steering wheel
Points to remember
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
adjust the steering wheel either manually or
electrically*.
G Risk of injury
The electrically adjustable steering wheel*
can be adjusted when the key is removed
from the ignition lock. Therefore, do not leave
Driver's and front-passenger seat children unsupervised in the vehicle as they
could become trapped as the steering wheel
is adjusted.
G Risk of accident
Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehi-
cle is stationary and do not pull away until the
steering wheel adjustment mechanism is
locked in position. Otherwise, you might drive
without the steering wheel adjustment mech-
anism being locked in position and be distrac-
ted from road and traffic conditions by an
Rear-compartment seats unexpected movement of the steering wheel
and cause an accident.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 71

Steering wheel 71
However, the steerability of the vehicle is not Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
affected. cally*
When you adjust the steering wheel, make
sure that:
Rthe steering wheel can be reached with
your arms slightly bent
Ryou can move your legs freely
Controls
Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
ment cluster clearly
Adjusting the steering wheel man- : Fore-and-aft adjustment

ually
; Height adjustment
You can find more information under:
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 72)
Rstoring settings (Y page 74)
Steering wheel heating*
: Release handle
; Height adjustment
= Fore-and-aft adjustment
X Pull handle : out completely.

The steering column is unlocked.
X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
X Push handle : in completely until it X To switch on or off: make sure that the
engages fully. key is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
The steering wheel is locked in position. X Turn the lever in direction of arrow :
or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
i The steering-wheel heating does not
switch off automatically.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 72

72 Mirrors
Easy-entry/exit feature* tive of the position of the key in the ignition

lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting or rescue the occupants.
in and out of your vehicle easier.
The steering wheel swings upwards when
you: Mirrors
Rremove the key from the ignition lock
Rear-view mirror
Ropen the driver's door when the key is in
Controls
position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock X Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so you
have a good overview of the traffic condi-
When the key is inserted into the ignition lock tions.
with the driver's door closed, the steering
wheel is automatically moved to the previ-
Rear-view mirror (manual anti-dazzle)
ously set position.
G Risk of injury
when you activate the easy-entry/exit fea-
ture.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped, stop the
adjustment procedure. To halt the procedure:
Rpress the steering-column adjustment
switch
Rpress one of the memory function position
buttons
X Anti-dazzle mode: flick anti-dazzle
The steering column stops moving immedi-
switch : forwards or back.
ately.
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle. They could open the driver's door and
thereby unintentionally activate the easy-
Exterior mirrors
entry feature and become trapped. G Risk of accident
The most recent position of the steering The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the
wheel is stored when you switch off the igni- image. Objects are actually closer than they
tion or when you store a memory position appear. You could misjudge the distance from
(Y page 74). vehicles driving behind and cause an acci-
dent, e.g. when changing lane. For this rea-
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
son, make sure of the actual distance from the
ENTRY/EXIT feature via the on-board com-
vehicle driving behind by glancing over your
puter (Y page 108).
shoulder.
i The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT fea-
ture* can only be activated after an acci- The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger
dent if the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is field of vision.
activated in the on-board computer. At low outside temperatures, the exterior mir-
When the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT fea- rors are heated automatically.
ture is triggered in an accident, the steering
wheel column will move upwards irrespec-
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 73

Mirrors 73
Adjusting the exterior mirrors i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while the vehicle is
in motion; otherwise, they may vibrate.
Resetting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or has
become discharged, the exterior mirrors
must be reset. Otherwise, the exterior mirrors
Controls
will not fold in when you select the "Fold in
mirrors when locking" function in the on-
board computer (Y page 109).
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or the ignition lock.
2 in the ignition lock. X Briefly press button :.
X Press button ; for the right-hand exterior
mirror or button = for the left-hand exte-
Automatically folding exterior mirrors
rior mirror.
in or out*
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red. If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function
The indicator lamp goes out again after is activated in the on-board computer
some time. You can adjust the selected (Y page 109):
mirror using adjustment button : as long Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
as the indicator lamp is lit. soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
X Press adjustment button : up, down, to side.
the right or to the left until the exterior mir- Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-
ror is set to a position which provides you ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
with a good overview of traffic conditions. then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out i If you have activated this function and fold
electrically* in the exterior mirrors using button :, they
will not be folded out automatically. You
can only fold out the exterior mirrors again
using button :.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors*

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
dazzle mode if the ignition is switched on and
incident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
sor in the rear-view mirror.
X Make sure that the key is in position 1 or
The mirrors do not go into anti-dazzle mode if
2 in the ignition lock.
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting
X Briefly press button :.
is switched on.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 74

74 Memory functions*
G Risk of accident
If incident light from headlamps is prevented
from striking the sensor in the rear-view mir-
ror, for instance, if the safety net is fitted, the
mirror’s automatic anti-dazzle function will
not work.
Incident light could then dazzle you. This may
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
Controls
tions, thereby causing an accident. In this

case, adjust the rear-view mirror manually.
X Adjust the seat (Y page 64).
Memory functions* X On the driver's side, also adjust the steer-
ing wheel (Y page 70) and the mirrors
Storing settings (Y page 72).
X Press memory button M and press storage
Using the memory button you can store up to
three different settings, e. g. for three differ- position switch 1, 2 or 3 within three sec-
ent people. onds.
The settings are stored in the selected pre-
The following settings are stored as a single
set position. A tone sounds when the set-
memory preset:
tings have been completed.
Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
Rdriver's side: steering wheel position Calling up a stored setting
Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mir- X Press and hold the relevant storage posi-
rors on the driver's and front-passenger tion button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering
sides wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored
position.
G Risk of injury
The memory function can still be used when i The setting procedure is interrupted as
the key has been removed. For this reason, soon as you release the storage position
children should never be left unsupervised in switch.
the vehicle. Otherwise, they could become
trapped when moving the seat or the steering
wheel. Passenger side exterior mirror park-
ing position
G Risk of accident
To make it easier to park, you can set and
Only use the memory function on the driver’s
store the front-passenger side exterior mirror
side when the vehicle is stationary. Other-
position in such a way that you can see the
wise, you could be distracted from the traffic
rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage
conditions by the steering wheel and seat
reverse gear.
moving of their own accord, and as a result
cause an accident.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 75

Seat belts 75
Setting and storing the parking position Seat belts

Wearing seat belts
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restraining the movement of vehicle occu-
pants in the event of an accident. This
reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming
into contact with the vehicle interior.
Controls
G Risk of injury
A seat belt which is not worn correctly, or
which has not been engaged in the seat belt
buckle correctly, cannot perform its intended
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and protective function. Under certain circum-
that the key is in position 2 in the ignition stances, this could result in severe or even
lock. fatal injuries.
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on Make sure that all occupants – in particular,
the front-passenger side. pregnant women – wear their seat belt cor-
X Engage reverse gear. rectly at all times.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger RThe seat belt must pass closely over your
side moves to the preset parking position. body and must not be twisted. Therefore,
X Use adjustment button : to adjust the you should avoid wearing bulky clothing
exterior mirror to a position which allows (e.g. a winter coat). The shoulder belt sec-
you to see the rear wheel and the kerb. tion must be routed across the middle of
The parking position is stored. your shoulder – on no account across your
neck or under your arm – and pulled tight
i If you shift the automatic transmission against your upper body. The lap belt must
into another gear, the exterior mirror on the always pass across your lap as low down as
front-passenger side returns to the driving possible, i.e. over your hip joints – not
position. across your abdomen. If necessary, push
down the belt strap slightly and then
Calling up the parking position retighten it in the roll-up direction.
X When the key is in position 2 in the ignition RDo not route the belt strap across sharp or
lock and the exterior mirror on the front- fragile objects, especially if these are loca-
passenger side is activated, engage ted on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles,
reverse gear. pens, keys, etc. The seat belt strap could
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger be damaged and tear in an accident, and
side moves to the stored parking position. you or other vehicle occupants could be
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger injured.
side moves back to its original position: ROnly one person should use each seat belt
Ras soon as you exceed a speed of at any one time. Children must never travel
10 km/h sitting on the lap of other occupants. It
Rabout ten seconds after you have disen- would not be possible to restrain the child
gaged reverse gear in the event of a sudden change in direc-
tion, braking or an accident. This could
Rif you press button = for the exterior mir-
ror on the driver's side
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 76

76 Seat belts
result in severe or even fatal injuries to the Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
child and other occupants. pose.
RPersons less than 1.50 m tall cannot wear For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
the seat belts correctly. For this reason, mends that you only use seat belts which have
secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in spe- been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
cially designed, suitable restraint systems. vehicle.
RChildren less than 1.50 m tall or under
Controls
12 years of age cannot wear the seat belts

properly. Therefore, they always should be
secured in a suitable child restraint system
on a suitable vehicle seat. You can find
more information under "Children in the
vehicle" in the "Safety" section of the Own-
er's Manual. Follow the manufacturer's
installation instructions when fitting the
child restraint system.
RDo not secure any objects with a seat belt
if the seat belt is also being used by one of
the vehicle's occupants.
G Risk of injury
If the backrest is not almost vertical, the seat
belt does not offer the intended level of pro-
tection. Under certain circumstances, this
could cause severe or even fatal injuries.
Before starting a journey, make sure that the
seat is properly adjusted and that the back-
rest is almost vertical.
Fastening the belt
G Risk of injury X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
A dirty or damaged seat belt or a seat belt that an almost vertical position (Y page 64).
has been subjected to a load in an accident X Pull the belt smoothly through belt sash
or which has been modified no longer offers
guide :.
the intended level of protection. Under certain
X Route the belt over the centre of the shoul-
circumstances, this could cause severe or
even fatal injuries. der without twisting it.
X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
For this reason, check regularly that the seat
belts are not damaged or dirty. Seat belt adjustment: if necessary, the driv-
Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts
er's and front-passenger seat belts auto-
that have been subjected to a load in an acci-
matically adjust to the upper body
dent replaced at a qualified specialist work-
(Y page 77).
shop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop X If necessary, adjust the belt to the appro-
which has the necessary specialist knowledge priate height (Y page 77).
and tools to carry out the work required. X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a section of the belt to tighten the belt across
your body.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 77

Seat belts 77
Seat-belt adjustment i Further information about the 7 seat

The belt adjustment function adjusts the driv- belt warning lamp (Y page 238).
er's and front-passenger seat belt to the
upper body of the occupants. The belt strap
is tightened slightly when:
Belt height adjustment
Ryou engage the belt tongue in the buckle You can adjust the seat belt height on the
and then turn the key to position 2 in the driver's seat and the front-passenger seat.
Adjust the belt to a height that allows it to be
Controls
ignition lock.
Rthe
routed across the middle of your shoulder.
key is in position 2 in the ignition lock
and you then engage the belt tongue in the
buckle.
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
tightening force if any slack is detected
between the occupant and the belt sash. The
belt should not be held during the adjust-
ment. You can switch the belt adjustment on
and off in the on-board computer
(Y page 108).
Unfastening the belt

X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
X Press release button ? and guide belt The belt sash guide engages in various posi-
tongue ; back towards belt sash tions.
guide :. X To lower: press and hold release but-
ton :.
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.
Belt warning for driver and front X Release release button : and make sure
passenger that the belt sash guide has engaged.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster reminds you that all occupants
should fasten their seat belts. It is either lit
continuously or flashes. Additionally, there
may be a warning tone.
The 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out and
the warning tone ceases as soon as the driver
and front passenger have fastened their seat
belts.
For certain countries only: regardless of
whether the driver or the front passenger
already have their seat belt fastened, the
7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six
seconds after the engine has been started. It
then goes out if both the driver and the front
passenger have fastened their seat belt.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 78

78 Lights
Correct driver's seat position Make sure that:

Ryou are as far away from the driver's front
airbag as possible.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi-
tion.
Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.
Ryou have moved the backrest to an
Controls
almost vertical position.

Ryou have set the seat angle so that your
thighs are gently supported.
Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
Ryou have adjusted the head restraint so
that the back of your head is supported
at eye level by the central area of the
head restraint.
X Check whether steering wheel : is adjus-
ted properly (Y page 70).
Make sure that:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
G Risk of accident
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle
is stationary. You will otherwise be distracted Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-
from the road and traffic conditions and you ment cluster clearly.
could lose control of the vehicle as a result of X Check whether you have fastened seat
the seat moving. This could cause an acci- belt ; properly (Y page 75).
dent.
It should:
G Risk of accident Rfit snugly across your body.
Only adjust the steering wheel when the vehi- Rbe routed across the middle of your
cle is stationary and do not pull away until the shoulder.
steering wheel adjustment mechanism is
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the
locked in position. Otherwise, you might drive
without the steering wheel adjustment mech- hip joints.
anism being locked in position and be distrac-
ted from road and traffic conditions by an
unexpected movement of the steering wheel Lights
and cause an accident.
Exterior lighting
However, the steerability of the vehicle is not
affected. Notes on exterior lighting
X Check whether seat = and the head For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
restraint are adjusted properly mends that you drive with the lights switched
(Y page 64). on even during the daytime. In some coun-
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 79

Lights 79
tries, daytime operation of headlamps varies which traffic drives on the opposite side of the
due to legal and voluntary requirements. In road to the country where the vehicle is reg-
these countries, daytime driving lights are istered. This prevents oncoming traffic from
automatically switched on when the engine is being dazzled
started. Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
The exterior lighting (except the side lamp/ specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
parking lamp) switches off automatically if Service Centre, as close to the border as pos-
you: sible before driving in these countries. Sym-
Controls
Rremove the key from the ignition lock metrical lights do not illuminate as large an
area of the edge of the carriageway.
Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is
Converting to asymmetrical dipped beam
switched off (key in position 0 in the igni-
after returning: have the headlamps conver-
tion lock)
ted back to asymmetrical dipped beam at a
! Switch off the side lamps and parking qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
lamp when you leave the vehicle. This pre- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, as soon as
vents the battery from discharging. possible after crossing the border and return-
ing to the original country.
Notes on driving abroad Vehicles with Intelligent Light System*: if
the headlamps are converted to symmetrical
Converting to symmetrical dipped beam
dipped beam, not all light functions are avail-
when driving abroad: switch the headlamps able. "Motorway mode" and the "extended
to symmetrical dipped beam in countries in range foglamps" are deactivated.
Function Function
Light switch 4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode/
daytime driving lights
1 W Left-hand parking lamp
5 T Side lamps, licence plate and
2 X Right-hand parking lamp
instrument lighting
3 $ Lights off/daytime driving 6 L Dipped-beam headlamps/
lights
main-beam headlamps13
13 Dipped-beam headlamps must be switched on before switching on the main-beam headlamps.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 80

80 Lights
Function Automatic headlamp mode
7 N Foglamps14 G Risk of accident

If the light switch is set to the Ã position,
8 R Rear foglamp the light will not come on automatically in
Combination switch foggy conditions. This could endanger you
and others. Therefore, turn the light switch to
E K Main-beam headlamps13 L in the dark or in fog.
Controls
The automatic headlamp feature is only an

F ! Right-hand turn signal
aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
G Headlamp flasher lighting at all times.
H # Left-hand turn signal G Risk of accident

When it is dark or foggy, turn the light switch
Dipped-beam headlamps from Ã to L in good time. Otherwise,
the headlamps could switch off temporarily
X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the
and you could cause an accident.
ignition lock or start the engine.
X To switch on: turn the light switch to X To switch on: turn the light switch to
L. Ã.
The T indicator lamp on the light switch Key in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
and the L indicator lamp in the instru- side lamp is switched on or off automati-
ment cluster light up. cally depending on the brightness of the
ambient light.
Daytime driving lights When the engine is on: depending on the
ambient light conditions, the daytime driv-
X Switch on the "daytime driving lights" func-
ing lights15 or the dipped-beam headlamps
tion using the on-board computer
(in addition to the side lamp) are switched
(Y page 105).
on or off automatically.
X To switch on: turn the light switch to
When the dipped-beam headlamps are
$ or Ã.
switched on, the T indicator lamp on
When the engine is on: depending on the
the light switch and the L indicator
ambient light conditions, the daytime driv-
ing lights or the dipped-beam headlamps lamp in the instrument cluster light up.
are switched on.
When the dipped-beam headlamps are Foglamp (halogen headlamps)
switched on, the T indicator lamp on G Risk of accident
the light switch and the L indicator
If you suspect that driving conditions will be
lamp in the instrument cluster light up.
foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle
may not be visible and you could endanger
yourself and others.
14 Only vehicles with halogen headlamps are equipped with front foglamps.
13 Dipped-beam headlamps must be switched on before switching on the main-beam headlamps.
15 If you have activated the "Daytime driving lights" function in the on-board computer.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 81

Lights 81
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Main-beam headlamps

lock.
X Turn the ignition key to position 2 in the
ignition lock or start the engine.
L or T. If the light switch is set to
X Turn the light switch to L or Ã16.
Ã, you cannot switch on the foglamp.
X To activate: press the combination switch
X Pull the light switch out to the first detent.
in the direction of arrow E past the point
The green N indicator lamp on the light
of resistance (Y page 80).
switch lights up.
Controls
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
X To switch off: press the light switch in as
cluster lights up.
far as it will go.
X To deactivate: move the combination
The green N indicator lamp on the light
switch back to its normal position.
switch goes out.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Rear foglamp
On vehicles with foglamps Turn signal lamp
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition X To indicate a minor change of direc-
lock. tion: push the combination switch in the
X To switch on: turn the light switch to direction of arrow F or H (Y page 80).
L or T. When the light switch is set The corresponding turn signal flashes three
to Ã you cannot switch on the rear fog- times.
lamp. X To indicate: push the combination switch
X Pull the light switch out to the second stop. in the direction of arrow F or H past the
The R yellow indicator lamp on the light point of resistance (Y page 80).
switch lights up. The corresponding turn signal indicator
X To switch off: press the light switch in as lamp ! or # in the instrument clus-
far as it will go. ter flashes.
The R yellow indicator lamp on the light
switch goes out. Hazard warning lamps
On vehicles without foglamps
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
L. When the light switch is set to
Ã you cannot switch on the rear fog-
lamp.
X Pull the light switch out to the stop.
switch lights up.
X To switch off: press the light switch in as
far as it will go.
switch goes out.
16 In the Ã position, the main-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 82

82 Lights
The hazard warning lamp switches on auto- Active light function

matically if:
Ran airbag is deployed.
Rthe vehicle is braked to a standstill from a
speed of over 70 km/h.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
Controls
X To switch on: press button :.

All turn signals flash.
X Hazard warning lights on one side: push
the combination switch in the direction of
arrow F or H past the point of resistance The active light function is a system that
(Y page 80). moves the headlamps according to the steer-
The indicator lamp flashes on the corre- ing movements of the front wheels. In this
sponding side of the vehicle. way, relevant areas remain illuminated while
driving. This allows you to recognise pedes-
X To switch off: press button :.
trians, cyclists and animals.
The hazard warning lamp switches off auto-
matically after full brake application if the Motorway mode
vehicle then reaches a speed of over
10 km/h again.
Intelligent Light System* (bi-xenon

headlamps*)
The Intelligent Light System is a system which
adjusts the headlamps automatically to suit
the prevailing driving and weather conditions.
The bi-xenon headlamps offer enhanced func-
tions to improve illumination of the road sur-
face, e.g. depending on the vehicle speed or Motorway mode increases the range of the
weather conditions. The system includes the beam.
active light function, motorway mode and
Active:
extended range foglamps. The system is only
active when it is dark. RIf you are driving at speeds above
You can activate or deactivate the "Intelligent 110 km/h and do not make any large steer-
Light System" using the on-board computer ing movements for 1000 m.
(Y page 106). RIfyou are driving at speeds above
130 km/h.
Motorway mode remains active unless your
speed drops speeds below 80 km/h.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds below
80 km/h.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 83

Lights 83
Extended range foglamps Interior lighting
Controls
The extended range foglamps reduce the Front overhead control panel
glare experienced by the driver and improve : p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
the illumination of the edge of the carriage- on/off
way. ; u To switch the rear interior lighting
Active: if you are driving more slowly than on/off
70 km/h and switch on the rear foglamp. = | To switch the automatic interior
If your speed does not exceed 100 km/h, the lighting control on/off
extended foglamp function remains active. ? c To switch the front interior lighting
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above on/off
100 km/h or you switch off the rear foglamp. A p To switch the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
Headlamp cleaning system*
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper-
ated five times while the lights are on and the
engine is running. When you switch off the
ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaning
system is reset and counting is resumed
from 0.
Rear-compartment overhead control panel (sec-

ond row of seats)
: To switch the reading lamp on/off
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 84

84 Windscreen wipers
Windscreen wipers
Switching the windscreen wipers on/
off
Controls
Rear-compartment overhead control panel (third

row of seats*)
: p To switch the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
; p To switch the right-hand reading Combination switch
lamp on/off 1 $ Windscreen wipers off
2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low17
Automatic interior lighting control
3 Å Intermittent wipe, high18
X To switch on/off: press the | button. 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow
The | button pops up or goes down. 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast
The interior lighting switches on automati- B í Single wipe/î To wipe the wind-
cally in darkness, when you unlock the vehi-
screen using washer fluid
cle, open a door or remove the key from the
ignition lock. ! With intermittent wiping with rain sensor:
The interior lighting switches off after a delay. Due to optical influences and the wind-
You can set the delayed switch-off using the screen becoming dirty in dry weather con-
on-board computer (Y page 106). If the door ditions, the windscreen wipers may be acti-
is left open, the interior lighting goes out after vated inadvertently. This could then dam-
approximately five minutes. age the windscreen wiper blades or scratch
the windscreen.
Emergency accident lighting For this reason, you should always switch
The interior lighting is activated automatically off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition
X To switch off: press the hazard warning
lock.
lamp button (Y page 81). X Turn the combination switch to the corre-
or sponding position.
X Unlock the vehicle using the key.
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
or wiping frequency is set automatically accord-
X Press the | button (Y page 84). ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Å
position, the rain sensor is more sensitive
than in the Ä position and therefore the
windscreen wiper will wipe more frequently.
17 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.
18 Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 85

Side windows 85
Rear window wiper G Risk of injury

when closing the side windows. If there is a
risk of becoming trapped, release the switch
or push the switch again to reopen the side
window.
G Risk of injury
Controls
Children may injure themselves if they oper-
ate the side windows.
cle. Always take the key with you when leaving
Combination switch the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
: è Switch a short time.
2 ô To wipe with washer fluid
3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
G Risk of injury
Do not leave children unsupervised in the
4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
5 ô To wipe with washer fluid restraint system. The children could:
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition Rbe seriously or even fatally injured on parts
lock. of the vehicle
X Turn switch : on the combination switch Rbe seriously or even fatally injured by pro-
to the corresponding position. longed exposure to extremely high or
When the rear window wiper is switched on extremely low temperatures
the icon appears in the instrument cluster. If children open a door, they could:
Rseriously or even fatally injure other people
Side windows Rget out of the vehicle and injure them-

selves, or be seriously or even fatally
Opening and closing the side win- injured by a passing vehicle
dows
Activate the child-proof locks/override fea-
G Risk of injury ture if children are travelling in the vehicle.
Make sure that nobody can become trapped They could otherwise open doors or side win-
between the side window and the door frame dows while the vehicle is in motion and
when a side window is opened. Do not touch thereby injure themselves or others.
or lean against the side window during the
opening procedure. You could become trap- i Related topics:
ped between the side window and the door Rconvenience opening from the out-
frame as the side window moves down. If
side (Y page 87) or from the inside
there is a risk of becoming trapped, release
(Y page 147)
the switch or pull the switch upwards to close
Rconvenience closing from the out-
the side window again.
side (Y page 87) or from the inside
(Y page 147)
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 86

86 Side windows
Rdisabling the controls in the rear com- lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure
partment (override feature) (Y page 49) that nobody can become trapped when clos-
Rautomatic closing of the side windows ing the side windows.
(PRE-SAFE®*) (Y page 40)
If a side window blocks during closing and
reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull
on the corresponding switch again until the
Controls
side window has closed.

The side window is closed with increased
force.
If a side window blocks again during closing
and reopens slightly:
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull
on the corresponding switch again until the
: Front left side window has closed.
; Front right The side window is closed without the anti-
= Rear right entrapment feature.
? Rear left
The switches for all side windows are located Resetting the windows
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on
each door for the corresponding side window. You must reset each side window if:
Rthe battery has been disconnected or has
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition become discharged.
lock. Rthe side window no longer opens or closes
i You can continue to operate the side win- fully.
dows when you switch off the engine. This Rthe side windows open again slightly after
function remains active for five minutes or being closed fully.
until one of the front doors is opened.
X To open: press the corresponding switch. lock.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch. X Pull the corresponding switch until the side
i If you press the switch beyond the point window is closed.

X Hold the switch for an additional second.
of resistance, an automatic opening/clos-
ing process is started in the corresponding If the side window opens again slightly:
direction. You can stop automatic opera-
X Pull the corresponding switch again imme-
tion by pressing again.
diately and hold it for approx. one second.
Closing with increased force and with-
out the anti-entrapment feature
Opening and closing the hinged side
G Risk of injury windows*
Closing the side windows with increased force You can operate the hinged side windows
or without the anti-entrapment feature could electrically.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 87

Side windows 87
Ropen the sliding/tilting sunroof*

G Risk of injury
Make sure that nobody can become trapped Rswitch on the seat ventilation* of the driv-
as you close the hinged side windows. If there er's seat
is a risk of becoming trapped, release the
switch or push the switch again to reopen the i The "Convenience opening" feature can
side window. only be operated using the key.
i Related topics:
Controls
Rconvenience opening (Y page 87)
Rconvenience closing (Y page 87)
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door

handle.
X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the %
button.
Door control panel X Press and hold the % button until the
side windows and the sliding/tilting sun-
X To open: press switch : and release.
roof* are in the desired position.
Both hinged side windows open fully.
X To close: pull switch : and release.
Both hinged side windows close fully. Convenience closing
X To stop the closing procedure: press
When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-
switch : again.
neously:
The hinged side window opens fully.
Rclose the side windows
i If the hinged side windows are blocked
Rclose the sliding/tilting sunroof*
when closing, the closing procedure is
interrupted and the hinged side windows G Risk of injury
open again fully.
When using the convenience closing feature,
make sure that nobody can become trapped.
Proceed as follows if there is a risk of entrap-
Convenience opening
ment:
You can ventilate the vehicle before a journey. With the key:
To do this, you can use the key to simultane-
Rrelease the & button.
ously:
Ropen Rpress and hold the % button until the
the side windows
Ropen the hinged side windows* roof* open again.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 88

88 Driving and parking
With KEYLESS GO*: X Keep locking button : on the door handle

Rrelease the locking button on the door han-
pressed until the side windows and the slid-
ing/tilting sunroof* are fully closed.
dle.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
Rpull the door handle immediately and hold
sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed.
it.
The side windows and the sliding/tilting
sunroof* open. Driving and parking
Controls
Using the key Starting the engine

G Risk of accident
Do not put any objects in the driver's footwell.
If you use a floormat or carpet in the driver's
footwell, make sure that they are correctly
secured and that there is sufficient clearance
for the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of one
another.
Otherwise, the objects or floormats could get
between the pedals in the event of sudden
braking or acceleration. You may then no lon-
X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door ger be able to brake, change gear or acceler-
handle. ate as intended. This may result in an accident
X Lock the vehicle with the & button. and injury.
X Press and hold the & button until the
G Risk of poisoning
Never leave the engine running in enclosed
roof* are fully closed.
spaces. The exhaust gases contain carbon
X Make sure that all the side windows and the
monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti-
sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed. tutes a health hazard and could lead to loss
of consciousness or even death.
Using KEYLESS GO*
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 89

Driving and parking 89
Automatic transmission Starting the engine using KEYLESS

GO*
G Risk of injury
Your vehicle can be started using a valid KEY-
LESS GO* key. For this reason, children
should never be left unsupervised in the vehi-
Controls
the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
a short time.
i The Start/Stop button can be used to

DIRECT SELECT lever start the vehicle without inserting the key
P Park position with parking lock in the ignition lock.
N Neutral
R Reverse gear
D Drive position
X Move the transmission to position P.

i The engine can also be started when the
transmission is in position N.
Starting the engine using the key

i You can also use the "touch-start" func-
tion. To do this, turn the key to position 3 X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
and release it immediately. The engine then depressed.
starts automatically. X Petrol engine: press Start/Stop but-
X To start a petrol engine: turn the key to ton : once.
position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 63) The engine starts.
and release it. X Diesel engine: press Start/Stop but-
The engine starts automatically. ton : once.
X To start a diesel engine: turn the key to Preglow is activated and the engine starts.
position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 63).
The % preglow indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up. Pulling away
X When the % preglow indicator lamp
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use
goes out, turn the key to position 3 the engine's full performance until it has
(Y page 63) and release it as soon as the reached operating temperature.
engine is running.
Only shift into reverse gear when the vehi-
i You can start the engine without preglow cle is stationary.
if the engine is warm. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery
roads. Otherwise, you could damage the
drive train.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 90

90 Driving and parking
i It is only possible to move the DIRECT Hill start assist will not function if:
SELECT lever to the desired position from Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a
position P if you depress the brake pedal. downhill gradient.
Only then is the parking lock released.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have Rthe vehicle is secured with the parking
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors brake.
drop down. RESP® is malfunctioning.
Controls
You can open the doors from the inside at

any time.
You can also deactivate the automatic lock- Parking
ing feature (Y page 107).
G Risk of accident
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Only remove the key from the ignition lock
depressed. when the vehicle is stationary, as you cannot
X Shift the transmission to position D or R. steer the vehicle with the key removed.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 91). Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle. They could release the parking brake. This
X Release the brake pedal.
could lead to a serious or fatal accident.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
i Upshifts take place at higher engine G Risk of fire

speeds after a cold start. This helps the Make sure that the exhaust system does not
catalytic converter to reach its operating under any circumstances come into contact
temperature more quickly. with flammable materials such as dry grass or
petrol. The material could otherwise ignite
and set the vehicle on fire.
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. rolling away unintentionally:
Rthe parking brake must be applied
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal. Rthe transmission must be in position P and
This gives you time to move your foot from the ignition key must be removed
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. the front wheels towards the kerb
G Risk of accident
Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill
start assist. After approximately one second,
hill start assist will no longer brake your vehi-
cle and it could roll away.
X Take your foot off the brake pedal.

i Once you have taken your foot off the
brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around
one second.
X Pull away.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 91

Transmission 91
Parking brake i If you switch the engine off with the trans-
mission in position R or D, the automatic
transmission automatically shifts to N.
If you then open the driver's door or the
front-passenger door or remove the key
from the ignition, the automatic transmis-
sion shifts to P.
If you shift the automatic transmission to
Controls
N before switching off the engine, the auto-
matic transmission remains in N even when
a door is opened.
Using KEYLESS GO*
X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 63).
The J warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up if the engine is running. The engine stops and all the indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out
X To release: depress the brake pedal and (Y page 25).
keep it depressed.
The parking lock is released. i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch
X Pull release handle :. off the engine, the automatic transmission
The J warning lamp in the instrument automatically shifts to N. If you open the
driver's or front-passenger door, the auto-
cluster goes out.
matic transmission shifts to P.
i The engine can be turned off while the

Switching off the engine vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding
the Start/Stop button for three seconds.
G Risk of accident
If the engine is not running, there is no power
assistance for the steering and brakes. Steer-
Transmission
ing and braking will then require significantly
greater effort. Notes on the transmission
As a result, you might lose control of the vehi-
cle, cause an accident and injure yourself and
G Risk of accident
others. The movement of the pedals must not be
impaired in any way. Do not keep any objects
Therefore, do not switch off the engine while
in the driver's footwell. Make sure that floor-
you are driving.
mats or carpets are correctly secured and
that there is sufficient clearance for the ped-
X Move the transmission to position P. als.
Do not place several floormats on top of one
Using the key
another.
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 63) in
the ignition lock and remove it. G Risk of accident
The immobiliser is activated. Do not change down for additional engine
braking on a slippery road surface. This could
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
the vehicle could skid. This could cause you
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 92

92 Transmission
to lose control of your vehicle and cause an i Depress the brake and push the DIRECT
accident. SELECT lever up or down to disengage park
position P and to shift the transmission to
neutral position N.
Automatic transmission If you want to switch from park position P
directly to reverse gear R, depress the
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use brake and push the DIRECT SELECT lever
the engine's full performance until it has up past the first point of resistance.
Controls
reached operating temperature.

If you want to shift from park position P
Only set the automatic transmission to the directly to drive position D, depress the
respective drive positions when the vehicle brake and push the DIRECT SELECT lever
is stationary. down past the first point of resistance.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery ! If the engine speed is too high, do not shift
roads. Otherwise, you could damage the the automatic transmission directly from
drive train. D to R, from R to D or directly to P. Other-
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the wise, the automatic transmission could be
steering column. damaged.
Shifting to neutral N
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
to the first point of resistance.
Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission to
R when the vehicle is stationary.
X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the
DIRECT SELECT lever first point of resistance.
P Park position with parking lock
N Neutral Engaging drive position D
R Reverse gear X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past
D Drive position the first point of resistance.
The vehicle switches to the automatic drive
i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns program.
to its original position. The current trans-
mission position P, N, R or D appears in the
transmission position display
(Y page 93).
Engaging park position P

X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-
tion of the arrow P.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 93

Transmission 93
Changing gears Transmission positions

The automatic transmission shifts into indi- B Park position
vidual gears automatically. This automatic
Prevents the vehicle from rolling
gearshifting behaviour is determined by:
away when stopped. Only select P
Rdrive position D (Y page 93) with shift when your vehicle is stationary.
ranges 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1 (Y page 94) If you switch off the engine using
Rthe selected drive program the key and then remove the key or
Controls
(S/M) (Y page 95) open one of the front doors, the
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal automatic transmission will auto-
(Y page 94) matically shift to park position P.
Rthe
If you switch off the engine using
road speed
the Start/Stop button and open
Rselect a possible shift range restriction the driver's door, the automatic
In drive position D, you can use the DIRECT transmission automatically shifts
SELECT steering wheel gearshift paddle to park position P.
(Y page 94) to influence the gearshifts C Reverse gear
made by the automatic transmission and shift
Only shift the automatic transmis-
gear yourself.
sion to R when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Gear indicator
A Neutral
The current gear is shown in the multi-func-
tion display. Do not shift the automatic trans-
mission to N while you are driving.
Otherwise, the automatic trans-
mission could be damaged.
If you switch off the engine using
the key or the Start/Stop button,
the automatic transmission auto-
matically shifts to neutral N.
: Gear indicator If ESP® is deactivated or faulty,
only shift the automatic transmis-
! If the gear indicator in the multi-function sion to N if the vehicle is in danger
display is not working, you should pull away of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
carefully to check whether the desired gear
7 Drive
is engaged. Ideally, you should select posi-
tion D and drive program S*. Do not restrict The automatic transmission
the shift range. changes gear automatically. All
forward gears are available.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 94

94 Transmission
Driving tips
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
Rlittle throttle: early upshifts
Rmore throttle: late upshifts
Controls
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the : Left-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
pressure point. dle: to shift down
The transmission shifts to a lower gear ; Right-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-
depending on the engine speed. dle: to shift up
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached. Shift ranges
The automatic transmission shifts back up. In transmission position D, you can use the
steering wheel gearshift paddle to restrict or
Trailer towing
derestrict the shift range for the automatic
X Drive in the middle of the engine speed transmission.
range on uphill gradients.
The shift range selected is shown in the multi-
X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2 depending function display. The automatic transmission
on the incline of the uphill or downhill gra- shifts only as far as the selected gear.
dient (Y page 94), even if cruise control
is activated. i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
range is reached and you continue to accel-
erate, the automatic transmission shifts up
Steering wheel gearshift paddles* in order to prevent the engine from over-
revving, even if the shift range is restricted.
and manual drive program*
You can restrict or derestrict the shift range Driving situation
by using the steering wheel gearshift paddle. = The braking effect of the engine can
You can change gear yourself by using the be used in this position
steering wheel gearshift paddle in the manual
drive program. 5 To use the braking effect of the
engine on downhill gradients and
for driving:
Ron steep mountain roads
Rin mountainous terrain

Rin arduous conditions
4 To use the braking effect of the
engine on extremely steep downhill
gradients and long downhill
stretches
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 95

Transmission 95
Extending the shift range/shifting up Selecting the ideal shift range

X Pull right-hand steering wheel gearshift X Pull the left-hand steering wheel gearshift
paddle. paddle repeatedly until the optimum gear
The shift range is derestricted. If you are is reached.
driving in manual drive program M, the The automatic transmission shifts to the
automatic transmission shifts up to the gear which allows ideal acceleration and
next gear. deceleration. To do this, the automatic
transmission shifts down one or more
Controls
i If the maximum engine speed for the shift gears.
range is reached and you continue to accel-
erate, the automatic transmission shifts up,
even if the shift range is restricted. Program selector button
You can select either drive program S or M.
Restricting the shift range/shifting The program selector button is located on the
down centre console.
G Risk of accident
Do not change down for additional engine
the vehicle could skid.
X Pull left-hand steering wheel gearshift pad-

dle.
The automatic transmission shifts down
one gear and restricts the shift range to this
gear.
If you are driving in manual drive program S Sport sporty driving style
M, the automatic transmission shifts down
M Manual manual gearshifting
to the next gear.
i In order to prevent the engine from over- X To activate: press program selector but-
revving, the automatic transmission does ton : repeatedly until M appears in the
not shift down when the engine speed is
multi-function display.
too high.
The automatic transmission changes to
manual drive program M.
Derestricting the shift range
i Regardless of whether automatic drive
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel gearshift
program S or manual drive program M is
paddle until the number for the gear disap-
pears from the multi-function display. selected, the automatic transmission
always switches to automatic drive pro-
or gram C when you next start the engine.
X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to position
D.
The automatic transmission shifts from the
current shift range directly to D.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 96

96 Instrument cluster
Drive program S is characterised by the fol- will shift down to a gear that will allow the
lowing: vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
Rsporty engine and suspension configura- Kickdown
tion
You can also use kickdown for maximum
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear acceleration in manual drive program M.
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
later pressure point.
Controls
Rthe late shift point of the automatic trans- The transmission shifts to a lower gear
mission can lead to higher fuel consump- depending on the engine speed.
tion X Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
If you have selected transmission position D,
you can activate the manual drive program i If you apply full throttle, the automatic
and shift up or down through the individual transmission shifts up to the next gear
gears. The gear currently selected and when the maximum engine speed is
engaged is shown in the multi-function dis- reached. This prevents the engine from
play. overrevving.
X To deactivate: press program selector
button : repeatedly until S or M appears
in the multi-function display. Instrument cluster
or Points to remember
X Restart the engine.
You will find an illustration of the instrument
The automatic transmission then switches cluster in the "At a glance" section
to the automatic drive program. (Y page 25).
Upshifting G Risk of accident
X Pull right-hand steering wheel gearshift No further messages can be displayed if the
paddle (Y page 94). instrument cluster and/or the multi-function
The automatic transmission shifts up to the display fails.
next gear. This means that you will not see information
about the driving situation, such as the speed,
Downshifting outside temperature, warning/indicator
G Risk of accident lamps, display messages or system failures.
Do not change down for additional engine The vehicle's handling characteristics may be
braking on a slippery road surface. This could affected. Adjust your driving style and speed
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and accordingly.
the vehicle could skid. Immediately consult a qualified specialist
workshop which has the necessary specialist
X Pull left-hand steering wheel gearshift pad- knowledge and tools to carry out the work
dle (Y page 95). required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
The automatic transmission shifts down to you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
the next gear. this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
safety or on safety-related systems must be
i If you brake the vehicle or stop without
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
shifting down, the automatic transmission
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 97

On-board computer 97
Speedometer with segments Multi-function steering wheel

The segments in the speedometer indicate You can control the multi-function display and
which speed range is available. the settings in the on-board computer using
Distronic* mode: the buttons on the multi-function steering
wheel.
One or two segments around the stored
speed light up.
Controls
Rev counter
The red band in the rev counter indicates the
engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is
interrupted to protect the engine when the
red band is reached.
! Do not drive in the overrevving range.
Doing so will damage the engine.
Outside temperature display

G Risk of accident
At temperatures just above freezing point, the
road could be icy, particularly in wooded areas : Multi-function display
or on bridges. The vehicle could start skidding ; 6 Makes/accepts or rejects
if you fail to adapt your driving style. You ~ ends a call
should therefore always adapt your driving
W Rselects submenus in the
style and speed to suit the weather condi-
X Settings menu
tions.
Rchanges values
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
Radjusts the volume
played after a short delay.
? Activates Linguatronic* – see
the separate operating
On-board computer instructions
Points to remember = V Selects a menu: scrolls back
The on-board computer is activated as soon U and forth
as you turn the key to position 1 in the ignition A Deactivates Linguatronic* –
lock.
see the separate operating
G Risk of accident instructions
Only use the on-board computer when road
and traffic conditions permit. You would oth-
erwise be distracted and unable to concen-
trate properly on driving, and could cause an
accident.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 98

98 On-board computer
Ropen a front door.

& Press briefly: scrolls back
* and forth within a menu Rpress the . reset button in the instrument
In the Audio/TV*/DVD* panel.
menu: selects a stored sta- Values, settings and display messages are
tion, an audio track or a video shown in the multi-function display.
scene
In the Telephone menu,
switches to the phone book
Controls
and selects a name or a tele-

phone number
& Press and hold: in the
* Audio/TV*/DVD* menu,
selects the next/previous sta-
tion or selects an audio track
using rapid scrolling
In the Telephone menu,
: Display area for menus or submenus
starts rapid scrolling through
the phone book ; Transmission position
= Drive program
? Status bar with outside temperature or
Multi-function display speed (Y page 104)
To activate the multi-function display:
Rswitch on the ignition.
Rswitch on the lights.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 99

Menus and submenus
Controls
Function Function
: Standard display menu B Message memory menu19
(Y page 99) (Y page 211)
Rtyre pressure loss warning
C Settings menu (Y page 103)
(Y page 182) or tyre pressure mon-
itor* (Y page 183) D Additional functions menu
RASSYST PLUS service interval dis- (Y page 109)
play E Trip computer menu (Y page 110)
Rchecking engine oil level* F Telephone menu (Y page 111)
(Y page 176)
; Audio/TV*/DVD* menu The number of menus shown depends on the
(Y page 100) optional equipment in the vehicle.
Depending on the audio system fitted, the
= Navigation* menu (Y page 102)
Audio, Navigation* and Telephone menus
? Off-road* menu (Y page 102) are slightly different. The examples given in
Roff-road level (Y page 129) this Owner's Manual apply to vehicles equip-
ped with COMAND APS*.
Rcompass display (Y page 166)
Rdifferential
locks (status indicator)
(Y page 116) Standard display menu
A Distronic* menu (Y page 119) Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
ing wheel.
19 The menu is only visible when there is a display message.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 100

X Press the V or U button to select the concentration, the reading may rise to
standard display. 120 †.
Displaying the digital speedometer or

outside temperature
If you have selected the digital speedometer
as the status line (Y page 104), select the
outside temperature display here20.
Controls
X Press the V or U button to select the

Standard display
standard display.
: Trip meter
X Press the & or * button to select
; Total distance
digital speedometer or the outside temper-
You can select the following functions in the ature.
Standard display menu using the & or
* button:
Rtyre pressure loss warning (Y page 182) or
tyre pressure monitor* (Y page 183)
Rcoolant temperature (Y page 100)
Rdigital speedometer or outside tempera-
ture (Y page 104) Digital speedometer
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
Rengine oil level* (Y page 176)
X To reset the trip meter: press and hold
the . reset button in the instrument clus-
ter until the trip meter is reset.
Displaying the coolant temperature Outside temperature

standard display.
Audio/TV*/DVD* menu
X Press the & or * button to select the
coolant temperature. Use the functions in the Audio/TV/DVD
menu to operate the audio equipment or
COMAND APS*.
Selecting a radio station

You can only store new stations using the
audio system or COMAND APS* (see the sep-
arate operating instructions).
Under normal driving conditions, with the cor-
rect anti-corrosion and antifreeze additive
20 Vehicles for the United Kingdom: the outside temperature is always displayed.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 101

X Switch on the audio system or COMAND

APS* and select the radio; see the separate
operating instructions.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Audio/TV/DVD menu.
CD changer display* (example)
Controls
: Current CD (for CD/DVD changer*)
; Current track
X To select the next/previous track:

briefly press the & or * button.
: Waveband21
X To select a track from the track list
; Current channel (rapid scrolling): press and briefly hold the
& or * button.
X To select a stored channel: briefly press
the & or * button. The current track will not be displayed in
X To select a channel from the channel
audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: exter-
nal audio source connected).
list: press and briefly hold the & or
* button.
Operating the TV*
X To select a station using the station
search (only if no station list is received): X Switch on COMAND and select TV (see the
press and briefly hold the & or * separate operating instructions).
button. X Press V or U on the steering wheel
i DAB* radio mode22 (Digital Audio Broad-
casting); see the separate operating
instructions.
Operating the audio drive or audio

media*
Audio data from various audio devices or : Function21

media can be played, depending on the equip- ; Current channel
ment fitted in the vehicle.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND X To select a stored channel: briefly press
APS* and select the audio player or the & or * button.
medium, see the separate operating X To select a channel from the channel
instructions. list: press and briefly hold the & or
X Press V or U on the steering wheel * button.
to select the Audio/TV/DVD menu. X To select a channel with the channel
search function (only if COMAND does
21 When current channel ; has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed.
22 Only for certain countries.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 102

not receive channel lists): press and briefly

hold the & or * button.
Operating the DVD video*

X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD
(see the separate operating instructions).
X Press V or U on the steering wheel Vehicle heading display (example)
Controls

Route guidance active
The multi-function display shows navigation
instructions, for example:
DVD changer display* (example)

: Current DVD (for DVD changer*)
; Current scene
X Press the & or * button to select a

scene. Off-road menu*
You can set the following current settings to
appear in the Off-road menu:
Navigation* menu ROff-road level (Y page 129)
In the Navigation menu, the navigation RCompass (Y page 166)

instructions from the navigation system RDifferential locks (Y page 116)
appear in the multi-function display.
Use the buttons on the multi-function steer- i Large buildings, power cables or powerful
ing wheel. transmission masts as well as metallic
X Press the V or U button to select the objects on or in the vehicle may interfere
Navigation menu. with the compass display.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
APS* (see separate operating instruc- ing wheel.
tions). X Press the V or U button to select the
Off-road menu.
Route guidance inactive
The direction of travel appears in the multi-
function display. When the name of the street
is part of the navigation system data, this will
also be displayed.
Message in the multi-function display (example)
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 103

Settings menu X Press the . reset button again.

The functions of most submenus are
restored to factory settings.
or
X If you want to retain the settings, do not
press reset button . a second time.
You will see the Settings... menu again
after approximately five seconds.
Controls
You can use the Settings menu to: X Press the V or U button to select a
Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 103) different menu.
Rchange the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 103) Instrument cluster submenu
Rchange the time/date settings23 Selecting the unit of measurement for
(Y page 104). distance
Rchange the lighting settings (Y page 105) This function is not available on vehicles with
Rchange speedometers in mph.
the vehicle settings (Y page 106)
The selected unit of measurement for dis-
Rchange the auxiliary heating* settings tance applies to:
(Y page 107)
Rthe analogue speedometer
Rchange the convenience settings*
Rthe total distance recorder and the trip
(Y page 108)
meter
Rthe trip computer
Resetting to factory settings
Rthe navigation instruction in the Naviga-
For safety reasons, not all functions will be
reset: permanent Speedtronic can only be set tion* menu
in the Vehicle submenu. The Daytime Rcruise control
driving lamps function in the Lighting RSpeedtronic
submenu is only reset if the vehicle is sta-
RDistronic*
tionary.
X Press V or U on the steering wheel X Press V or U on the steering wheel
to select the Settings... menu. to select the Settings... menu.
X Press and hold the . reset button on the X Press the & button to select submenus.
instrument cluster for approximately three X Press the W or X button to select the
seconds. Instrument cluster submenu.
A prompt appears in the multi-function dis- X Press the & button to select Display
play asking you to confirm by pressing
unit Speed/odometer.
the . reset button again.
X Press the W or X button to select
km (kilometres) or miles as the unit of
measurement for distance.
X Press the &, V or U button to
select a different display.
23 This function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS*, Audio 55 APS* or COMAND APS*.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 104

Selecting the distance units for the digital X Press the W or X button to select the
speedometer status line display: vehicle speed (Speed)
This function is not available on vehicles with or outside temperature (Outside temp.).
speedometers in mph. The selected display now appears con-
X Press V or U on the steering wheel stantly in the lower multi-function display.
When you scroll through the Standard dis-
to select the Settings... menu.
play menu (Y page 99), you will see the
X Press the & button to select submenus.
display you have not selected.
Controls
X Press the W or X button to select the

Instrument cluster submenu. select a different display.
X Press the & button to select Display
unit Digital speedometer. Time/date submenu24
X Press the W or X button to select
km (kilometres) or miles as the unit of Setting the date and time
measurement for distance. Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the
X Press the &, V or U button to following audio systems:
select a different display. A: Audio 20
Selecting the language B: Audio 50 APS*
C: COMAND APS*
to select the Settings... menu. X You can see which audio system is fitted in
X Press the & button to select submenus. your vehicle by referring to the separate
operating instructions.
Instrument cluster submenu. Depending on the audio system, the time and
date are received from GPS satellites and
X Press the & button to select Language.
cannot be set using the on-board computer
X Press the W or X button to select the (see the following table).
desired language.
A B C
select a different display. Set using the on-board com- X
puter
Selecting the status line display
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: this func- Automatic GPS satellite recep- X X
tion is not available. tion
to select the Settings... menu. X Press V or U on the steering wheel
X Press the & button to select submenus. to select the Settings... menu.
X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the & button to select submenus.
Instrument cluster submenu. X Press the W or X button to select the
X Press the & button to select Status Time/Date submenu.

line display.
24 This function is not available on vehicles with Audio 50 APS* or COMAND APS*.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 105

Setting the time Switching the surround lighting on/off

X Press & to select Time set Hours (or If the surround lighting is switched on, the
time set Minutes). following lights will be switched on automat-
X Press the W or X button to set a ically in the dark after you have unlocked the
vehicle using the key:
value.
Rthe side lamps
Setting the date Rthe licence plate lighting
Press the & button to select Date Set
Controls
X
Rthe front foglamps
day (or Date Set month or Date set
year). The surround lighting switches off automati-
X Press the W or X button to set the cally after 40 seconds or when the driver's
door is opened.
date.
select a different display. to select the Settings... menu.
Lighting submenu X Press the W or X button to select the

Lighting submenu.
Setting the daytime driving lights X Press the & button to select the Sur‐
If you set the daytime driving lights and the round lighting function.
light switch is set to $ or Ã, the day- X Press the W or X button to switch
time driving lights are switched on automati- the Surround lighting function on or
cally when the engine is running. When it is off.
dark, the side lamps and dipped-beam head-
lights are switched on automatically.
In countries in which daytime driving lights
are a legal requirement, On is the factory set- Activating or deactivating the exterior
ting. lighting delayed switch-off
X Press V or U on the steering wheel When you activate the Headlamp delayed
to select the Settings... menu. shut off function, the exterior lighting
X Press the & button to select submenus. remains on for another 15 seconds after clos-
X Press the W or X button to select the ing the doors when it is dark. If the engine is
Lighting submenu. switched off and then none of the doors are
opened, or if an open door is not closed, the
X Press & to select Daytime driving
exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds.
lamps.
If you have activated the delayed switch-off
X Press W or X to set daytime driving
function and switched off the engine, the fol-
lights to on or off. lowing remain lit:
Rthe side lamps
Rthe licence plate lighting
Rthe front foglamps
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 106

X Press the W or X button to select the Rmotorway mode

Lighting submenu. Ractive light function
X Press the & button to select Head‐
Rextended range foglamps
lamps delayed switch-off.
X Press the W or X button to activate
or deactivate the Headlamps delayed to select the Settings... menu.
switch-off function. X Press the & button to select submenus.
X Press W or X to select the Light‐
Controls

select a different display. ing submenu.
Deactivating the delayed switch-off tempora- X Press & to select Intelligent Light
rily: System.
X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the key to X Press the W or X button to activate
position 0 in the ignition lock. or deactivate the Intelligent Light
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition System.
lock and back to position 0. X Press the &, V or U button to
Delayed switch-off is deactivated. select a different display.
Delayed switch-off is deactivated the next
time you start the engine. Setting the ambient lighting*
Activating/deactivating the interior light-
ing delayed switch-off
If you remove the key from the ignition lock
while the Interior lighting delayed
switch off function is activated, the interior Lighting submenu.
lighting remains on for 10 seconds if it is dark. X Press the & button to select Ambient
X Press V or U on the steering wheel light.

to select the Settings... menu. X Press W or X to adjust the bright-
X Press the & button to select submenus. ness to any level from Level 0 (off) to
Level 5 (bright).
X Press &, V or U to select a dif-
Lighting submenu.
X Press the & button to select Interior
ferent display.
lighting delayed switch-off.
Vehicle submenu
or deactivate Interior lighting In the Vehicle submenu, you can call up the
delayed switch-off. following functions:
X Press the &, V or U button to Rcompass* (Y page 166)
select a different display. Rdisplay when the ignition is switched off
(Y page 107)
Activating/deactivating the Intelligent
Rpermanent Speedtronic (Y page 126)
Light System*
When you activate the Intelligent Light Rautomatic locking feature (Y page 107)
System you activate the following functions:
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 107

Setting the display when the ignition is Heating submenu

switched off
The Display when ignition off function Auxiliary heating* departure time
allows you to set which display you see in the Only vehicles with auxiliary heating have this
multi-function display after removing the key function.
from the ignition lock. The Aux.heating departure time function
X Press V or U on the steering wheel allows you to select a stored departure time
to select the Settings... menu. or change the departure time for which the
Controls
vehicle with auxiliary heating is preheated.
The auxiliary heating timer function calcu-
lates the switch-on time according to the out-
Vehicle submenu. side temperature so that the vehicle is pre-
X Press the & button to select Display heated by the departure time. When the
when ignition off. departure time is reached, the auxiliary heat-
X Press the W or X button to select ing continues to heat for a further five
Interior motion sensor, Tow-away minutes and then switches off. The auxiliary
protection or Miles/km. heating adopts the temperature settings
X Press the &, V or U button to selected for Thermatic 2-zone automatic cli-
mate control or Thermotronic luxury multi-
zone automatic climate control*.
Activating/deactivating the automatic You can switch off the auxiliary heating by
door locking feature using the remote control or the auxiliary heat-
When you activate the Automatic door ing button on the centre console.
locking function, your vehicle will be cen- G Risk of poisoning
trally locked above a speed of approximately
Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxili-
15 km/h.
ary heating is in operation. Inhaling these
i For more information on the automatic exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should
door locking feature, see (Y page 60). therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in
confined spaces without an extraction sys-
X Press V or U on the steering wheel tem, e.g. a garage.
X Press the & button to select submenus. G Risk of fire
X Press the W or X button to select the When the auxiliary heating is in operation,
Vehicle submenu. parts of the vehicle can become very hot.
X Press the & button to select Auto‐
Make sure that the exhaust system does
not under any circumstances come into con-
matic door locking.
tact with highly flammable materials such as
dry grass or fuels. The highly flammable mate-
or deactivate the Automatic door lock‐ rial could otherwise ignite and set the vehicle
ing feature. alight. Select your parking space accordingly.
X Press the &, V or U button to Operating the auxiliary heating is therefore
select a different display. prohibited at filling stations or when your vehi-
cle is being refuelled. Always switch off the
auxiliary heating at filling stations.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 108

Selecting the departure time or deactivat- X Press the W or X button to set the
ing a selected departure time minutes.
You can call up the Aux.heating depar‐ X Press the * button to select a different
ture time function directly. display.
X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ignition After changing from one menu to another,
lock. the new time setting is stored. The yellow
X Press the button for the auxiliary heating on indicator lamp lights up on the button for
the centre console (Y page 147). the auxiliary heating on the centre console.
Controls
or
X Press V or U on the steering wheel Convenience submenu*
to select the Settings... menu. Activating or deactivating the easy-entry/
X Press the & button to select submenus. exit feature*
G Risk of injury
Heater submenu. The steering wheel moves when the EASY-
X Press the & button to select Aux.heat‐ ENTRY/EXIT feature is active. There is a risk
ing departure time. of occupants becoming trapped. Before acti-
You will see the selected setting. vating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, make
X Press the W or X button to select sure that nobody can become trapped.
one of the three departure times or Timer Do not leave children unsupervised in the
off (no timer active). vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
When a switch-on time is selected, the yel- restraint system. The children could open the
low indicator lamp lights up in the auxiliary driver's door and thereby unintentionally acti-
heating button. vate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and
become trapped.
Changing the departure time
to select the Settings... menu. to select the Settings... menu.
X Press the & button to select submenus. X Press the & button to select submenus.
X Press the W or X button to select the X Press the W or X button to select the
Heater submenu. Convenience submenu.
X Press the & button to select Aux.heat‐ X Press the & button to select the EASY-
ing departure time. ENTRY feature.
X Press W or X to select Time 1, X Press the W or X button to activate
Time 2 or Time 3 to be changed. or deactivate the EASY-ENTRY system.
X Press & to select Departure time X Press the &, V or U button to
X Set hour. select a different display.

X Press the W or X button to set the
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
hour.
X Press the & button to select Depar‐
ture time X Set minutes.
Convenience submenu.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 109

X Press the & button to select Belt Activating/deactivating the distance

adjustment. warning function*
This function is only available with Dis-
or deactivate Belt adjustment. tronic* (Y page 119).
Switching the fold in mirrors when lock- X Press V or U on the steering wheel
ing* function on/off to select the Additional functions menu.

When you activate the Fold in mirrors X If the Distance warning function is not
Controls
when locking function, the exterior mirrors displayed, press the & or * button
are folded in when the vehicle is locked. When to select the Distance warning system.
you switch on the ignition, the exterior mir- X Press the W or X button to activate
rors fold out again. or deactivate the Distance warning sys-
If the function is activated and you fold in the tem.
exterior mirrors using the button on the door When the distance warning function is acti-
(Y page 73), the exterior mirrors do not fold vated, the Ä symbol is shown in the
out automatically. The exterior mirrors can lower multi-function display.
then only be folded out using the button on X Press &, V or U to select a dif-
the door. ferent display.
to select the Settings... menu. Setting DSR
The DSR Speed function allows you to set the
X Press the W or X button to select the threshold speed (vehicle speed for driving
Convenience submenu. downhill) of the DSR (Y page 113) to a value
X Press the & button to select Fold in between 4 km/h and 18 km/h. The adjust-
mirrors when locking. ment is carried out in increments of 2 km/h.
X Press the W or X button to activate X Press V or U on the steering wheel
or deactivate the Fold in mirrors when to select the Additional functions menu.
locking feature. X If the DSR Speed function is not displayed,
X Press the &, V or U button to press the & or * button to select the
select a different display. DSR.
X Press the W or X button to set the
desired threshold speed.
Additional functions menu X Press &, V or U to select a dif-
In the Additional functions menu, you can: ferent display.

Ractivate/deactivate the distance warning
function* Priming/deactivating tow-away protec-
Rset DSR (Y page 109)
tion*
Rprime/deactivate tow-away protec- If you deactivate Tow-away protection, it
tion* (Y page 109) will not be primed when you next lock the
vehicle.
Rprime/deactivate the interior motion sen-
sor* (Y page 110)
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 110


to select the Additional functions menu. to select the trip computer menu.
X If Tow-away protection is not displayed, X Press & or * to select From start
press the & or * button to select or From reset.
Tow-away protection.
X Press the W or X button to prime or
deactivate Tow-away protection.
Controls

ferent display.
Priming/deactivating the interior

Trip computer "From start" (example)
motion sensor*
: Distance
If you deactivate the Interior motion sen‐ ; Time
sor, it will not be primed when you next lock
= Average speed
the vehicle.
? Average fuel consumption
to select the Additional functions menu. The trip computer function From start is
X If the Interior motion sensor function
automatically reset when:
Rthe ignition has been switched off for more
is not displayed, press the & or *
button to select the Interior motion than 4 hours.
sensor. R999 hours have been exceeded.
X Press the W or X button to prime or R9,999 kilometres/miles have been excee-
deactivate the Interior motion sensor. ded.
The From reset message is shown and the
ferent display. trip computer is automatically reset if the
value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 kilome-
tres/miles.
Trip computer menu
You can use the Trip computer menu to call Resetting
up or reset statistical data for your vehicle. X Press V or U on the steering wheel
You can select km or miles as the unit of to select the trip computer menu.
measurement for distance (Y page 103). X Press the & or * button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
Trip computer "From start" or "From X Press and hold the . reset button on the
reset"
instrument cluster until the values have
The values in the From start submenu are reverted to "0".
calculated from the start of a journey whilst
the values in the From reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 111

Calling up the range the traffic conditions, cause an accident and

X Press V or U on the steering wheel injure yourself and others.
to select the trip computer menu. Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
X Press & or * to select Range: ing wheel.
The multi-function display shows the esti- X Switch on the mobile phone and audio
mated range of the vehicle, based on the equipment or COMAND APS*; see the sep-
current driving style and the fuel level. If arate operating instructions.
Controls
there is only a small amount of fuel remain- X Press the V or U button to select the
ing in the fuel tank, a vehicle refuelling
Telephone menu.
C appears instead of the range.
Mobile phone on
Displaying current fuel consumption
X Press V or U to select the Trip com- PIN code not yet entered
puter menu. Once you have inserted the mobile phone into
X Press & or * to select Consump‐ the mobile phone bracket*, the multi-func-
tion. tion display shows the Please enter PIN
The current fuel consumption is displayed. message.
X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone, Lin-
guatronic*, the audio system or COMAND
APS*.
The mobile phone will search for a network.
Mobile phone operational

You will see Ready or the name of the mobile
phone network provider in the multi-function
display. If the mobile phone operational read-
Telephone menu iness symbol goes out, your vehicle is outside
of the transmission and reception range. In
Functions and displays depend on the this case you will see No Service in the
optional equipment installed in your vehicle. multi-function display.
You can place your mobile phone in the
mobile phone bracket* (Y page 164), or set Accepting a call
up a Bluetooth connection to the audio sys-
tem or to COMAND APS* (see separate oper- If someone calls you when you are in the
ating instructions). Telephone menu, a display message appears
in the multi-function display, for example:
G Risk of accident
Observe the legal requirements of the country
in which you are currently driving regarding
the use of mobile phones in the vehicle.
If it is permitted to use mobile phones while
the vehicle is in motion, you should only use
them when the road and traffic conditions
allow. Otherwise, you may be distracted from
X Press the 6 button to accept the call.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 112

112 Off-road driving
If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can Off-road driving
still accept a call.
Overview of off-road driving systems
Rejecting or ending a call The systems which are relevant for off-road
X Press the ~ button. driving are explained on the following pages:
R4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive), for
If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can
still accept a call. optimum traction
Controls
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation), which

Dialling a number from the phone book assists you when driving downhill
You can use the mobile phone to enter new RLOW RANGE off-road gear for better trac-
telephone numbers into the phone book (see tion off-road
separate operating instructions). If your RDifferential locks for increased traction off-
mobile phone is operational, you can select road
and dial a number from the phone book at any
time. You will find further information about driving
off-road in the "Operation" section
(Y page 188).
Telephone menu.
X Press the & or * button to call up
the phone book. 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
X Press the & or * button to select the
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-
name you are searching for. To scroll rap- manently driven. Together with ESP® and
idly, press and hold the & or * but- 4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle
ton for longer than 1 second. whenever a drive wheel spins due to insuffi-
X Press the 6 button to start dialling. cient grip.
or G Risk of accident
X If you do not want to make a call, press the
4MATIC cannot reduce the risk of an accident
~ button. if you drive too fast.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
Redialling Ronly depress the accelerator pedal as far as
The on-board computer saves the last names necessary when pulling away.
or numbers dialled in the redial memory. Raccelerate less when driving.
X Press the V or U button to select the Radapt your driving style to suit road and
Telephone menu. traffic conditions.
X Press the 6 button to switch to the
redial memory. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
X Press the & or * button to select the effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
desired name or number. you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow
X Press the 6 button to start dialling. chains if necessary.
! When testing the parking brake, operate

the vehicle only briefly (for a maximum of
ten seconds) on a brake test dynamometer.
When doing this, turn the key to position
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 113

Off-road driving 113
0 or 1 in the ignition. Failure to do this can speed than that set on the on-board computer
cause damage to the drive train or the at any time by braking or accelerating.
brake system.
G Risk of accident
! A function or performance test should If you depress the accelerator pedal with DSR
only be carried out on a twin-axle dyna- activated, then the set speed can be excee-
mometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle ded. Drive downhill with special care and
on such a dynamometer, please consult a always keep in mind that DSR brakes the vehi-
cle as soon as you remove your foot from the
Controls
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre in advance.
You could otherwise damage the drive train accelerator pedal. The vehicle may be heavily
or the brake system. braked by DSR depending on the gradient and
the difference between the vehicle's road
speed and the set speed. You could lose con-
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) trol of the vehicle and cause an accident.
You will find information about driving off- The speed is set to 6 km/h at the factory.
road in the "Operation" section
(Y page 188). Activating/deactivating DSR
DSR is an aid to assist you when driving down-
hill. It keeps the speed of travel at the speed Activating
set on the on-board computer (Y page 109). You can only activate DSR when driving at a
The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater speeds below 30 km/h.
the DSR braking effect on the vehicle. When
driving on flat stretches of road or on an uphill
gradient, the DSR braking effect is minimal or
non-existent.
G Risk of accident
DSR is only an aid designed to assist you when
driving downhill. You are responsible for keep-
ing control of the vehicle and for assessing
whether the downhill gradient can be man-
aged.
When activating DSR the vehicle may brake
suddenly due to DSR intervening. This is
X Press button :.
dependent on the downhill gradient and the Indicator lamp ; lights up.
difference between the current speed and the The DSR symbol and a message such as the
speed set. DSR may not always be able to following appear in the multi-function display:
keep to the set speed, depending on road sur-
face and tyre conditions. You could lose con-
trol of the vehicle and cause an accident.
Select a set speed suitable for the prevailing
conditions and when necessary, apply the
brakes manually.
DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when

If the current vehicle speed is too high, the
DIRECT SELECT lever positions D, R and N are
DSR symbol appears in the multi-function dis-
selected. You can drive at a higher or a lower
play with the max. speed 30 km/h message.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 114

Deactivating LOW RANGE off-road gear

X Press button :.
The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you in
Indicator lamp ; goes out. driving off-road and when fording. When LOW
The DSR symbol appears in the multi-func- RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance
tion display with the Off message. characteristics and the gearshifting charac-
DSR switches off automatically if you drive teristics of the automatic transmission are
faster than 35 km/h. The DSR symbol adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and
4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road
Controls
appears in the multi-function display with the

Off message. You also hear a warning tone. driving are also activated. You will find infor-
mation about driving off-road in the "Opera-
Changing the set speed while the vehi- tion" section (Y page 188). You will find infor-
cle is in motion mation about driving safety systems in con-
junction with LOW RANGE in the "Safety" sec-
When DSR is activated, you can change the tion (Y page 49).
set speed to a value between 4 km/h and
18 km/h while the vehicle is in motion. Shift ranges
HIGH RANGE Road position for all nor-

mal driving situations
LOW RANGE Off-road position for driv-
ing off-road and fording
The gear ratio between the
engine and wheels is only
approximately one third of
that in the HIGH RANGE
road position. The drive
torque is correspondingly
X To increase or reduce the set speed by
higher as a result.
1 km/h increments: briefly press the
cruise control lever to the pressure point, Do not use LOW RANGE:
up : for a higher set speed or down ; for Ron slippery road surfa-
a lower set speed. ces, e.g. in the case of
The set value appears in the multi-function slush
display. Ron snow or ice-covered
X To increase or reduce the set speed in roads
10 km/h increments: briefly press cruise Rif you have snow chains
control beyond the pressure point, up : on your vehicle
for a higher set speed or down ; for a
lower set speed.
The set value appears in the multi-function G Risk of accident
display. Always wait for the gear change process from
HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE – and from LOW
RANGE to HIGH RANGE – to complete. Do not
turn off the engine while changing gear and
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 115

do not switch the automatic transmission to While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
another gear. cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
If you do not wait for the gear change process RANGE button : again.
to complete, it may not be correctly imple-
From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE
mented. The transfer case may then be in
neutral and the connection between the ! Only carry out the gear change process if:
engine and the drive axles may be disen- Rthe engine is running
gaged. The vehicle could then move freely,
Controls
Rthe automatic transmission is in N
even if a gear is engaged, and could inadver-
tently start moving, particularly if it is on a Ryou are not driving above 70 km/h
slope.
Observe the messages in the multi-function X Press LOW RANGE button :.
display. Indicator lamp ; flashes.
If the gear change process has taken place,
indicator lamp ; and LOW RANGE indica-
tor = in the multi-function display go out.
While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can
cancel the gear change by pressing LOW
RANGE button : again.
Messages in the multi-function display
If a gear change process has not been suc-
cessful, the following messages may be dis-
played in the multi-function display:
RMax. speed 40 km/h
You have been driving faster than
40 km/h. Indicator lamp ; also flashes.
X Drive more slowly to carry out the gear
change process.
REngage N briefly
The automatic transmission is in D and you
From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE are now driving below 40 km/h.
! Only carry out the gear change process if: X Move the DIRECT SELECT lever to N to
Rthe engine is running carry out the gear change process.

Rthe automatic transmission is in N RShifting process cancelled Reacti‐
Ryou
vate
are not driving above 40 km/h
The gear change process was not carried
X Press LOW RANGE button :. out.
Indicator lamp ; flashes. LOW RANGE X Maintain all gear change conditions
indicator = appears in the multi-function and carry out the gear change process
display. again.
When the gear change is complete, indica- RStop vehicle. Apply parking brake
tor lamp ; lights up.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 116

An acoustic warning will also sound. The Automatic mode

gear change process has not been comple- Use automatic mode ; for all driving situa-
ted. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position. tions, including driving off-road or when ford-
There is no connection between the engine ing.
and the drive wheels.
In automatic mode, the differential locks are
! Do not drive any further, otherwise you engaged and disengaged according to driving
could damage the vehicle's drive train. requirements. This guarantees sufficient trac-
tion for most driving situations with unrestric-
Controls
X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the ted vehicle steerability.
road and traffic conditions when doing
X Start the engine.
this.
The differential locks are in automatic
X Depress the parking brake.
mode. The indicator lamp in selector
X Carry out the gear change process wheel : lights up above symbol for auto-
again. matic mode ;.
If the gear change process has been
carried out, the Stop vehicle. Apply Engaging manually
parking brake message disappears.
G Risk of accident
When driving on a firm road surface, only drive
in automatic mode, never with manually
Differential locks engaged differential locks. If differential locks
Differential locks improve the vehicle’s trac- have been engaged manually, the vehicle's
tion. steerability is greatly impaired and the risk of
Your vehicle is equipped with the following: an accident thereby increased.
RA
Do not manually engage or disengage the dif-
differential lock for the transfer box: this
ferential locks while cornering. The vehicle
controls the balance between the front and
motion could otherwise be jerky. You could
rear axles.
lose control of the vehicle as a result and
RA differential lock for the rear axle: this cause an accident.
controls the balance between the wheels
and the rear axle. Only engage the differential locks manually if
traction in automatic mode is insufficient.
4ETS (Y page 53) controls the compensation
between the wheels and the front axle. At speeds of up to 30 km/h, you can engage
the differential locks by hand.
Engaging the differential locks X Start the engine.
X Turn selector wheel : to desired position
= or ?.
The indicator lamp in selector wheel :
lights up at the corresponding symbol.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 117

Driving systems 117
The engaged differential appears in the multi- Rlevel control, for individual adjustment of
function display: ground clearance
RPARKTRONIC*, which assists you in park-
ing and manoeuvring
Rreversing camera*, which assists you when
parking and manoeuvring
The ABS, BAS, adaptive brake lights, ESP®,
Controls
EBV and 4ETS driving safety systems and the
A The differential lock for the transfer case distance warning function* are described in
is locked. the "Driving safety systems" section
The differential locks are not controlled auto- (Y page 49).
matically. The steerability of the vehicle is
restricted considerably. Drive carefully and
accelerate gently for optimum traction. Cruise control
You can switch back to automatic mode at Cruise control maintains a constant road
any time. For safety reasons, the differential speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
locks disengage automatically at speeds to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
above 50 km/h. If you stop the vehicle and steep downhill gradients, especially if the
switch off the ignition for longer than ten sec- vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must
onds, the differential locks switch back to select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By
automatic mode. doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine, which relieves the load
Message in the multi-function display
on the brake system and prevents the brakes
Diff. lock system overheated. from overheating and wearing too quickly.
Wait briefly
The differential lock system has overheated G Risk of accident
and briefly disengaged. Do not change down for additional engine
X Continue driving. cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
The differential locks cool off and are soon the vehicle could skid.
available once again.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
Driving systems steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 30 km/h.
Overview of driving systems
G Risk of accident
The vehicle's driving systems are described
Cruise control cannot take account of road
on the following pages:
and traffic conditions.
Rcruise control, Distronic* and Speedtronic,
Always pay attention to traffic conditions
which are used to control the speed of the even when cruise control is activated.
vehicle Cruise control is only an aid designed to assist
RAdaptive damping system (ADS), for indi- driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's
vidual adjustment of suspension tuning speed and for braking in good time.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 118

118 Driving systems
G Risk of accident When you activate cruise control, the stored

Do not use cruise control: speed is shown in the multi-function display.
Rin road and traffic conditions which do not Selecting cruise control
allow you to maintain a constant speed (e.g.
heavy traffic or winding roads). You could X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off.
otherwise cause an accident. If it is off, cruise control is already selected.
Ron slippery roads. Braking or accelerating If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
Controls
could cause the drive wheels to lose trac- the direction of arrow A.
tion and the vehicle could then skid. LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, lever goes off. Cruise control is selected.
heavy rain or snow
G Risk of accident
The brake pedal is retracted when cruise con-
Cruise control lever trol brakes. Do not restrict the freedom of
You can operate cruise control and variable movement of the pedal in any way.
Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. RDo not put any objects in the footwell.
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control REnsure that floor mats and carpets are fixed
lever indicates which system you have selec- securely.
ted:
RDo not place your foot under the brake
RLIM indicator lamp off: pedal as it could become trapped.
Cruise control is selected.
You could otherwise cause an accident and
RLIM indicator lamp lit: injure yourself and others.
Variable Speedtronic is selected.
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can store the current speed if you are
driving faster than 30 km/h and ESP® is acti-
vated (Y page 51).
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ? to the pressure point.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
: To store the current speed or a higher pedal.
speed Cruise control is activated. The vehicle
; LIM indicator lamp automatically maintains the stored speed.
= To store the current speed or to call up
the last stored speed i Cruise control may be unable to maintain
? To store the current speed or a lower
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
speed
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
A To switch between cruise control and var-
stored speed on downhill gradients by
iable Speedtronic automatically applying the brakes.
B To deactivate cruise control
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 119

Driving systems 119
Storing the current speed or calling up Adjustment in 10 km/h increments

the last stored speed
G Risk of accident beyond the pressure point, up : for a
Only select a stored speed if you know what higher speed or down ? for a lower speed.
that speed is and whether it is suitable for the The last speed stored is increased or
current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceler- reduced.
ation or braking could endanger you or others.
Controls
Deactivating cruise control
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =. There are several ways to deactivate cruise
control:
pedal. X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
The first time cruise control is activated, it wards B.
stores the current speed or regulates the or
speed of the vehicle to the previously X Brake.
stored speed.
or
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
Setting a speed
direction of arrow A.
X Press the cruise control lever to the pres- Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indi-
sure point, up : for a higher speed or cator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
down ? for a lower speed. lights up.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
the desired speed is reached. Ryou depress the parking brake.
X Release the cruise control lever.
Ryou drive at less than 30 km/h
The new speed is stored.
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
Ryou shift the automatic transmission to N
depress the accelerator pedal. For exam-
ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, while driving
cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear
to the last speed stored after you have fin- a warning tone. You will see the Cruise
ished overtaking. control Off message in the multi-function
display for approximately five seconds.
Making fine adjustments in 1 km/h i The last speed stored is cleared when you
increments switch off the engine.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or
down ? for a lower speed. Distronic*
The last speed stored is increased or i Distronic is not available in all countries.
reduced.
Distronic regulates the speed and automati-
cally maintains the distance to the vehicle in
front. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. On long and steep
downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 120

120 Driving systems
laden or towing a trailer, you must select shift maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in
range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you front that you have set.
will make use of the braking effect of the
engine, which relieves the load on the brake
G Risk of accident
system and prevents the brakes from over- Distronic cannot take account of road and
heating and wearing too quickly. traffic conditions. Deactivate, or do not acti-
vate, Distronic if it does not detect the vehicle
G Risk of accident in front, or if it no longer detects it. This is
especially the case:
Controls
The brake pedal is retracted when Distronic

brakes. Do not restrict the movement of the Rbefore corners
pedal in any way.
Rin filter lanes
RDo not put any objects in the footwell.
Rwhen changing to a lane with faster moving
REnsure that floor mats and carpets are fixed
traffic
securely.
Rin complex driving situations or where the
RDo not place your foot under the brake
lanes are diverted, e.g. at motorway/road-
pedal as it could become trapped.
way construction sites
You could otherwise cause an accident and
Otherwise, Distronic maintains the current
injure yourself and others.
speed or accelerates to the set speed.
G Risk of accident Distronic cannot take account of weather
Do not change down for additional engine conditions. Deactivate, or do not activate,
braking on a slippery road surface. This could Distronic:
cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and Rif the roads are slippery, snow-covered or
the vehicle could skid. icy. The wheels could lose their grip when
braking or accelerating. The vehicle could
G Risk of accident start to skid.
Distronic is only an aid designed to assist Rif the sensors are dirty or there is poor vis-
driving. The driver is fully responsible for the
ibility, e.g. due to snow, rain or fog. Dis-
vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the
tance control may be impaired.
vehicle's speed and for braking in good time.
Distronic does not react to: Always pay attention to traffic conditions
even when Distronic is activated. Otherwise,
Rpedestrians
you may fail to recognise dangers in time,
Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. sta- cause an accident and injure yourself and oth-
tionary or parked vehicles ers.
Roncoming and crossing traffic If no car is driving in front of you, Distronic
Distronic may not detect narrow vehicles driv- works like cruise control in the speed range
ing in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driv- between 30 km/h and 200 km/h. If a vehicle
ing on a different line. Therefore, always pay is driving in front of you, Distronic Plus works
attention to traffic conditions even when Dis- in the speed range between 0 km/h and
tronic is activated. Otherwise, you may fail to 200 km/h.
recognise dangers in time, cause an accident Do not use Distronic while driving on roads
and injure yourself and others. with steep gradients.
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,
Distronic causes your vehicle to brake and
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 121

Driving systems 121
G Risk of accident B To switch between Distronic and variable

Distronic brakes your vehicle at a maximum Speedtronic
of 4 m/s2, depending on its speed. This cor- C To deactivate Distronic
responds to approximately 40% of your vehi-
cle's maximum brake force. You must also Selecting Distronic
apply the brakes yourself if this braking power
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp = is off.
is not sufficient.
If Distronic detects a risk of collision with a If it is off, Distronic is already selected.
Controls
vehicle in front, an intermittent warning tone If it is not, press the cruise control lever in
sounds. In addition, the · distance warn- the direction of arrow B.
ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. LIM indicator lamp = in the cruise control
Brake to avoid a collision. lever goes off. Distronic is selected.
Cruise control lever Switching on Distronic, storing and

maintaining the current speed
You can operate Distronic and variable
Speedtronic with the cruise control lever. G Risk of accident
The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control The vehicle can be braked when Distronic is
lever indicates which system you have selec- activated. For this reason, deactivate Dis-
ted: tronic if the vehicle is to be set in motion by
RLIM indicator lamp off: other means (e.g. in a car wash or by towing).
Distronic is selected. You can activate Distronic in the following
RLIM indicator lamp lit: circumstances:
Variable Speedtronic is selected. Rfor about two minutes after the engine is
started
Rwhen the engine is running
Rif you do not brake during the journey
Rwhen the parking brake is not applied
Rif ESP® is activated
Rif the automatic transmission is in position
D
Rif the bonnet is closed
: To store the current speed or a higher Activating while driving

speed When driving at speeds below 30 km/h, you
; To adjust the specified distance can only activate Distronic if the vehicle in
= LIM indicator lamp front has been detected and is shown in the
? To store the current speed or call up the multi-function display. If the vehicle in front is
last stored speed not shown in the multi-function display and is
no longer being detected, because it has
A To store the current speed or a lower
changed lanes, for example, Distronic is
speed
deactivated and you hear a warning tone.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 122

122 Driving systems
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Stopping

you ? or press it up : or down A to the G Risk of accident
pressure point.
The Distronic braking effect is cancelled and
Distronic is activated.
the vehicle can start moving if:
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
RDistronic is deactivated using the cruise
up : or down A until the desired speed
control lever.
is set.
Ryou accelerate.
Controls
pedal. Rthe system or the power supply is disrup-

Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the ted, e.g. due to battery failure.
vehicle in front, but only up to the stored Rthe electrical system in the engine com-
speed. partment or the fuses have been tampered
i You can use the cruise control lever to set with.
the stored speed and the thumbwheel on Rthe battery is disconnected.
the cruise control lever to set the specified
minimum distance (Y page 123). G Risk of accident
Distronic must never be operated or deacti-
i If you do not fully release the accelerator vated by a passenger or from outside the vehi-
pedal, the DISTRONIC Override message cle.
appears in the multi-function display. The
If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,
distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front
deactivate Distronic and secure the vehicle
will then not be governed. You will be driv-
against rolling away.
ing at the speed you determine by the posi-
tion of the accelerator pedal. If Distronic detects that the vehicle in front is
stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is sta-
Driving
tionary.
If there is no vehicle in front, Distronic oper-
ates in the same way as cruise control. i Depending on the specified minimum dis-
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill
Distronic causes your vehicle to brake and about four metres behind the vehicle in
maintain the preset distance to the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is
front. set using the thumbwheel on the cruise-
control lever.
If Distronic detects a faster-moving vehicle in
front, it increases the driving speed, but only Distronic is deactivated automatically when
as far as the stored speed. stopping:
Ron flat stretches of road or on downhill gra-
G Risk of accident
dients when the vehicle is stationary.
If you depress the brake pedal, Distronic is
deactivated. Distronic will then no longer Rwhile the vehicle is still moving on uphill
brake your vehicle. The driver is fully respon- gradients, to prevent the vehicle from unex-
sible for the vehicle's distance from other pectedly rolling back when Distronic is
vehicles, its speed and for braking in good deactivated.
time. If Distronic is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 123

Driving systems 123
Setting a speed Setting the specified minimum dis-

tance for Distronic
X Press the cruise control lever to the pres-
sure point, up : for a higher speed or You can set the specified minimum distance
down A for a lower speed. for Distronic by varying the time span
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until between one and two seconds. This time span
the desired speed is reached. determines the distance that Distronic should
maintain from the vehicle in front, depending
X Release the cruise control lever.
on the road speed. You can see this distance
Controls
The new speed is stored. Distronic is acti-
in the multi-function display (Y page 124).
vated and adjusts the vehicle's speed to
the new speed stored.
Making adjustments in 1 km/h incre-

ments
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
down A for a lower speed.
The last speed stored is increased or
reduced.
Adjustment in 10 km/h increments X To increase: turn thumbwheel ; towards

=.
Distronic then maintains a greater distance
beyond the pressure point, up : for a
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
higher speed or down A for a lower speed. front.
The last speed stored is increased or
X To decrease: turn thumbwheel ;
reduced.
towards :.
Distronic then maintains a shorter distance
Storing the current speed or call up the between your vehicle and the vehicle in
last stored speed front.
G Risk of accident i Make sure that you maintain the mini-
Only select a stored speed if you know what mum distance to the vehicle in front
that speed is and whether it is suitable for the required by law. Adjust the distance to the
current situation. Otherwise, sudden acceler- vehicle in front if necessary.
ation or braking could endanger you or others.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?.
pedal.
Distronic is activated and accepts the cur-
rent speed if it is activated for the first time,
or adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 124

124 Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer Display when Distronic is activated

When Distronic is activated, you will see the
following in the multi-function display:
Controls
: Distronic activated
; Stored speed
When Distronic is activated, one or two seg-
When activating Distronic and when setting
ments in the set speed range light up.
the speed, stored speed ; appears for
i For design reasons, the speed displayed around five seconds.
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for Distronic. Deactivating Distronic
If Distronic detects a vehicle in front, seg-
ments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
Distronic displays in the multi-function

display
Distronic menu (Y page 99).
Display when Distronic is deactivated

When Distronic is deactivated, you will see
the following in the multi-function display: There are several ways to deactivate Dis-
tronic:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
or
: Vehicle in front, if detected X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
; Distance indicator, displaying current dis- direction of arrow =.
tance to the vehicle in front Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indi-
= Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cator lamp ; in the cruise control lever
cle in front, adjustable lights up.
? Own vehicle i The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 125

Driving systems 125
i Distronic is not deactivated if you depress Vehicles travelling on a different line

the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate
briefly to overtake, Distronic adjusts the
vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking.
Distronic is automatically deactivated if:
Ryou depress the parking brake
Controls
Ryou are driving slower than 25 km/h and
there is no vehicle in front, or the vehicle in
front is no longer detected
RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®
Distronic may not detect vehicles travelling
Ryou shift the automatic transmission to N, on a different line. The distance to the vehicle
P or R in front will be too short.
If Distronic is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC Other vehicles changing lane
Off message in the multi-function display for
approximately five seconds.
Tips for driving with Distronic

The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
brake if necessary. Distronic is then deacti-
vated.
Cornering, entering and exiting a bend
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
cutting in. The distance to this vehicle will be
too short.
Narrow vehicles
The ability of Distronic to detect vehicles

when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may
brake unexpectedly or too late.
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle in

front on the edge of the carriageway, because
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 126

126 Driving systems
of its narrow width. The distance to the vehi- effect of the engine, which relieves the load
cle in front will be too short. on the brake system and prevents the brakes
from overheating and wearing too quickly. If
Obstructions and stationary vehicles you need additional braking, depress the
brake pedal repeatedly rather than continu-
ously.
G Risk of accident
Never depress the brake pedal continuously
Controls
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause

the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
pedal pressure. This causes the brake system
to overheat, increases the braking distance
and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
Distronic does not brake for obstructions or G Risk of accident

stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detec- Do not change down for additional engine
ted vehicle turns a corner and there is an braking on a slippery road surface. This could
obstacle or stationary vehicle ahead of it, Dis- cause the drive wheels to lose their grip and
tronic will not brake for these. the vehicle could skid.
Crossing vehicles You can set a variable or permanent limit

speed:
Rvariable for speed limits, e.g. in built-up
areas
Rpermanent for long-term speed restric-
tions, e.g. for driving on winter tyres
(Y page 128)
G Risk of accident
Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist
driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's
speed and for braking in good time.
Distronic may detect vehicles that are cross-
ing your lane by mistake. Activating Distronic i The speed indicated in the speedometer
at, for example, a traffic light with crossing may differ slightly from the limit speed
traffic, could cause your vehicle to pull away stored.
at the wrong time.
Variable Speedtronic
Speedtronic With the cruise control lever, you can operate
cruise control, Distronic* and variable Speed-
Speedtronic brakes automatically so that you
tronic.
do not exceed the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise control
vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must lever indicates which system you have selec-
select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By ted:
doing so, you will make use of the braking RLIM indicator lamp off:
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 127

Driving systems 127
Cruise control or Distronic* is selected. the stored limit speed allows. You could, oth-
RLIM indicator lamp lit: erwise, cause an accident.
Variable Speedtronic is selected. You can only exceed the limit speed stored if
you deactivate variable Speedtronic:
You can use the cruise control lever to limit
Rusing the cruise control lever
the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
the engine is running. Rby depressing the accelerator pedal
beyond the pressure point (kickdown)
Controls
It is not possible to deactivate variable Speed-
tronic by braking.
G Risk of injury
Variable Speedtronic brakes automatically in
order to avoid exceeding the set speed. As it
does so, the brake pedal is depressed. Do not
place your foot under the brake pedal as it
could become trapped.
: To store the current speed or a higher
speed Storing the current speed
; LIM indicator lamp You can use the cruise control lever to limit
= To store the current speed or to call up the speed to any speed above 30 km/h while
the last stored speed the engine is running.
? To store the current speed or a lower X Briefly press the cruise control lever
speed up : or down ? to the pressure point.
A To switch between cruise control or Dis- The current speed is stored and shown in
tronic* and variable Speedtronic the multi-function display.
B To deactivate variable Speedtronic The LIM indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
Selecting variable Speedtronic
Storing the current speed or calling up
X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on.
the last stored speed
If it is on, variable Speedtronic is already
selected. G Risk of accident
If it is not, press the cruise control lever in Only select a stored speed if you know what
the direction of arrow A. that speed is and whether it is suitable for the
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control current driving and traffic situation. Other-
lever lights up. Variable Speedtronic is wise, sudden braking could endanger you or
selected. others.
G Risk of accident X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new you =.
driver of the limit speed stored.
Only use Speedtronic when you do not have
to accelerate suddenly to a speed higher than
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 128

128 Driving systems
Making adjustments in 1 km/h incre- G Risk of accident

ments It is not possible to deactivate variable Speed-
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the tronic by braking.
down ? for a lower speed. i The last speed stored is cleared when you
or switch off the engine.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed to the
Permanent Speedtronic
Controls
pressure point until the desired speed is

set. Press the cruise control lever, up : i Permanent Speedtronic is only available
for a higher speed or down ? for a lower in certain countries.
speed.
You can use the on-board computer to limit
the speed permanently to a value between
Adjustment in 10 km/h increments 160 km/h (e.g. for driving with winter tyres)
X Briefly press the cruise control lever and the maximum speed.
beyond the pressure point, up : for a Just before the stored speed is reached, it
higher speed or down ? for a lower speed. appears in the multi-function display.
or Permanent Speedtronic remains active, even
if variable Speedtronic is deactivated.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
beyond the pressure point until the desired You cannot exceed the stored limit speed,
speed is set. Press the cruise control lever, even if you depress the accelerator pedal
up : for a higher speed or down ? for a beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
lower speed. Setting permanent Speedtronic
Deactivating variable Speedtronic Settings menu (Y page 103).
There are several ways to deactivate variable X Press the & button to call up the selec-
Speedtronic: tion of submenus.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- X Press the W or X button to select the
wards B. Vehicle submenu.
The LIM indicator lamp in the instrument X Press the & button to select Speed
cluster goes out. limit (winter tyres).
or
X Briefly press the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow A.
LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise control
lever goes out. Variable Speedtronic is
deactivated.
Cruise control or Distronic* is selected.
Variable Speedtronic is deactivated automat- X Press the W or X button to select the
ically when you depress the accelerator pedal desired setting.
beyond the pressure point (kickdown), but The following settings can be selected:
only if your current speed does not differ by ROff
more than 20 km/h from the stored speed.
You will hear a warning tone if this is the case.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 129

Driving systems 129
Permanent Speedtronic is deactivated. Level control

RA limit speed between 240 km/h and The level control adapts the vehicle level
160 km/h in increments of 10 km/h. automatically to the current operating and
driving situation. This results in reduced fuel
consumption and improved handling.
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) When you are driving in ADS COMF or AUTO
ADS adapts the damping characteristics to ADS (Y page 129), the vehicle is lowered to
Controls
the current operating and driving situation. the high-speed level as the speed increases.
As the vehicle decelerates, the vehicle is
How this is adjusted depends on:
raised back up to highway level.
Ryour driving style In ADS SPORT (Y page 129), the vehicle skips
Rthe road surface conditions highway level and is lowered directly to high-
Rthe
speed level.
ADS setting
Make changes to the vehicle level while the
Rthe vehicle level setting vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle
Your selection remains stored even if you to adjust to the new level as quickly as pos-
remove the key from the ignition lock. sible.
The vehicle level may change visibly when you
park the vehicle and the outside temperature
changes. When the temperature drops, the
vehicle level is lower; with an increase in tem-
perature, the vehicle level rises.
When you unlock the vehicle or open a door,
the vehicle begins to balance the load dis-
crepancies while still parked. However, for
significant level changes, e.g. after the vehi-
cle has been stationary for a long period, the
engine must be on. For safety reasons, the
You can choose between the following ADS vehicle is only lowered when the doors are
settings: closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is
RAUTO for normal driving situations; indica- opened and continues when the door has
tor lamps ; and = are off. been closed.
RSPORT for sporty driving; indicator G Risk of injury
lamp ; is on. In comparison to AUTO or Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
COMF, the vehicle is 15 mm lower. wheel arch or the underbody when you begin
RCOMF
a level change. You could otherwise trap your-
for a more comfortable ride; indica-
self or others.
tor lamp = is on.
X Start the engine. G Risk of accident
X Press button : repeatedly until the Always select as low a vehicle level as possi-
desired setting is selected. ble. If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle
centre of gravity shifts upwards. This increa-
ses the risk of the vehicle tipping over.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 130

130 Driving systems
Adapt your driving style to suit the vehicle Off-road levels

level. ESP® cannot reduce the risk of an acci-
G Risk of accident
dent if you drive too fast. ESP® cannot over-
Off-road level 3 is not permitted for use on
ride the laws of physics.
public roads. Off-road level 3 gives your vehi-
cle a very high centre of gravity. This increa-
! When driving on extremely rough terrain,
ses the risk of the vehicle tipping over.
select a high vehicle level in good time.
ROnly select off-road level 3 for driving off-
Make sure there is always sufficient ground
Controls
clearance to prevent damage to the vehi- road in particularly rough terrain.

cle. RAdjust your driving style to the altered han-
You will find information about driving off- dling characteristics.

road in the "Operation" section RDo not drive faster than 20 km/h.
(Y page 188). RAvoid sudden major steering movements.
RTake account of the altered handling char-
Basic settings
acteristics.
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or
lowered depends on the basic setting selec- If you are driving too fast in off-road level 3,
ted. the Bring speed below 20 km/h message
Select: appears in the multi-function display. You
additionally hear a warning tone. The vehicle
ROff-roadlevel 3 for freeing the vehicle in is lowered.
impassable terrain at low speeds only
ROff-road
i You cannot clear these messages.
level 2 for driving on normal off-
road terrain Only select an off-road level when this is
ROff-road
appropriate for the road conditions. Other-
level 1 for driving on easily nego-
wise, fuel consumption increases and han-
tiable off-road terrain
dling performance may be affected.
RHighway/high-speed level for normal roads
Your selection remains stored even if you
The individual vehicle levels are: remove the key from the ignition lock.
ROff-road level 3: 90 mm above highway
level
level
level
RHighway level: +/- 0 mm
RHigh-speed level: 15 mm below highway
level
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 131

Driving systems 131
X Start the engine. If you have not previously selected the off-
X Turn selector wheel : clockwise. road menu (Y page 102) in the on-board com-
The vehicle is raised. puter, the message disappears after about
five seconds.
or
X Turn selector wheel ; anti-clockwise. The 20 km/h max. message draws your atten-
tion to the maximum speed permitted for off-
The vehicle is lowered.
road level 3.
Indicator lamps = for the desired off-road
While the adjustment from off-road level 2 to
Controls
level flash:
off-road level 3 is taking place, you will see a
ROff-road level 1: the lower indicator lamp message such as the following in the multi-
flashes function display:
ROff-road level 2: the lower and centre indi-
cator lamps flash
ROff-road level 3: all three indicator lamps
flash
The vehicle is being adjusted to the off-road
level selected. As soon as an off-road level is
reached, the corresponding indicator lamp
Once off-road level 3 has been reached, you
stops flashing and lights up constantly.
will see a message in the multi-function dis-
While the adjustment is taking place, a mes- play, for example:
sage appears in the multi-function display,
e.g.:
If you drive above 20 km/h in off-road level

3, you will see the following message in the
The vehicle rises from highway level to off- multi-function display:
road level 1.
If you press the W or X button on the
multi-function steering wheel, the messages
will disappear.
play, for example:
Off-road level 3 is cancelled.
If you then increase the speed again, the mes-
sage remains in the multi-function display.
The newly set level is not displayed until the
vehicle has been set to a level suitable for the
current speed.
Lower and centre indicator lamps = are on.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 132

132 Driving systems
If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will If you are driving above 115 km/h or drive
see a message such as the following in the between 100 km/h and 115 km/h for longer
display while the vehicle is being lowered: than 20 seconds, off-road level 1 will be can-
celled. The vehicle is lowered to highway
level.
You will see a message in the multi-function
display, for example:
Controls
The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2.

play, for example:
Depending on the ADS basic setting
(Y page 129), the vehicle is lowered to high-
speed level at high speeds. The vehicle auto-
matically selects highway level when you are
driving at speeds below 40 km/h again or if
you drive at between 40 km/h and 70 km/h
for around 20 seconds.
If you select an off-road level when driving at
too high a speed, the Level selection Highway/high-speed level
not permitted message appears in the ! Make sure there is enough ground clear-
multi-function display. ance when the vehicle is being lowered. It
You can select the following: could otherwise hit the ground, damaging
ROff-roadlevel 1 at speeds up to the underbody.
100 km/h
ROff-road level 2 at speeds up to 70 km/h
ROff-road level 3 at speeds up to 20 km/h
If you are driving above 90 km/h or drive
between 70 km/h and 90 km/h for longer
than 20 seconds, off-road level 2 will be can-
celled. The vehicle is lowered to off-road
level 1.
You will see a message in the multi-function
display, for example:
: To raise the level
; To lower the level
= Indicator lamps
X Start the engine.

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 133

Driving systems 133
If one or more indicator lamps = are on: PARKTRONIC*

X Turn the selector wheel anti-clockwise ;
G Risk of accident
until all indicator lamps = that are lit start
PARKTRONIC is only an aid and may not
to flash.
detect all obstacles. It is not a substitute for
The vehicle is lowered to highway level. As
attentive driving.
soon as the next lowest level is reached,
the indicator lamp stops flashing and goes You are always responsible for safety and
out. must continue to pay attention to your imme-
Controls
diate surroundings when parking and
While the adjustment is taking place, a mes-
manoeuvring. You could otherwise endanger
sage appears in the multi-function display,
e.g.:
G Risk of injury
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
could be injured.
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid

using ultrasound. It indicates visually and
If you press the W or X button on the audibly the distance between your vehicle
multi-function steering wheel, the messages and an object.
will disappear. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
Once highway level has been reached, all indi- you:
cator lamps = go out. You will see a message Rswitch on the ignition
in the multi-function display, for example: Rrelease the parking brake
Rshift the automatic transmission to D, R or
N
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
18 km/h. It is reactivated at lower speeds.
PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
If you have not previously selected the off- and four sensors in the rear bumper.
road menu (Y page 102) in the on-board com-
puter, the message disappears after about
five seconds.
The vehicle automatically selects highway
level if you are driving at a speed above
115 km/h or if you drive at between
100 km/h and 115 km/h for around 20 sec-
onds. Depending on the ADS basic setting
(Y page 129), the vehicle is lowered to high-
speed level at high speeds.
: Example: sensors in the front bumper,
left-hand side
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 134

134 Driving systems
Range of the sensors vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or

the objects.
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and
slush; otherwise, they may not function cor- Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking car wash, a lorry's compressed-air brakes
care not to scratch or damage them or a pneumatic drill could cause PARK-
(Y page 203). TRONIC to malfunction.
Minimum distance
Controls
Centre Approximately 20 cm
Corners Approximately 15 cm
If there is an obstacle within this range, all

warning displays light up and a tone sounds.
If the distance falls below the minimum clear-
ance, it may no longer be shown.
Side view Warning displays

The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located
on the dashboard above the centre air vents.
The warning display for the rear area is in the
roof lamp in the rear compartment.
Top view
Front sensors
Centre Approximately 100 cm
Corners Approximately 60 cm
Warning display for front area
Rear sensors
: Left-hand side of the vehicle
Centre Approximately 120 cm ; Right-hand side of the vehicle
Corners Approximately 80 cm = Indicator segments
The warning display for each side of the vehi-
cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-
! When parking, pay particular attention to ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow
objects above or below the sensors, such indicator segments = light up.
as flower pots or trailer towbars. PARK-
TRONIC does not detect such objects when
they are in the immediate vicinity of the
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 135

Driving systems 135
The automatic transmission position deter- Trailer towing*

mines which warning display is active when
the engine is running: PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area
when you establish an electrical connection
Automatic trans- Warning display between your vehicle and a trailer.
mission position
! Remove the detachable trailer coupling if
D Front area activated it is no longer required. PARKTRONIC
measures the minimum detection range to
R or N Rear and front areas
Controls
an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball
activated coupling.
P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle

Reversing camera*
approaches an obstacle, depending on the The reversing camera is an optical aid. It
vehicle's distance to the obstacle. shows the area behind your vehicle in the
From the: COMAND APS display.
Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an G Risk of injury
intermittent warning tone for approx- Make sure that no persons or animals are in
imately two seconds. the manoeuvring range. Otherwise, they
Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a could be injured.
warning tone for approximately two sec-
The reversing camera is located in the handle
onds. You have reached the minimum dis-
strip of the tailgate.
tance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
: Reversing camera
View through the camera

: To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
The area behind the vehicle is displayed in a
; Indicator lamp
mirrored fashion, as in the rear-view mirror.
If indicator lamp ; is on, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated. G Risk of accident
The reversing camera is only an aid and may
display obstacles in a distorted or incorrect
manner, or may not even display them at all.
The reversing camera does not relieve you of
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 136

136 Air conditioning
the responsibility to pay attention. The cam- Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light (the dis-
era cannot show objects: play may flicker)
Rvery near to the rear bumper Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
Rbelow the rear bumper e.g. when driving into a heated garage in
winter
Rthat are located above the tailgate handle
recess Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
You are always responsible for safety and Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
Controls
must continue to pay attention to your imme- event have the camera position and setting
diate surroundings when parking and checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
manoeuvring. This applies to the areas Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
behind, in front of and next to the vehicle. You a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this
could otherwise endanger yourself and oth- purpose.
ers. Do not use the reversing camera in these
types of situation. You could, otherwise,
G Risk of accident injure others or damage objects and your
Under the following circumstances, the vehicle while you are parking.
reversing camera will not function, or function
in a limited manner:
Activating the reversing camera
Rif the tailgate is open
Rin heavy rain, snow or fog
the ignition lock.
Rat night or in very dark places X Engage reverse gear.
Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND APS display.
Air conditioning
Overview of air-conditioning systems
The vehicle is equipped with one of the following air-conditioning systems:
Thermatic 2-zone automatic climate control
combines an automatic heating and ventila-
tion system with a cooling system. You can
control the temperature separately for the
driver's and front-passenger sides.
Front control unit

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 137

Air conditioning 137
Thermotronic multi-zone luxury automatic climate control*

Thermotronic multi-zone luxury automatic
climate control combines an automatic heat-
ing and ventilation system with a cooling sys-
tem. The temperature and air distribution
can be adjusted separately for the driver's
and front-passenger side as well as for the
Controls
rear compartment. You can control the air-
Front control unit flow separately for the front and rear com-
partments.
Rear control panel*
General notes i The integrated filter can filter out most

particles of dust and completely filters out
Thermatic 2-zone automatic climate control/ pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
Thermotronic luxury multi-zone automatic cli- of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
mate control* controls the temperature and this reason, you should always observe the
the humidity of the vehicle interior and filters interval for replacing the filter, which is
out undesirable substances from the air. specified in the Service Booklet. As it
Thermatic 2-zone automatic climate control/ depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
Thermotronic luxury multi-zone automatic cli- heavy air pollution, the interval may be
mate control* is only operational when the shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
engine is running.25 Optimum operation is
only achieved when you drive with the side G Risk of accident
windows and sliding/tilting sunroof* closed. Observe the recommended settings on the
following pages. Otherwise, the windows
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period could mist up. This may prevent you from
during warm weather, e.g. using the con- observing the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
venience opening feature (Y page 87). This ing an accident.
will speed up the cooling process and the
desired vehicle interior temperature will be
reached more quickly.
25 The "residual heat" function can only be switched on/off when the ignition is switched off.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 138

Overview of air-conditioning system functions

Controls
Function Function
: Sets the temperature, left J Activates/deactivates air-recircu-
lation mode
; Sets the air-conditioning system to
automatic K Interior temperature sensor
= Demists the windscreen L Switches the air conditioning on/
off
? Increases the airflow
A Directs the airflow through the
i Instructions and recommendations for
demister vents
optimum air conditioning:
B Switches cooling with air dehumid- Ractivate the air conditioning using
ification on/off the Ã and Á buttons. The indica-
Switches the residual heat function tor lamps in the Ã and Á buttons
on/off come on.
Rset the temperature to 22 †.
C Sets the temperature, right
Ronly use the "demisting" function briefly,
D Switches the rear-compartment air until the windscreen is clear again.
conditioning on/off
Ronly use the "air-recirculation" mode
E Directs the airflow through the briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant out-
centre and side air vents side odours or when in a tunnel. Other-
F Directs the airflow to the footwells wise, the windows could mist up due to
and side air vents a lack of fresh air.
Ruse the "residual heat" function if you
G Displays the airflow level want to heat or ventilate the vehicle inte-
H Reduces the airflow rior when the ignition is switched off. The
"residual heat" function can only be acti-
I Switches the rear window heating vated or deactivated with the ignition
on/off switched off.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 139

Thermotronic luxury multi-zone automatic climate control*
Controls
Function Function
Front control unit G Directs the airflow to the footwells
and side air vents, right
: Sets the temperature, left
H Directs the airflow through the
; Sets the air-conditioning system to centre and side air vents, right
automatic
I Switches cooling with air dehumid-
= Directs the airflow through the ification on/off
demister vents, left
Switches the residual heat function
? Demists the windscreen on/off
A Increases the airflow J Display
B Switches the rear window heating K Reduces the airflow
on/off
L Activates/deactivates air-recircu-
C Directs the airflow through the lation mode
demister vents, right
M Directs the airflow through the
D Operates the rear-compartment air centre and side air vents, left
conditioning via the rear control
panel N Directs the airflow to the footwells
and side air vents, left
E Sets the temperature, right
O Interior temperature sensor
F Switches the air conditioning on/
off P Switches the mono function on/off
Rear control panel*
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 140

Function Switching the air conditioning on/off

Q Increases the airflow i When the air conditioning is switched off,
the air supply and air circulation are also
R Sets the temperature switched off. Only select this setting briefly,
S Controls the rear-compartment air otherwise the windows may mist up.
conditioning automatically i Activate the air conditioning primarily
T Directs the airflow through the rear using the Ã button (Y page 141).
Controls
air vents
Activating and deactivating the front-
U Directs the airflow through the foot-
compartment air conditioning via the
well vents
front control unit
V Switches the rear-compartment air X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
conditioning on/off lock.
W Reduces the airflow X To activate: press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
i Instructions and recommendations for automatic mode.
optimum air conditioning:
or
Ractivate the air conditioning using X Press the ^ button.
the Ã and Á buttons. The indica- The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
tor lamps in the Ã and Á buttons out. The previously selected settings come
come on. into effect again.
Rset the temperature to 22 †. X To switch off: press the ^ button.
Ronly use the "demisting" function briefly, The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
until the windscreen is clear again. up.
Ronly use the "air-recirculation" mode
briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant out- Activating/deactivating the rear-com-
side odours or when in a tunnel. Other- partment air conditioning via the front
wise, the windows could mist up due to control unit (Thermatic 2-zone auto-
a lack of fresh air. matic climate control)
Ruse the "residual heat" function if you X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
want to heat or ventilate the vehicle inte- lock.
rior when the ignition is switched off. The X To activate/deactivate: press the ^
"residual heat" function can only be acti- button (Y page 138).
vated or deactivated with the ignition The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
switched off. up or goes out.
Ruse the "MONO" function if you want to
adopt the temperature, air distribution
and airflow settings from the driver's side
for all air-conditioning zones. The indica-
tor lamp in the º button comes on.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 141

Activating/deactivating the rear-com- dehumidified according to the temperature

partment air conditioning via the front selected.
control unit* (Thermotronic multi-zone
G Risk of accident
luxury automatic climate control*)
If you switch off the "Cooling with air dehu-
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition midification" function, the air inside the vehi-
lock. cle will not be cooled (in warm weather) or
X To switch on: press the Y button dehumidified. The windows could mist up
more quickly. This may prevent you from
Controls
(Y page 139).
ON and MODE are shown in the Thermotronic observing the traffic conditions, thereby caus-
multi-zone luxury automatic climate con- ing an accident.
trol* display behind the Y symbol. The Condensation may drip from the underside of
MODE display goes out after three seconds. the vehicle when Thermatic is in cooling
The display switches back to the standard mode.
display.
X To activate: press the Á button.
X To deactivate: press the Y button
The indicator lamp in the Á button
(Y page 139). comes on.
MODE is shown in the display behind the
X To switch off: press the Á button.
Y symbol.
The indicator lamp in the Á button goes
X Press the ^ button (Y page 139).
out. The cooling with air dehumidification
OFF is shown in the display behind the function has a delayed switch-off feature.
Y symbol.
Activating/deactivating the rear-com- Controlling the air conditioning auto-

partment air conditioning via the rear matically
control unit* (Thermotronic multi-zone
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
luxury automatic climate control*)
maintained automatically at a constant level.
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition The system automatically regulates the tem-
lock. perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
X Activate Thermotronic multi-zone luxury the air distribution.
automatic climate control*. The automatic air conditioning will achieve
X To activate: press the Ã button. optimal operation if "cooling with air dehu-
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights midification" is also activated. If necessary,
up. cooling with air dehumidification can be deac-
tivated.
X To switch off: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
Controlling the front-compartment air
up. conditioning via the front control unit
Switching cooling with air dehumidi- lock.
fication on/off X Set the desired temperature.
X To switch on: press the Ã button.
The "cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is only available when the engine is run- The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights
ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are activated.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 142

X To deactivate: press the K or I Setting the temperature

button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes Thermatic 2-zone automatic climate
out. Automatic airflow is deactivated and control
the airflow is controlled according to the Different temperatures can be set for the
level set. Automatic air distribution driver's and front-passenger sides.
remains activated.
or lock.
Controls
X Press the Z, M, ¯, \, P, X To increase/reduce: turn controls : and

c or O button. C clockwise or anti-clockwise
The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes (Y page 138). Only change the temperature
out. Automatic air distribution is deactiva- setting in small increments. Start at 22 †.
ted. Air distribution is controlled according
to the position set. Automatic airflow
remains activated. Thermotronic multi-zone luxury auto-
matic climate control*
Controlling the rear-compartment air
conditioning automatically via the rear
control unit*
lock.
X Activate Thermotronic luxury multi-zone
automatic climate control*.
X Set the desired temperature.
X To switch on: press the Ã button.
The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights Climate zones of Thermotronic multi-zone luxury
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow automatic climate control*
are activated.
You can select different temperature settings
X To deactivate: press the K or I
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as
button. well as for the rear compartment.
Automatic airflow is deactivated and the
X To increase/reduce the front-compart-
airflow is controlled according to the level
set. Automatic air distribution remains acti- ment temperature using the front con-
vated. trol unit: turn the key in the ignition lock
to position 2.
or
X Turn controls : and E clockwise or anti-
X Press one of the M or O buttons.
clockwise (Y page 139). Only change the
Automatic air distribution is deactivated.
temperature setting in small increments.
Air distribution is controlled according to
Start at 22 †.
the position set. Automatic airflow remains
activated. X To increase/reduce the rear-compart-
ment temperature using the front con-
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 143

trol unit: turn the key in the ignition lock i For virtually draught-free ventilation,
to position 2. adjust the sliders of the air vents to the
X Press the Y button. centre position.
The display message shown in the display
changes to rear-compartment air condi- Setting the centre air vents
tioning.
X Turn control E clockwise or anti-clockwise
(Y page 139). Only change the temperature
Controls
setting in small increments. Start at 22 †.
i Press the Y button to return to the
standard display.
i The rear-compartment display returns to

the standard display automatically after
three seconds.
X To increase/reduce the rear-compart- : Centre air vent, left
ment temperature using the rear con- ; Centre air vent, right
trol unit*: turn the key in the ignition lock = Control for right-hand centre air vent
to position 2. ? Control for left-hand centre air vent
X Turn control R clockwise or anti-clockwise
(Y page 139). Only change the temperature
X To open/close: turn controls = and ? to
setting in small increments. Start at 22 †. the right or left.
Setting the side air vents

Adjusting the air vents
G Risk of injury
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could cause burns or frostbite to
bare skin in the immediate vicinity of the
vents. Keep bare skin away from these air
outlets. If necessary, direct the airflow away
to a different area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes: X To open/close: turn control = to the right
Rkeep the air inlet grille on the bonnet free or to the left.
of blockage, such as ice, snow or leaves. i Demister vent : is never completely
Rnever cover the vents or air inlet and outlet shut, even if side air vent ; is shut.
grilles in the vehicle interior.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 144

Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the centre vents in the rear
compartment
Controls
: Rear-compartment air vent, left

; Rear-compartment air vent, right Centre vents in the rear compartment (third row of
seats*)
= Rear-compartment control unit* for
: Rear-compartment air vent, left
Thermotronic multi-zone luxury automatic
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
climate control*
= Control for right-hand rear-compartment
When the air conditioning control panel is
air vent
switched on/off, the air supply that travels
? Control for left-hand rear-compartment
through the rear-compartment air vents is
also switched on/off. air vent
X To open/close: turn control = or ? up
Setting the rear-compartment side air or down.
vents
Setting the air distribution

Thermotronic multi-zone luxury automatic cli-
mate control*: you can set the air distribution
individually for the driver's and front-
passenger sides.
Front control unit:
Z directs the airflow through the demis-
ter vents
M directs the airflow through the demis-
: Rear-compartment side air vent
ter vents
; Rear-compartment side air vent ¯ directs the airflow through the demis-
= Control for rear-compartment side air ter vents
vent c directs the airflow through the footwell
? Control for rear-compartment side air and side air vents
vent O directs the airflow through the footwell
X To open/close: turn control = or ? up and side air vents
or down.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 145

\ directs the airflow through the centre Demisting the windscreen

and side air vents
P directs the airflow through the centre i You should only select the "demisting"
and side air vents function until the windscreen is clear again.
Rear control unit*: X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition

lock.
M directs the airflow through the rear-
X To activate: press the ¦ button.
compartment air vents
The indicator lamp in the ¦ button lights
Controls
O directs the airflow through the footwell
up.
air vents
The system automatically switches to the
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition following functions:
lock.
Rcooling with air dehumidification on
X Press the Z, M, ¯, c, O,
\ or P button. Rhigh airflow26
Rhigh temperature26
Rair distribution to the windscreen and
Setting the airflow front side windows
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Rair-recirculation mode off
lock.
X To increase/reduce: press the K or X To switch off: press the ¦ button.
I button. The indicator lamp in the ¦ button goes
out. The previously selected settings come
Vehicles with Linguatronic*: when voice con-
into effect again. The cooling with air dehu-
trol is started the airflow is restricted to 50%.
midification function remains on. Air-recir-
After voice control is finished, the airflow is
culation mode remains deactivated.
adjusted back to the previous setting.
or
X Press the ^ button.
Switching the Mono function on/off or
Only Thermotronic luxury automatic climate X Press the Ã button.
control* features the "mono" function. or
You can use the "mono" function to adopt the X Turn the temperature control clockwise or
settings configured for temperature, air dis- anti-clockwise.
tribution and airflow on the driver's side for or
the front-passenger side and the rear com- X Press the K or I button.
partment.
X Press the º button.
The indicator lamp in the º button lights
up or goes out.
26 Depending on the outside temperature.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 146

Demisting the windows Activating/deactivating air-recircula-

tion mode
Windows misted up on the inside
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
X Activate the "cooling function with air dehu- unpleasant odours are entering the vehicle
midification" function. from outside. The air already inside the vehi-
X Activate automatic mode. cle will then be recirculated.
X If the windows continue to mist up, activate
G Risk of accident
the demisting function.
Controls
Only switch over to air-recirculation mode

i You should only select this setting until briefly at low outside temperatures. Other-
the windscreen is clear again. wise, the windows could mist up, thus impair-
ing visibility and endangering yourself and
Windows misted up on the outside others. This may prevent you from observing
the traffic conditions, thereby causing an
X Activate the windscreen wipers. accident.
X Press the P/\ or O/c air
distribution button. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
i You should only select this setting until
X To activate: press the d button.
the windscreen is clear again.
The indicator lamp in the d button lights
up.
Switching the rear window heating i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto-
on/off matically at high outside temperatures.
G Risk of accident When air-recirculation mode is activated
automatically, the indicator lamp in the
Make sure that all windows are clear of ice
d button is not lit.
and snow before starting a journey. This may
otherwise obstruct your view of the traffic Outside air is added after about 30
conditions, thereby causing an accident. minutes.
X To switch off: press the d button.
i The rear window heating has a high cur- The indicator lamp in the d button goes
rent draw. You should therefore switch it out.
off as soon as the window is clear, as it only
switches off automatically after several i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto-
minutes. matically:
Rafter approximately five minutes at out-
i If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
side temperatures below approximately
window heating may switch off.
5†
X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-
lock. ing with air dehumidification is deactiva-
X Press the ª button. ted
The indicator lamp in the ª button lights Rafter approximately 30 minutes at out-
up or goes out. side temperatures above approximately
5†
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 147

Convenience opening/closing engine has been switched off. The heating

time depends on the temperature that has
G Risk of injury been set.
between the side window and the door frame
i The blower will run at a low speed regard-
as the side windows are opened and closed. less of the airflow setting.
Do not place objects or lean against the side
i If you activate the "residual heat" function
windows when they are being opened or
at high temperatures, only the ventilation
Controls
closed. You or the objects could be drawn in
will be activated. The blower runs at
or become trapped between the side window
medium speed.
and the door frame as the window moves. If
there is a risk of entrapment, press the X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition
d button again. Press the button for stop- lock or remove it.
ping, opening or closing the side windows in X To activate: press the Á button.
the opposite direction as appropriate. The indicator lamp in the Á button
Make sure that nobody can become trapped comes on.
when you are opening or closing the sliding/
tilting sunroof*. If there is a risk of entrap-
X To switch off: press the Á button.
ment, press the d button again. Press the The indicator lamp in the Á button goes
button to stop, open or close the panorama out.
sliding/tilting sunroof* in the opposite direc- i The residual heat automatically switches
tion as appropriate. off after around 30 minutes or if:
Rthe ignition is switched on
X Convenience closing: press and hold
the d button until the side windows and Rthe battery voltage drops
the sliding/tilting sunroof* are closed.
The indicator lamp in the d button lights
up. Air-recirculation mode is activated. Auxiliary heating/ventilation*
X Convenience opening: press and hold the Notes on the auxiliary heating/ventila-
d button until the side windows and the tion system
sliding/tilting sunroof* have reached their
original position. G Risk of poisoning
The indicator lamp in the d button goes Exhaust fumes are produced when the auxili-
out. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated. ary heating is in operation. Inhaling these
exhaust fumes can be poisonous. You should
i If you open the side windows or the slid- therefore switch off the auxiliary heating in
ing/tilting sunroof* manually after closing confined spaces without an extraction sys-
with the convenience closing feature, they tem, e.g. a garage.
will remain in this position when opened
using the convenience opening feature. G Risk of fire
When operating the auxiliary heating, parts of
the vehicle may become very hot, and highly
Switching the residual heat on/off inflammable material such as fuels could be
It is possible to make use of the residual heat ignited. Operating the auxiliary heating is thus
of the engine to continue heating the station- prohibited at filling stations or when your vehi-
ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the cle is being refuelled. You must therefore
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 148

switch off the auxiliary heating at filling sta- Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-
tions. lation on/off using the button on the
centre console
i Switch the auxiliary heating on regularly
once a month for about ten minutes.
The auxiliary heating heats the air in the vehi-
cle interior to the set temperature without
using the heat of the running engine. The aux-
Controls
iliary heating is operated using the vehicle's

fuel. For this reason, the tank content must
be at least at reserve fuel level to ensure that
the auxiliary heating functions.
The auxiliary heating/ventilation automati-
cally adjusts to changes in temperature and
weather conditions. For this reason, the aux- The colours of the indicator lamps on the but-
iliary heating could switch from ventilation ton have the following meanings:
mode to heating mode or from heating mode Blue Auxiliary ventilation activated
to ventilation mode. Red Auxiliary heating activated
You cannot use the auxiliary ventilation to Yellow Departure time preselected
cool the vehicle interior to a temperature (Y page 107)
lower than the outside temperature.
Switching on auxiliary heating/ventila-
Before activating tion
If the key is in position 1 or 2:
lock. X Press and hold button : for at least two
X Set the temperature. seconds.

The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti-
ton : lights up.
vated even when the air conditioning is being
controlled manually. Optimum comfort can If the key is removed or in position 0:
be attained when the system is set to auto- X Briefly press button :.
matic mode. Set the temperature to 22 †. The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
The auxiliary heating/ventilation can be acti- ton : lights up.
vated or deactivated using the remote control
or the button on the centre console. Switching off auxiliary heating/ventila-
The on-board computer can be used to spec- tion
ify up to three departure times, one of which X Briefly press button :.
may be preselected (Y page 107). The red or blue indicator lamp in but-
ton : goes out.
Switching the auxiliary heating/venti-

lation on/off using the remote control
Your vehicle comes with one remote control.
You may use two additional remote controls
for your vehicle. For further information, con-
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 149

Sliding sunroof 149
sult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Switching off auxiliary heating/ventila-

Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. tion
The remote control has a maximum range of The auxiliary heating switches off automati-
approximately 300 metres. This range is cally after 50 minutes.
reduced by:
i This time limit can be altered. To do this,
Rsources of radio interference visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Rsolid objects between the remote control Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Controls
and the vehicle X Press the ^ button.
Rthe remote control being in an unfavoura- OFF is shown in the remote control display.
ble position in relation to the vehicle
Rtransmitting from an enclosed space Checking the status of the auxiliary heat-
ing/ventilation
i The optimum range can be achieved if you X Press the , or . button.
hold the remote control vertically, pointing The following messages can appear in the
upwards when you press one of the but- display:
tons.
Display Meaning
i A battery symbol appears in the display
when the batteries in the remote control The auxiliary heating/
are low. Replace the remote control bat- ventilation is deactiva-
teries (Y page 254). ted.
The auxiliary ventilation
is switched on. The num-
ber in the display shows
the remaining time (in
minutes) for the auxiliary
ventilation.
The auxiliary heating is
switched on. The number
in the display shows the
remaining time (in
minutes) for the auxiliary
Auxiliary heating remote control
heating.
: Display
; . To check the status
= ^ Auxiliary heating/ventilation off Sliding sunroof
? u Auxiliary heating/ventilation on
General notes
A , To check the status
G Risk of injury
Switching on auxiliary heating/ventila-
tion
when closing the sliding sunroof. If there is a
X Press the u button. risk of entrapment, release the switch and
ON is shown in the remote control display. push it briefly in any direction to stop the slid-
ing sunroof.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 150

150 Sliding sunroof
G Risk of injury Sliding/tilting sunroof*

Children could injure themselves if they oper-
ate the sliding sunroof.
the vehicle, even if you are only leaving it for
a short time.
Controls
G Risk of injury
The glass in the panorama sunroof could
break in an accident. If you are not wearing a
seat belt, there is a risk that you could be
thrown through the opening in the event of the Overhead control panel
vehicle overturning. Therefore, always wear a : To open
seat belt to reduce the risk of injuries. ; To close/lower
= To raise
! Only open the panorama sliding sunroof
if it is free of snow and ice. Otherwise, mal- X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
functions may occur. lock.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the X Pull or push the switch in the corresponding
sliding sunroof. The seals could otherwise direction.
be damaged.
i If you press the switch beyond the point
i When the sliding sunroof is open, apart of resistance, an automatic opening/clos-
from the normal airflow noises resonance ing process is started in the corresponding
noises may also occur. They are caused by direction. You can stop automatic opera-
minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle tion by pressing again.
interior. Change the position of the sliding The sun protection cover automatically opens
sunroof or open a side window slightly to along with the sliding/tilting sunroof. Once
reduce or eliminate these noises. you have closed the sliding/tilting sunroof,
you can close the cover by hand.
i Related topics:
Rconvenience opening from the out- Closing with increased force and with-
side (Y page 87) or from the inside out the anti-entrapment feature
(Y page 147) G Risk of injury
Rconvenience closing from the out- You could be severely or even fatally injured
side (Y page 87) or from the inside when closing the sliding/tilting sunroof with
(Y page 147) increased force or without the anti-entrap-
Rautomatic closing of the sliding sunroof ment feature. Make sure that nobody can
(PRE-SAFE*) (Y page 40) become trapped when closing the sliding/tilt-
ing sunroof.
If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during

closing:
X Immediately after it locks up, pull the
switch again to the pressure point in the
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 151

Loading and stowing 151
direction of arrow ; until the sliding/tilt- X Keep the switch pressed for an additional
ing sunroof is closed. second.
The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed with X Make sure that the sliding/tilting sunroof
more force. can be opened or closed fully again
If the sliding/tilting sunroof locks up during (Y page 150).
closing again: X If this is not the case, consult a qualified
specialist workshop.
X Immediately after it locks up, pull the
Controls
switch again to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; until the sliding/tilt-
ing sunroof is closed. Loading and stowing
The sliding/tilting sunroof is closed without Loading guidelines
the anti-entrapment feature.
G Risk of injury
Rain closing feature* Secure and position the load as described in
the loading guidelines.
The sliding/tilting sunroof closes automati- Otherwise, vehicle occupants could
cally: be injured by the load being thrown around in
Rif it starts to rain the event of sharp braking, a sudden change
Rafter 12 hours in direction or an accident.
The rear of the sliding/tilting sunroof is then You will find further information in the "Secur-
raised in order to ventilate the interior of the ing a load" section.
vehicle. Even if you follow all the loading guidelines,
the load will increase the risk of injury in the
i The sliding/tilting sunroof is opened event of an accident.
slightly again if it is obstructed while being
closed by the rain closing feature. The rain G Risk of poisoning
closing feature is then deactivated. Keep the tailgate closed when the engine is
The sliding/tilting sunroof does not close if: running. Otherwise, you could be poisoned by
Rit exhaust fumes entering the vehicle.
is raised at the rear
Rit is blocked The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-
Rno
cle are dependent on the distribution of the
rain is falling on the area of the wind-
load within the vehicle. For this reason, you
screen being monitored by the rain sensor
should observe the following notes when
(e.g. because the vehicle is under a bridge
transporting a load:
or in a carport)
Rnever exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle
Resetting loads for the vehicle (including occupants).
Reset the sliding/tilting sunroof if it does not Rposition heavy loads as far forwards and as
open smoothly, or if the battery has been dis- low down in the luggage compartment as
connected or has become discharged. possible.
X Switch the ignition off and then on again. Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
X The sliding/tilting sunroof is raised fully at edge of the seat backrests.
the rear. Ralways place the load against the rear or
front seat backrests. Make sure that the
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 152

152 Loading and stowing
seat backrests are securely locked into

place.
Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant load restraints. Pad sharp
edges for protection.
Controls
i Load restraints are available at any quali-

fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre.
The glove compartment can be locked and
unlocked using the emergency key element
(Y page 250).
Stowage compartments
X To open: pull handle : in the direction of
G Risk of injury the arrow and fold down cover ;.
The stowage compartments must be closed X To close: fold cover ; upwards until it
when items are stored in them. Luggage nets engages.
are not designed to secure heavy items of
luggage.
Stowage compartment in the centre
You or other vehicle occupants could be
console
injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Rchange direction suddenly

Rare involved in an accident
Sharp-edged and fragile objects must not be
placed in the luggage net.
Glove compartment
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
there is an AUX-IN connection installed in
the glove compartment, or a Media Inter- X To open: briefly press marking ;.
face*, which is a universal interface for X To close: push stowage compartment :
portable audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod
in the direction of the arrow until it
or USB device.
engages.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 153

Stowage compartment under the arm- Cup holder

rest
G Risk of injury
Keep the cup holder closed while the vehicle
is in motion. Otherwise, vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Controls
Only use the cup holders for containers of a
suitable size and which have lids. Otherwise,
X To open: pull handle : and fold the arm- the drinks could spill.
rest upwards. Cup holders should not be used for hot drinks.
Otherwise, you may scald yourself.
Stowage compartment in the rear
centre console Cup holder in the centre console
: Cup holder
X To open: press lightly on the top of the ; Brace with card holder
stowage compartment.
The stowage compartment moves out auto- i You can remove the cup holder to clean
matically. it. Clean the cup holder with clean, luke-
warm water only.
X To remove: place your fingers into the cen-
tral recesses of cup holder : and pull up
sharply.
X To fit: place the cup holder into the guides
and insert.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 154

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest Luggage net in the front-passenger
footwell
Controls
X Fold down rear seat armrest :.

: Luggage net
Cup holder in the side trim of the Luggage net behind the front seats
3rd row of seats*
: Luggage net
: Cup holder
Enlarging the luggage compartment

Luggage nets
The left-hand and right-hand rear seats can
G Risk of injury be folded down to increase the luggage com-
Only place lightweight objects in the luggage partment capacity.
net. Do not use it to transport heavy, sharp-
G Risk of injury
edged or fragile objects. The luggage net can-
not secure the objects sufficiently in the event Do not carry heavy or hard objects inside the
of an accident. vehicle or in the luggage compartment unless
they are secured.
Otherwise, you and other vehicle occupants
could be injured by objects being thrown
around the vehicle in the event of sharp brak-
ing, a sudden change in direction or an acci-
dent.
When using the luggage compartment
enlargement feature, you must always fully
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 155

fold down the respective backrests and

attach the safety net.
G Risk of poisoning
Always drive with the tailgate closed. Exhaust
fumes could otherwise enter the vehicle inte-
rior.
Controls
Folding the rear bench seat forwards
Do not fold the backrest onto the folded-down X Pull release lever ; on left or right back-
seat cushions. If the seat cushions are folded rest : in the direction of the arrow.
down, luggage can be thrown over the back- Corresponding seat backrest : is
rest into the passenger compartment during, released.
for instance, heavy braking, sudden changes
of direction or in the event of an accident. You ! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, exer-
could cause an accident or cause injury to cise care when folding it down. Make sure
yourself and others. that the head restraints are pushed all the
way in so that the backrests and seat cush-
ions are not damaged.
X Fold backrest : forwards until it engages
in the luggage compartment position.
! When the rear bench seat is folded for-

wards, the front seats cannot be moved to
their rearmost position, as otherwise, the
seats and the rear seat bench could be
damaged. X Guide seat belts ; under respective
clips :.
i If the driver's or front-passenger seat has
been adjusted for a tall person, it may be
necessary to move the seats forwards
slightly to fold the backrests forwards.
X Pull release loop : of seat cushion ;.
Seat cushion ; is released.
X Fold seat cushion ; upwards.
X Move the head restraints to the lowest
position (Y page 68).
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 156

Folding the rear bench seat back Observe the following points or guidelines
when securing loads:
Rsecure the load using the lashing eyelets.
Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure
a load, as these are only intended as an
anti-slip protection for light loads.
Rdo not route lashing materials across sharp
Controls
edges or corners.
Rpad sharp edges for protection.
2nd row of seats*

X Pull release handle = upwards. There is one lashing eyelet in the footwell
behind the driver’s seat and one in the foot-
X Fold backrest ; backwards until it
well behind the front-passenger seat.
engages, making sure not to trap the seat
belts while doing so.
X Fold seat cushion : backwards and push
until you hear it engage.
X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if
necessary (Y page 68).
G Risk of injury
Make sure that the seat backrest and the seat
cushion are correctly engaged in position.
: Lashing eyelets in the rear-compartment

Securing a load footwell
Lashing eyelets* Luggage compartment

There are four lashing eyelets in the luggage
G Risk of injury compartment.
Distribute the load on the lashing eyelets
evenly.
Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be
injured by objects being thrown around if you:
Rbrake sharply
Please observe the loading guidelines.
: Lashing eyelets
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 157

Securing hooks Rolling up the luggage compartment

cover
There are two securing hooks on each side of
the luggage compartment.
Controls
X Unhook luggage compartment cover :
: Securing hooks from its connections on the left and right.
Only secure lightweight luggage items (max- X Guide luggage compartment cover :
imum 4 kg) on the mounting hooks. slowly backwards as far as it will go.
Fitting/removing the luggage compart-

Luggage compartment cover* and ment cover
safety net*
Luggage compartment cover*
The luggage compartment cover is not a
restraint system. Secure the load under the
luggage compartment cover by suitable
means. Make sure that the luggage compart-
ment cover is engaged securely. If luggage is
not sufficiently secured, it can be thrown over
the backrest into the passenger compart-
ment, for instance during heavy braking, sud-
X To remove: roll up luggage compartment
den changes of direction or in the event of an cover ;.
accident. You could cause an accident or X Push the right-hand side section to the left
cause injury to yourself and others. until it engages.
X Remove luggage compartment cover ;.
The luggage compartment cover is located
X To fit: with the handle of the luggage com-
behind the rear bench seat backrest.
partment enlargement pointing to the rear
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that and button : facing upwards on the left-
you do not stack the load in the luggage hand side, insert luggage compartment
compartment higher than the lower edge of cover ; into the recess of the side trim.
the side windows. Do not place heavy X Guide luggage compartment cover ; in
objects on top of the luggage compartment
front of the recess on the right.
cover.
X Press button : and insert the right-hand
side section into the recess of the side trim.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 158

Safety net Preparing the safety net

X Open the two Velcro fasteners on the
G Risk of injury
safety net holder.
You must make sure that the safety net is
X Unroll and unfold the safety net.
correctly secured at the top and bottom.
The upper and lower guide rods must
Do not use a damaged safety net. engage audibly.
The safety net cannot restrain heavy loads.
For this reason, you should always secure the Attaching the safety net
Controls
load.
Otherwise, objects that have not been
secured sufficiently might be thrown around
if you brake suddenly, change direction sud-
denly or are involved in an accident, and could
cause you an injury.
You can use the safety net in two different

positions.
Guide rod inserted behind the B-pillar

X Insert guide rod ; into retainer : in the
direction of the arrow.
X Slide guide rod ; forwards into
retainer : in the direction of the arrow.
Tightening the safety net
RThe brackets behind the B-pillar : are

required for the luggage compartment
enlargement (Y page 154).
The corresponding lashing eyelets to
tighten the net are located in the footwell
of the rear bench seat (Y page 156).
RThe brackets behind the C-pillar ; are
required for the luggage compartment
behind the rear bench seat.
The corresponding lashing eyelets for ten- Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats
sioning the net are in the luggage compart-
ment (Y page 156) or on the backrests of
the folded-down 3rd row of seats*.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 159

X Insert belt hook : into lashing eyelet ;

in the direction of the arrow.
X Pull tensioning strap = by the loose end in
the direction of the arrow until the safety
net is tight.
X After driving a short distance, check the
tension of the safety net and retighten it if
necessary.
Controls
Releasing the safety net
: Loading rails
Inserting the mounting elements into

the loading rail
Seat belt reel holder behind the front seats

X Pull belt adjuster : upwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow to reduce the tension on
the tensioning strap.
X Unhook belt hook ; from lashing eyelet You can slide mounting element ; in loading
=. rail : to various detents and secure it. These
detents are marked and positioned at 5-cm
Detaching and storing the safety net intervals along loading rail :.
X Unhook guide rod ; from You can turn mounting element ; of loading
holder : (Y page 158). rail : to four positions:
X Press the red button on the upper and lower & To lock the mounting element
guide rods. = To release the lashing eyelet, the belt
X Fold the safety net and roll it up. reel or the telescopic rod
X Close the two Velcro fasteners on the ; To remove the mounting element
safety net holder. B To push the mounting element to the
next detent
EASY-PACK load-securing kit* X Turn mounting element ; to ;.

X Insert mounting element ; into loading
The EASY-PACK load-securing kit is supplied
rail :.
with accessories enabling the luggage com-
X Turn mounting element ; to & until
partment to be used in various ways. You can
keep the load-securing kit in the bag supplied you feel it clearly engage in loading rail :.
and store it together with the telescopic rod
under the luggage compartment floor.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 160

Inserting the lashing eyelet into the X Insert belt reel = into mounting ele-
mounting element ments ;.
you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail.
X Press locking button : on the belt reel and
pull the safety net out in the direction of the
arrow.
Controls
X Place the load between the securing net

and the luggage compartment side wall.
X Press locking button : on belt reel = with
one hand.
X With your other hand, slowly extend the net
G Risk of injury around the load until it is secure.

Spread the load evenly between the lashing
eyelets. Observe the loading guidelines. Telescopic rod
X Turn mounting element ; in the loading

rail to =.
X Insert lashing eyelet : into mounting ele-
ment ;.
you feel it clearly engage in the loading rail.
Belt reel
i The telescopic rod can be used to secure

the load against the rear seats to prevent it
from moving around.
X Insert one mounting element ; into each
loading rail.
X Turn mounting elements ; in the loading
rail to =.
X Insert telescopic rod : into mounting ele-
ments ;.
i The belt reel can be used to secure light X Turn mounting element ; to & until
loads against the side wall of the luggage you feel it clearly engage in loading rail.
compartment to prevent them from moving
around.
X Insert two mounting elements ; into a
loading rail.
X Turn mounting elements ; in the loading
rail to =.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 161

Features 161
Roof rack system* Cross bar
G Risk of accident and injury To make it easier to attach the cross bars,
there are marks on the roof rails. These indi-
An incorrectly secured roof rack, ski rack or
cate the best positions for fitting the cross
load could become detached from the vehi-
bars.
cle. These objects may be thrown around and
can injure you or others, or cause an accident.
Follow the roof rack/ski rack manufacturer's
Controls
installation instructions and special instruc-
tions for use.
The roof load raises the vehicle's centre of
gravity, thereby affecting vehicle handling.
You must always observe the maximum roof
load of 100 kg. Always adapt your driving style
to the prevailing road, traffic and weather
conditions and drive with particular care if the
roof is laden. : Front cross bar
; Rear cross bar
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
= Roof rail, left
only use roof rack systems which have
been tested and approved for Mercedes- ? Rear marks
Benz vehicles. This helps to prevent dam- A Front marks
age to the vehicle. B Roof rail, right
Position the load on the roof rack in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain dam- ! Note that fitting the crossbar increases
age even when it is in motion. the vehicle height by 50 mm compared to
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the data in the "Technical Data" section.
make sure that you can:
Rraise the sliding/tilting sunroof* fully Features
Ropen the tailgate fully
Sun visors
G Risk of accident
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered
while driving. Otherwise, you could be daz-
zled, impairing your view of traffic conditions.
As a result, you could cause an accident.
X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :.

Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 162

162 Features
X Vehicles with a sliding/tilting sun-

roof*: slide sun visor : horizontally as
desired.
X Vehicles with a sliding/tilting sun-
roof*: fold down additional sun visor* ;
to the windscreen.
Controls
Ashtray*
: Mirror light Ashtray in the cockpit

; Bracket
= Vanity mirror
? Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side X To open: briefly press marking =.

Ashtray : opens.
X To remove the insert: lift insert ; up and
out.
X To refit the insert: press insert ; into the
holder until it engages.
Ashtray in the rear compartment
Example shows vehicle with sliding/tilting sun-

roof*
X Fold down sun visor :.
X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =.
X Swing sun visor : to the side.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 163

Features 163
X To open: briefly press marking =. imum current draw of 55 A. Otherwise, you

Ashtray ; opens. will overload the fuses.
X To remove the insert: lift insert : up and X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in
out. the ignition lock.
X To refit the insert: replace insert : from
above. Socket in the cockpit
X Press insert : into the holder until it
! If accessories are connected, make sure
Controls
engages.
that a maximum current draw of 15 A is not
exceeded. Otherwise, you will overload the
fuse.
Cigarette lighter*
G Risk of injury and fire ! The socket is not suitable for operating
the electric air pump.
Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its knob.
Otherwise, you might burn yourself.
Make sure that children travelling in the vehi-
cle are not able to injure themselves on the
hot cigarette lighter or cause a fire with it.
X Press marking =.
Stowage compartment : opens.
X Remove cover from socket ;.
i On vehicles with the smoker's package*,

X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in you must remove the cigarette lighter in
the ignition lock. order to use the socket (Y page 163).
X Press marking =.
Ashtray : opens. Socket in the rear passenger compart-
X Press in cigarette lighter ;. ment
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati- ! If accessories are connected, make sure
cally when the heating element is red-hot. that a maximum current draw of 20 A is not
fuse.
12 V sockets
The sockets can be used for accessories with
a maximum power consumption of 180 watts.
! If you are using all sockets in the vehicle,
make sure that you do not exceed the max-
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 164

164 Features
matically cut. This ensures that there is suf-

ficient power to start the engine.
Mobile phone*
G Risk of accident
Observe the legal requirements of the country
Controls
in which you are currently driving regarding

operating mobile communications equipment
in a vehicle.
X Fold up the cover on socket :. If it is permitted by law to operate communi-
cations equipment while the vehicle is in
i You can also use the socket when the motion, you may only do so when the traffic
ignition is switched off. An emergency cut- situation allows. Otherwise, you could be dis-
out ensures that the on-board voltage does tracted from the traffic conditions, cause an
not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is accident and injure yourself and others.
too low, the power to the sockets is auto- Two-way radios and fax equipment used with-
matically cut. This ensures that there is suf- out low-reflection exterior aerials can inter-
ficient power to start the engine. fere with the vehicle's electronics and,
thereby, jeopardise the operating safety of
Socket in the luggage compartment the vehicle and your safety. Therefore, you
must only use this equipment if it is correctly
! If accessories are connected, make sure
connected to a separate, reflection-free, exte-
that a maximum current draw of 20 A is not
rior aerial.
fuse. G Risk of injury
The socket is located in the luggage compart- Excessive electromagnetic radiation may
ment on the left-hand side trim. cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior aerial takes into
account current scientific discussions relat-
ing to the possible health risk posed by elec-
tromagnetic fields.
To ensure optimum reception quality for

mobile phones in the vehicle, and to minimise
mutual influences between the vehicle elec-
tronics and mobile phones, Mercedes-Benz
recommends the use of an approved exterior
aerial. An exterior aerial conducts the elec-
tromagnetic fields generated by a wireless
X Fold up the cover on socket :. device to the exterior of the vehicle; the field
strength within the vehicle interior is lower
i You can also use the socket when the
than in a vehicle that does not have an exte-
ignition is switched off. An emergency cut-
rior aerial.
out ensures that the on-board voltage does
not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is i There are various mobile phone brackets
too low, the power to the sockets is auto- that may be fitted to your vehicle; in some
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 165

Features 165
cases, these are country-specific. You can HomeLink® and/or compatible products is
obtain these mobile phone brackets from a available from:
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Rany Mercedes-Benz Service Centre
Rthe HomeLink® hotline
The functions and services available when
(0) 08000 466 354 65 (free of charge) or
you use the phone depend on your mobile
+49 (0) 6838 907-277 (charges apply)
phone model and service provider.
Rthe Internet: www.homelink.com
Controls
Inserting the mobile phone
X Open the telephone compartment
(Y page 153).
X Place the mobile phone bracket into the
pre-installed fitting; see the separate
mobile phone bracket fitting instructions.
X Insert the mobile phone into the mobile
phone bracket; see the separate mobile
phone bracket fitting instructions.
If the mobile phone is inserted in the mobile
phone bracket, you can speak to the person
you are calling using the hands-free system. Remote control in the rear-view mirror
You can operate the telephone using the G Risk of accident
6 and ~ buttons on the multi-function
Only press the transmitter button on the inte-
steering wheel. You can operate other mobile grated remote control if there are no persons
phone functions via the on-board computer or objects present within the sweep of the
(Y page 111). garage door. Persons could otherwise be
When you take the key out of the ignition lock, injured as the door moves.
the mobile phone stays on but you can no
longer use the hands-free system. Programming the remote control
If you are making a call and you would like to
take the key out of the ignition lock, first i You will achieve the best results by insert-
remove the mobile phone from the bracket. ing new batteries in the garage door's
Otherwise, the call will be ended. remote control before programming it.
X Erase the memory of the integrated remote
control (Y page 166) before programming
Garage door opener* it for the first time.
The remote control integrated in the rear-view X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
mirror allows you to operate up to three dif- lock.
ferent door and gate systems. X Press and hold one of transmitter but-
i The garage door opener is only available tons ; to ? on the integrated remote
for certain countries. Observe the legal control.
requirements in all countries concerned. Indicator lamp : starts to flash after a
The HomeLink® garage door opener is short while. It flashes about once a second.
compatible with most European garage and i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately
gate opener drives. More information on the first time the transmitter button is pro-
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 166

166 Features
grammed. If this transmitter button has new transmitter". You can also call the hot-
already been programmed, indicator line mentioned above.
lamp : will only start flashing at a rate of
once a second after 20 seconds have Opening or closing the garage door
elapsed.
Once programmed, the integrated remote
X Keep the transmitter buttons depressed. control will assume the function of the garage
X Point the garage door's remote control with door system's remote control. Please read
the transmitter towards the left-hand side the operating instructions for the garage door
Controls
of the rear-view mirror from a distance of 5 system.

to 20 cm. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
i The distance between the garage door's lock.

remote control and the integrated garage X Press the transmitter button on the rear-
door opener depends on the system of the view mirror that you have programmed to
garage door drive. You might require sev- operate the garage door.
eral attempts. You should test every posi- Garage door system with fixed code: indi-
tion for at least 20 seconds before trying cator lamp : lights up continuously.
another position. Garage door system with rolling code: indi-
X Keep the transmitter button on the garage cator lamp : flashes briefly and then lights
door's remote control depressed until indi- up for approximately two seconds. This is
cator lamp : starts to flash rapidly. repeated for up to 20 seconds.
The programming was successful if indica- i The transmitter will transmit a signal for
tor lamp : flashes rapidly. as long as the transmitter button is being
X Release the transmitter buttons on the pressed. The transmission will be halted
garage door's remote control and the inte- after a maximum of 20 seconds and indi-
grated remote control. cator lamp : will flash. Press the trans-
If indicator lamp : goes out after approx- mitter button again, if necessary.
imately 20 seconds and did not flash rapidly
before this: Clearing the remote control memory
X Release the transmitter buttons on the X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition
integrated and portable remote controls. lock.
X Repeat the programming procedure. When X Press and hold transmitter buttons ;
doing so, change the distance between the and ? for approximately 20 seconds until
garage door's remote control and the trans- indicator lamp : flashes rapidly.
mitter buttons in the rear-view mirror. The memory is cleared.
i If the garage door system works with a i You should clear the remote control mem-
rolling code, after programming you must ory before selling the vehicle.
synchronise the remote control integrated
in the rear-view mirror with the garage door
system receiver. Compass*
You will find further information in the
In the Off-road menu* (Y page 102), the
garage door opening system's operating
compass displays the compass bearing of
instructions, e.g. the sections on "Synchro-
your direction of travel. You will see N, NE, E,
nising the transmitter" or "Registering a
SE, S, SW, W or NW in the multi-function display.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 167

Features 167
To obtain an accurate display of your com- objects in or on the vehicle may interfere
pass bearing, the correct geographical zone with the compass display.
must be set. If necessary, the compass must
also be calibrated (Y page 167). Setting the compass*
If the compass is not calibrated or is malfunc- X Use the following zone map to determine
tioning due to external interference, you will your geographical location.
see the Compass – – – message in the dis-
play.
Controls
i Large buildings, bridges, power lines or
large transmitting masts as well as metallic
X Use W or X on the multi-function Calibrating the compass

steering wheel to select the Vehicle sub-
You will only see this function if Audio 20 is
menu.
installed in your vehicle.
X Keep pressing & or * until the Com‐
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
pass setting Zone message appears. observe the following points:
The selection marker highlights the current Rfind a suitable place where you can drive
setting. the vehicle a full circle.
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not
in the vicinity of steel constructions or high-
voltage transmission lines.
Rswitch off electric consumers, e.g.
Thermatic / multi-zone Thermotronic*,
windscreen wipers or rear window heating.
X Use W or X to set the geographical Rclose all doors and the tailgate.
location.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 168

168 Features
X Start the engine. Before you drive off, check the floormats and
X Use W or X on the multi-function secure if necessary. A floormat which is not
steering wheel to select the Vehicle sub- properly secured can slip and, thereby, inter-
menu. fere with the movement of the pedals.
X Keep pressing & or * until the Com‐ Do not place floormats on top of one another.
pass calibration message appears.
The selection marker highlights switched
off.
Controls
X Use W or X to select Start.

In the multi-function display, you will see X Slide seat backwards.
the Compass calibration active X To fit: place the floormat in position.
Please drive a full circle message.
X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X Drive the vehicle a full circle at approx-
imately 5 – 10 km/h. X To remove: pull floormat off retainers ;.
When calibration is completed, you will see X Remove the floormat.
the following message in the multi-function
display: Compass calibration Comple‐
ted successfully
Infrared reflecting windscreen*
If you do not see the Compass calibration
Completed successfully message in the The infrared reflecting glass prevents the
multi-function display, drive another full cir- vehicle interior from becoming too hot. It also
cle. If calibration is not successful within blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz
three minutes of it starting, the Compass range.
calibration message will appear in the
multi-function display again. This means that
compass calibration is impossible because of
external interference. Repeat calibration at
another location.
Floormat* on the driver's side

G Risk of accident
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance
around the pedals when floormats are used, In order to operate radio-controlled equip-
and that the floormats are properly secured. ment (e.g. toll recording systems), areas :
The floormats must be correctly secured at all on the windscreen are transparent to radio
times using retainers and press-studs. waves. You can install radio-controlled sys-
tems here. These areas can best be seen from
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 169

Features 169
outside the vehicle by observing the light

reflected off the windscreen.
Retrofitted anti-glare film

Anti-glare film retrofitted to the insides of the
windows could interfere with radio or mobile
phone reception, especially if it is conductive
Controls
or metal-coated film. Information about anti-
glare film can be obtained from any
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 170

170
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 171

171
Running-in notes ............................... 172

Refuelling ........................................... 172
Engine compartment ........................ 174
Tyres and wheels .............................. 179
Winter driving ................................... 185
Driving tips ........................................ 186
Off-road driving ................................. 188
Driving abroad ................................... 193
Operation
Trailer towing* .................................. 193
Service ............................................... 199
Care .................................................... 201
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 172

172 Refuelling
Running-in notes Refuelling

The first 1,500 km Refuelling
G Risk of accident G Risk of explosion
New brake pads/linings only have optimal Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
braking performance after several hundred and smoking are therefore prohibited when
kilometres. Until then, compensate for this by handling fuels.
applying greater force to the brake pedal. This Switch off the engine and the auxiliary heat-
also applies when brake pads/linings or ing* before refuelling.
brake discs have been changed.
Operation
G Risk of injury
If you treat the engine with sufficient care
from the very start, you will be rewarded with Avoid any contact with fuels.
excellent performance for the remainder of You can damage your health if your skin
the engine's life. comes into direct contact with fuel or if you
RTherefore, you should drive at varying road inhale fuel vapours.
and engine speeds for the first 1,500 km.
G Risk of fire
RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a die-
tle, during this time. Do not exceed 2/3 of sel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This
the maximum permissible engine speed for causes damage to the fuel system and engine
each gear. and could result in the vehicle catching fire.
RChange gear in good time.
! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
RDo not shift down a gear manually in order
diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
to brake.
vehicles with a petrol engine. Even a small
Rtry to avoid depressing the accelerator quantity of the wrong fuel will damage the
pedal beyond the pressure point (kick- fuel system and engine. Damage resulting
down). from adding the wrong fuel is not covered
Ronly use ranges 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving, by the implied warranty.
e.g. in mountainous terrain.
! Do not start the engine if you accidentally
After 1,500 km, you may gradually bring the refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the
vehicle up to full road and engine speeds. fuel could enter the fuel lines. This would
i These running-in instructions must also require draining of the fuel tank and fuel
be observed if you have the engine, the dif- lines. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
ferenial gear or the front axle differential of and have the fuel tank and fuel lines
your vehicle replaced. drained completely.
When you open or close the vehicle with the
key or KEYLESS GO*, the fuel filler flap is
automatically unlocked or locked.
The position of the fuel filler cap is to the rear
on the right. The position of the fuel filler cap
is displayed in the instrument cluster 8.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 173

Refuelling 173
The arrow next to the filling pump indicates i As a temporary measure, only when the
the side of the vehicle. recommended fuel is not available, you
may also use regular unleaded petrol,
91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce
engine performance and increase fuel con-
sumption. Avoid driving at full throttle.
In some countries, the quality of the avail-
able fuel may not be adequate and could
cause coking around the inlet valve. In such
cases, and in consultation with a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, the petrol
Operation
may be mixed with the additive recommen-
ded by Mercedes-Benz (part no.
: To open the fuel filler flap A000989254510). You must observe the
; To insert the fuel filler cap notes and mixing ratios specified on the
= Fuel type container.
? Tyre pressure table Further information on "Fuel" (Y page 287).
X To open: press the fuel filler flap in the
direction of arrow :. Diesel (EN 590, DIN 51628)
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X Open the fuel filler flap. G Risk of fire
X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and
Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a die-
sel engine. Never mix diesel with petrol. This
remove it.
causes damage to the fuel system and engine
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
and could result in the vehicle catching fire.
bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.
X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle ! Refuel using only diesel which conforms
switches off. to European standard EN 590 or German
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the standard DIN 51628. Otherwise, you could
fuel system. impair engine output or damage the engine.
X To close: replace the fuel filler cap and turn ! When refuelling vehicles with a diesel par-
it clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly ticulate filter in countries outside the EU,
engages. only low-sulphur Euro diesel with less than
X Close the fuel filler flap. 0.005 percent sulphur content by weight
(50 ppm) should be used.
! In countries in which diesel with a higher

Petrol (EN 228) sulphur content is available, the engine oil
! Refuel using only unleaded, sulphur-free should be renewed at more frequent inter-
premium grade petrol with a minimum vals. More information about intervals for
octane number of 95 RON/85 MON con- changing the engine oil can be obtained
forming to European standard EN 228. from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Otherwise, you could impair engine output ! Using fuel that does not comply with the
or damage the engine. EN 590 European standard or the
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 174

174 Engine compartment
DIN 51628 German standard can lead to ature resistance. Under certain circumstan-
increased wear, engine damage and dam- ces, an excessive dosage may actually
age to the exhaust system. decrease low-temperature resistance, and
Do not use the following: should therefore be avoided (follow the man-
Rmarine
ufacturer's dosing instructions).
diesel
Mix the additive with the diesel in good time,
Rheating oil before the flow properties of the diesel
Rbio-diesel become inadequate. Otherwise, malfunctions
Rvegetable
can only be rectified by heating the entire fuel
oil
system, e.g. by parking the vehicle in a heated
Rpetrol garage.
Operation
Rparaffin Observe the information provided by the man-

Rkerosene ufacturer when using a flow improver. Only
use flow improvers that have been tested and
Do not add such fuels to diesel fuel and do approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain
not use any special additives (exception: further information from any Mercedes-Benz
flow improvers – see "Low outside temper- Service Centre.
atures").
Damage caused by the use of unapproved
fuels or additives is not covered by the Engine compartment
implied warranty.
Bonnet
Further information on "Fuel" (Y page 287).
G Risk of accident
Low outside temperatures Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
is in motion. If you do so, the bonnet may open
The flow properties of diesel may be inade-
up and block your view.
quate at low ambient temperatures.
Diesel fuel with improved cold flow qualities
Opening
is available during the winter months. In
Europe, various climate-dependent low-tem- G Risk of injury
perature classes are defined in EN 590. Using There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open,
diesel fuels which meet the climatic require- even if the engine is not running.
ments set out in EN 590 can help avoid oper-
Some engine components can become very
ating problems. The flow properties of diesel
hot.
fuel may be inadequate at unusually low out-
side temperatures or when using fuel which To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
has not been adjusted to climatic conditions components described in the Owner’s Manual
(e.g. diesel fuels from Mediterranean and observe the relevant safety notes.
regions).
G Risk of injury
Flow improver The radiator fan between the radiator and the
Flow improvers may be added to improve low- engine can start automatically, even if the key
temperature resistance. The effectiveness of has been removed from the ignition lock. For
a flow improver is not guaranteed with every this reason, you must not reach into the fan
fuel. rotation area. Otherwise, you could be
Correct dosage and mixing are decisive fac- injured.
tors in ensuring improvement in low-temper-
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 175

Engine compartment 175
Vehicles with a petrol engine: The bonnet release lever is located in the
The electronic ignition system uses high volt- driver's footwell.
age. For this reason, you must never touch
ignition system components (ignition coil,
ignition cable, spark plug connector or test
socket) while:
Rthe engine is running.
Rthe engine is being started.
Rthe ignition is switched on and the engine
is being cranked by hand.
Operation
You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
X Pull bonnet release lever :.
The electronic injection control uses high volt- The bonnet is released.
age. For this reason, you must never touch ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers
injection system components while: are not folded away from the windscreen.
Rthe engine is running. Otherwise, you could damage the wind-
Rthe engine is being started. screen wipers or the bonnet.
Rthe ignition is switched on. The handle for opening the bonnet is located
above the radiator grille.
You could otherwise suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
X Make sure that the windscreen wipers are

switched off.
G Risk of injury
The windscreen wipers and wiper linkage
could be set in motion.
When the bonnet is open, you or others could
be injured by the wiper linkage.
Make sure that the windscreen wiper is
switched off. Remove the key or make sure X Reach into the gap, pull bonnet catch han-
that no ignition level has been selected on dle ; up and lift the bonnet.
KEYLESS GO*. In the instrument cluster, all of
the indicator lamps must be out. Closing
G Risk of injury
as you close the bonnet.
X Lower the bonnet and let it fall from a

height of approximately 20 cm.
X Check that the bonnet has engaged prop-
erly.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 176

i If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is The measurement takes a few seconds. You
not properly engaged. Open it again and will see one of the following messages in the
close it with a little more force. multi-function display:
REngine oil level OK
RAdd 1.0 litre to reach max. oil

Engine oil
level
Depending on driving style, the vehicle con- RAdd 1.5 litres to reach max. oil
sumes up to 0.8 l oil per 1,000 km. The oil level
consumption may be higher than this when
RAdd 2.0 litres to reach max. oil
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
level
Operation
high engine speeds.

X Top up the oil if necessary (Y page 177).
Checking the engine oil level
Other messages in the multi-function dis-
Before checking the engine oil level the fol- play
lowing conditions for the vehicle should be
met: If the engine is at normal operating tempera-
ture and there is too much oil, you will see the
Rthe vehicle should be parked on level following message:
ground.
Engine oil level
Rthe engine should be switched off for at Reduce oil level
least five minutes if the engine is at normal X Have excess oil siphoned off.
operating temperature.
Rthe engine should be switched off for at ! There is a risk of damage to the engine or
least 30 minutes if the engine is not at the catalytic converter if there is excess oil
operating temperature (i.e. if you only start in the engine.
the engine briefly). If the Turn on ignition to see engine
oil level message appears:
Using the on-board computer* X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 63) in
i Only possible on the GL 450 CDI 4MATIC. the ignition lock.
On all other models, a dipstick is used to You will see the following message if you have
check the engine oil level (Y page 177). not observed the required waiting period:
X Make sure that the key is in position Observe waiting period
2 (Y page 63) in the ignition lock. X Repeat the measurement after about five
X Press the & or * button to select the minutes if the engine is at normal operating
following message: temperature.
X Repeat the measurement after about
30 minutes if the engine is not at normal
operating temperature (if the engine was
only started briefly).
The following message appears if the engine
is running:
Engine oil level Not when engine on
X Switch off the engine and wait for five
minutes if the engine is at normal operating
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 177

Engine compartment 177
temperature, or for about 30 minutes if the

engine is not at normal operating temper-
ature (if you had started the engine only
briefly), before measuring.
i If you wish to cancel the measurement,
press the * or & button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
Using the oil dipstick
Operation
Cap (example)
X Turn cap : anti-clockwise and remove.
X Top up with the amount of oil required
(Y page 289).
i The difference in quantity between the
minimum mark and maximum mark is
approximately 2 litres.
Vehicles with a petrol/diesel engine (example)

! Do not add too much oil. If too much oil
is added and the oil level is above the max-
X Pull oil dipstick : out of the oil dipstick imum mark on the dipstick, the engine or
tube. catalytic converter could be damaged.
X Wipe off oil dipstick :. Have excess oil siphoned off.
X Insert oil dipstick : into the oil dipstick X Replace cap : on the filler neck and
tube to the stop, and take it out again. tighten clockwise.
The oil level is correct if the level is between Ensure that the cap locks into place
the minimum mark = and maximum securely.
mark ;. For further information on engine oil, see
X Top up the oil if necessary. (Y page 289).
Topping up the engine oil

Coolant
H Environmental note
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
When topping up the oil, take care not to spill is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
any. Oil must not be allowed to escape into down.
the soil or waterways. You would otherwise be
X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 63) in
damaging the environment.
the ignition lock.
X Check the coolant temperature gauge in
the multi-function display.
G Risk of injury
The cooling system is pressurised. Therefore,
only unscrew the cap once the engine has
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 178

cooled down. The coolant temperature gauge on the left-hand side when viewed in the
must display less than 70 †. Otherwise, you direction of travel.
could be scalded if hot coolant escapes.
The coolant expansion tank is located in the

engine compartment on the left when viewed
in the direction of travel.
Operation
i Add windscreen washer concentrate to

the washer fluid all year round.
G Risk of fire
Windscreen washer fluid is highly flammable.
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn anti-clock- Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibi-
wise and allow excess pressure to escape. ted when handling washer fluid concentrate.
X Turn cap : further anti-clockwise and
remove it. ! Only use washer fluid concentrate which
There is sufficient coolant in expansion is suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
tank ; if the coolant is level with marker washer fluid concentrate could damage the
bar = in the filler neck when cold or plastic lenses of the headlamps.
approximately 1.5 cm higher when hot. X Mix the windscreen washer fluid in a con-
X Top up as necessary with coolant which has
tainer beforehand.
been tested and approved by Mercedes- X At temperatures above freezing:
Benz.
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of
X Replace cap : and tighten all the way to
water and windscreen washer concentrate
the stop. (e.g. MB SummerFit).
For further information on coolant, see X At temperatures below freezing:
(Y page 291). Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of
water, antifreeze additive and windscreen
washer concentrate (e.g. MB WinterFit).
Windscreen washer system/head- Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside tem-
lamp cleaning system* peratures.
The washer fluid reservoir for the windscreen X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
washer system and headlamp cleaning sys- X Top up with the premixed washer fluid.
tem* is located in the engine compartment X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 179

Tyres and wheels 179
Tyres and wheels G Risk of accident

Tyres, wheels or accessories which have not
Points to remember
been approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- vehicle or are not used as they should be, can
ommends that you only use tyres, wheels impair driving safety. As a result, you could
and accessories which have been approved cause an accident. Before purchasing and
by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your using them, enquire about their suitability,
vehicle. These tyres have been specially legal stipulations and factory recommenda-
adapted for use with the control systems, tions at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as
Modification work on the brake system and
Operation
follows:
wheels is not permitted, nor is the use of
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
spacer plates or brake dust shields. This inva-
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Exten- lidates the General Operating Permit for the
ded* (tyres with run-flat characteristics) vehicle.
Only use Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
tyres* on wheels that have been specifi-
Notes on selecting, fitting and replac-
cally approved by Mercedes-Benz.
ing tyres
If you use other tyres, wheels and acces- ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type
sories, Mercedes-Benz cannot accept any and make.
responsibility for damage that may result ROnly fit tyres of the correct size onto the
from this. Further information about tyres, wheels.
wheels and approved combinations can be
RAfter fitting new tyres, run them in at mod-
obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre. erate speeds for the first 100 km as they
only reach their full performance after this
! If you fit tyres other than those tested and distance.
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, charac- RFit new tyres on the front wheels first if
teristics such as handling, noise levels and tyres of the same size are required on the
fuel consumption, etc. may be adversely front and rear wheels.
affected. In addition, when driving with a RReplace the tyres after six years at the lat-
load, tyre dimensional variations could
est, regardless of wear. This also applies to
cause the tyres to come into contact with
the spare wheel*.
the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tyres or the RDo not drive with tyres which have too little
vehicle. tread depth, as this significantly reduces
the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning).
! Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since ! Store tyres that are not being used in a
previous damage cannot always be detec- cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect
ted on retreaded tyres. As a result, the tyres against oil, grease, petrol and die-
Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle sel.
safety if retreaded tyres are fitted. Do not
fit used tyres if you have no information Notes on regularly inspecting wheels
about their previous usage. and tyres
RRegularly check the wheels and tyres of
your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, punctu-
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 180

180 Tyres and wheels
res, tears, bulges on tyres and deformation, Direction of rotation

cracks or severe corrosion on wheels), at
least every 14 days, as well as after driving Tyres with a specified direction of rotation
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
wheels can cause a loss of tyre pressure. of aquaplaning. You will only gain these ben-
efits if the correct direction of rotation is
RRegularly check the tyre tread depth and observed.
the condition of the tread across the whole
An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates
width of the tyre (Y page 180). If neces-
its correct direction of rotation.
sary, turn the front wheels to full lock in
order to inspect the inner side of the tyre i You may fit a spare tyre* against the
Operation
surface. direction of rotation.

RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
fit anything onto the valve (such as tyre Tyre tread
pressure monitoring systems) other than G Risk of accident
the standard valve cap or other valve caps Bear in mind that:
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehi-
Rtyre grip decreases rapidly on wet roads
cle.
when the tread depth is less than 3 mm.
RRegularly check the pressure of all the tyres
Thus, you should replace tyres that have
including the spare tyre*, particularly prior insufficient tread.
to long trips, and correct the pressure as Rwinter tyres should be replaced when the
necessary (Y page 180).
tread depth is 4 mm or less as they will no
longer provide adequate grip.
Notes on driving
Rthe tread on a tyre may not wear evenly.
RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations, Thus, you should regularly check the tread
noises and unusual handling characteris- depth and the condition of the tread across
tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi- the entire width of all tyres. If necessary,
cate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. turn the front wheels to full lock in order to
If you suspect that a tyre is defective, inspect the tyre tread more easily.
reduce your speed and stop the vehicle as
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi-
soon as possible to check the wheels and
cle and cause an accident due to the reduced
tyres for damage. Hidden tyre damage
grip of the tyres on the road.
could also be causing the unusual handling
characteristics. If you find no signs of dam-
age, have the wheels and tyres examined
at a specialist workshop, for example at a Tyre pressures
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i You will find a table of tyre pressures for
RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that various operating conditions on the inside
the tyres do not get deformed by the kerb of your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive The applicable value for the spare
over kerbs, speed humps or similar eleva- wheel*/"Minispare" emergency spare
tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse wheel* is stated on the spare wheel and in
angle. Otherwise, the tyres, particularly the the technical data section.
sidewalls, can get damaged.
Unless otherwise specified, the tyre pres-
sures on the inside of the fuel filler flap are
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 181

valid for all factory-supplied tyres approved G Risk of accident

for the vehicle. Tyre pressure that is either too high or too low
has a negative effect on the vehicle’s driving
safety, which could lead you to cause an acci-
dent. Therefore, you should regularly check
the pressure of all the tyres, particularly prior
to long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-
essary.
To test tyre pressure, use a suitable pressure

gauge. The outer appearance of a tyre does
Operation
not permit any reliable conclusion about the
tyre pressure. On vehicles fitted with the elec-
If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre tronic tyre pressure monitor*, the tyre pres-
pressure information following is only valid sure can be checked in the on-board com-
for that tyre size. puter.
G Risk of accident
Do not fit anything else to the tyre valve other
than the standard valve cap. In particular, ret-
rofitted tyre pressure monitors which are
screwed onto the valve may overload it and
cause it to fail. Due to their design, the valve
is kept open continuously, which may lead to
air loss.
G Risk of accident
Should the tyre pressure drop repeatedly:
Instead of the complete tyre size, the rim Rcheck the tyre for foreign bodies.
diameter alone, for example R 16 or 16" may
Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
be listed.
valve is leaking.
Rmake sure that only a valve cap approved
by Mercedes-Benz has been fitted on the
tyre valve.
Tyre pressures that are too low have a nega-
tive effect on vehicle safety, which could lead
you to cause an accident.
If possible, you should only correct tyre pres-

sures when the tyres are cold. Depending on
the ambient temperature, the speed you are
Rim diameter : is part of the tyre size and driving at and the load on the tyres, the tyre
can be found on the tyre sidewall. temperature and thus the tyre pressure may
change by approximately 0.1 bar per 10 †.
Take this into account when checking the
pressure of warm tyres and only correct it if
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 182

it is too low for the current operating condi- pressure on several tyres at the same time
tions. cannot be detected by the tyre pressure loss
Driving with tyre pressure that is too high or warning system.
too low can: The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn
Rshorten the service life of the tyres you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tyre is penetrated by a foreign object.
Rincrease the likelihood of tyre damage
In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring
Rhave a negative effect on handling charac- the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do
teristics (e.g. by causing aquaplaning) not make any sudden steering movements
i The tyre pressure values given for low when doing so.
Operation
loads are minimum values which offer you The function of the tyre pressure loss warning
good ride comfort characteristics. system is limited or delayed if:
However, you can also use the values given Rsnow chains are fitted to your vehicle's
for higher loads. These are permissible and tyres.
will not adversely affect the running of the
Rroad conditions are wintry.
vehicle.
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Also check the tyre pressure of the spare
wheel* or "Minispare" emergency spare Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-
wheel*. nering at high speeds or driving with high
rates of acceleration).
Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer.
Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least
every 14 days. Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof).
Tyre pressure loss warning Restarting the tyre pressure loss warn-
ing system
While the vehicle is in motion, the tyre pres-
sure loss warning system monitors the set Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
tyre pressure using the rotational speed of if you have:
the wheels. This enables the system to detect Rchanged the tyre pressure
significant pressure loss in a tyre. If the speed Rchanged the wheels or tyres
of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning Rfitted new wheels or tyres
message will appear in the multi-function dis- X Before restarting, consult the table of tyre
play. pressures on the inside of the fuel filler flap
G Risk of accident to ensure that the tyre pressure in all four
The tyre pressure loss warning system does tyres is set correctly for the respective
not warn you of an incorrectly set tyre pres- operating conditions.
sure. The table on the inside of the fuel filler X Observe the notes in the section on tyre
flap will help you decide whether the tyre pressures (Y page 180).
pressures should be corrected.
The tyre pressure loss warning system does
not replace the need to regularly check your
vehicle's tyre pressures, since an even loss of
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 183

G Risk of accident Tyre pressure monitor*

The tyre pressure loss warning system can If a tyre pressure monitor system is fitted, the
only give reliable warnings if you have set the vehicle's wheels have sensors fitted that
correct tyre pressure. monitor the tyre pressures in all four tyres.
If an incorrect tyre pressure is set, these The tyre pressure monitor warns you when
incorrect values will be monitored. the pressure drops in one or more of the
A tyre with insufficient pressure results in tyres. The tyre pressure monitor only func-
vehicle instability when driving, thus increas- tions if the correct wheel electronics units are
ing the risk of an accident. fitted to all wheels.
G Risk of accident
Operation
X Make sure that the key is in position
2 (Y page 63) in the ignition lock. The tyre pressure monitor does not warn you
In the multi-function display you will see the of an incorrectly set tyre pressure. The table
standard display (Y page 98). on the inside of the fuel filler flap will help you
X Press * or & to select the Tyre
decide whether the tyre pressures should be
corrected.
pressure function.
The The tyre pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
Run Flat Indicator active
tyre is penetrated by a foreign object. In the
Menu: R-Button message is displayed.
event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the
X Press the reset button (Y page 25) on the
vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Do not
instrument cluster. make any sudden steering movements when
The multi-function display shows the mes- doing so.
sage:
Restart Run Flat Indicator? i The operation of the tyre pressure moni-
Yes Cancel tor can be affected by interference from
If you wish to confirm the restart: radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio
X Press the W button. headphones, two-way radios) that may be
The multi-function display shows the mes- being operated in or near the vehicle.
sage:
Run Flat Indicator restarted Checking tyre pressure electronically
After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure X Make sure that the key is in posi-
loss warning system will monitor the set tion 2 (Y page 63) in the ignition lock.
tyre pressures of all four tyres. X Press the & or * button to select the
If you wish to cancel the restart: Tyre pressure function.
X Press the X button. The current tyre pressure for each wheel will
or be displayed in the multi-function display.
X Wait until the Restart Run Flat Indi‐ If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
cator? Yes Cancel message disappears. 20 minutes or if you have not driven faster
The tyre pressure values stored at the last than 25 km/h since starting the vehicle, the
restart will continue to be monitored. following message appears:
i The tyre pressure values indicated by the
on-board computer may differ from those
measured at a filling station with a pressure
gauge. The tyre pressures shown by the on-
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 184

board computer refer to those measured at X Press the reset button on the instrument
sea level. At high altitudes, the tyre pres- cluster (Y page 25).
sure values indicated by a pressure gauge The multi-function display shows the mes-
are higher than those shown by the on- sage:
board computer. In this case, do not reduce Restart tyre pressure monitor?
the tyre pressures. Yes Cancel
X Press the W button.
i After a teach-in period, the tyre pressure
The multi-function display shows the mes-
monitor automatically recognises new
sage:
wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear
allocation of the tyre pressure values to the Tyre pressure monitor restarted
Operation
individual wheels is not possible, the dis- The tyre pressure monitor has stored the
play message Tyre pressure monitor pressure of the tyres as a new reference
active is shown instead of the tyre pres- value.
sure display. The tyre pressures are already
being monitored. Cancelling the restart
Restarting the tyre pressure monitor

X Press the X button.
When you restart the tyre pressure monitor, Other messages in the multi-function
all existing warning messages are deleted and display
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses
the currently set tyre pressures as the speci- If in multi-function display the following mes-
fied values for monitoring. sage appears:
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitor will Please correct tyre pressures
automatically detect the new reference val- X Check the tyre pressure on all four wheels
ues, e.g. if you have: and correct it if necessary.
Rchanged the tyre pressure
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are
Rchanged the wheels or tyres interchanged, the tyre pressures may be
Rfitted new wheels or tyres displayed for the wrong positions for a
short time. This is rectified after a few
i You will find the menu overview on minutes of driving, and the tyre pressures
(Y page 99). are displayed for the correct positions.
If you wish to define the new reference values
manually:
Interchanging the wheels
X Use the table on the inside of the fuel filler
flap to ensure that the tyre pressure is set G Risk of accident
correctly in all four tyres for the current Interchange the front and rear wheels only if
operating conditions. they have the same dimensions: for example
Also observe the notes in the section on size, offset, etc.
tyre pressures (Y page 180). After a wheel is changed, have the tightening
X Make sure that the key is in position 2 in torque checked at a specialist workshop that
the ignition lock. has the necessary specialist knowledge and
X Press the & or * button to select the tools to carry out the work required.
Tyre pressure function or wait until the Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
following message appears:
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 185

Winter driving 185
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- Winter driving

pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
on safety-related systems must be carried out Points to remember
at a qualified specialist workshop. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified
The wheels could work loose if they are not specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
tightened to a torque of 150 Nm. Service Centre, at the onset of winter.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
mends that you only use wheel bolts of the section (Y page 184).
correct size which have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Operation
Winter tyres
The wear patterns on the front and rear tyres
differ, depending on the operating conditions. At temperatures below +7 ˚C always use all-
Interchange the wheels before a clear wear weather tyres or winter tyres and always use
pattern has formed on the tyres. Front tyres winter tyres in winter road conditions. Only
typically wear more on the shoulders and the winter tyres displaying the i snowflake
rear tyres in the centre. symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-
On vehicles that have the same size front and vide optimum grip in wintry road conditions.
rear wheels you can interchange the wheels Only these tyres will allow the ABS and
every 5,000 km to 10,000 km depending on ESP® driving systems to function optimally in
the degree of tyre wear. Do not reverse the winter, as these tyres have been designed
direction of tyre rotation. specifically for driving in snow.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and Use winter tyres of the same make and tread
the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel on all wheels to maintain safe handling char-
is interchanged. Check the tyre pressure and, acteristics.
if necessary, restart the tyre pressure loss G Risk of accident
warning system or the tyre pressure moni- Winter tyres with a tread depth of less than
tor*. 4 mm must be replaced immediately. They are
! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure no longer suitable for winter use and can no
monitor*, electronic components are loca- longer provide sufficient grip. This could
ted in the wheel. cause you to lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in
the area of the valve, as this could damage Always observe the maximum permissible
the electronic components. speed specified for the winter tyres you have
Always have the wheels interchanged/ fitted. If you fit winter tyres which have a
changed at a qualified specialist workshop, lower maximum permissible speed than that
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. of the vehicle, affix an appropriate warning
sign in the driver's field of vision. This can be
i Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitor* obtained at a qualified specialist workshop,
If the positions of the wheels on the vehicle e.g. from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
are changed, the tyre pressure may be tem- Under these circumstances, you should also
porarily displayed in the wrong position. restrict the maximum speed of the vehicle
This is rectified after a few minutes of driv- using permanent Speedtronic27 to the maxi-
ing; the tyre pressures are then displayed
in the correct positions.
27 Only available for certain countries.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 186

186 Driving tips
mum permissible speed for the winter tyres and wheels" section in the "Technical data"
(Y page 128). chapter.
Once you have fitted the winter tyres: Rsnow chains must not be fitted to emer-
X Check the tyre pressures (Y page 180). gency spare wheels, e.g. a "Minispare"
X Restart the tyre pressure moni- emergency spare wheel.
tor* (Y page 183). RFit snow chains only in pairs and only to the
rear wheels. Comply with the manufactur-
G Risk of accident er's installation instructions.
If you fit the spare wheel* when driving with
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
winter tyres, bear in mind that driving stability
speed of 50 km/h.
Operation
will be impaired owing to unstable cornering

characteristics caused by the different tyres. i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when
You should therefore adapt your driving style pulling away with snow chains fitted
and drive carefully. (Y page 51). This way, you can allow the
Have the spare wheel* replaced at the near- wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-
est qualified specialist workshop which has ieving an increased driving force (cutting
the necessary specialist knowledge and tools action).
to carry out the work required. Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In par- Winter driving
ticular, work relevant to safety or on safety-
G Risk of accident
related systems must be carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop. Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface. This could
Snow chains
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- You should drive particularly carefully on slip-
mends that you only use snow chains which pery road surfaces. Avoid sudden accelera-
have been specially approved for your vehicle tion, steering and braking manoeuvres.
by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
standard of quality. stopped when moving at low speed:
! Do not drive in ADS SPORT mode when X Shift the selector lever to N.
driving with snow chains fitted. X Try to bring the vehicle under control by
If you intend to fit snow chains, please bear using corrective steering.
the following points in mind:
Ryou may not attach snow chains to all
wheel-tyre combinations; see the "Tyres Driving tips
Rolling with the engine switched off
G Risk of accident
Never switch the engine off while the vehicle
is in motion.
There is no power assistance for the steering
and the service brake when the engine is not
running.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 187

Driving tips 187
You will require considerably more effort to If the brakes have been used only moderately,
steer and brake and you could therefore lose you should occasionally test their effective-
control of the vehicle and cause an accident. ness. To do this, brake more firmly from a
higher speed. This improves the grip of the
brakes.
Brakes
Wet roads
G Risk of accident
If driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period
Do not change down for additional engine
of time without braking, there may be a
delayed reaction from the brakes when brak-
Operation
ing for the first time. You must brake harder.
You must therefore maintain a greater dis-
G Risk of accident tance from the vehicle in front.
Make sure that other road users are not After driving on a wet surface, brake firmly
endangered by your braking. while paying attention to the traffic condi-
tions. This way the brake discs will become
Downhill gradients warm, drying more quickly, which will protect
them against corrosion.
On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-
cially if the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, Limited braking performance on salted
you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good roads
time.
i This also applies if you have activated G Risk of accident
The layer of salt on the brake discs and the
cruise control, Speedtronic or Distronic*.
brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the
This will use the braking effect of the engine, braking effect, resulting in a significantly lon-
so less braking will be required to maintain ger braking distance, which could lead to an
the speed. This relieves the load on the brake accident.
system and prevents the brakes from over- To avoid this danger, you should:
heating and wearing too quickly. If you need
Roccasionally brake carefully, without put-
additional braking, depress the brake pedal
ting other road users at risk, when you are
repeatedly rather than continuously.
driving on salted roads. This helps to
remove any salt that may have started to
Heavy and light loads
build up on the brake discs and the brake
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy pads/linings.
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
drive on for a short while. This allows the air- ahead and drive with particular care.
flow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
G Risk of accident trip and immediately after commencing a
Never depress the brake pedal continuously new trip, so that salt residues are removed
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause from the brake disc.
the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 188

New brake pads/linings For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts, and
brake carefully.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only have brake pads/linings
fitted to your vehicle which have been
Driving on flooded roads
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or
which correspond to an equivalent quality If you have to drive on stretches of road on
standard. Brake pads/linings which have not which water has collected, please bear in
been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or mind that:
which are not of an equivalent quality could Rthe maximum permitted still water depth
affect your vehicle's operating safety. depends on the vehicle equipment
Operation
(Y page 192).
G Risk of accident
Ryou should drive no faster than at walking
New brake pads/linings only reach their opti-
mum braking effect after several hundred kil- pace.
ometres of driving. Before this optimum brak- ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in
ing effect is reached, you should compensate
front or in the opposite direction create
for the reduced braking effect by applying
waves. This may cause the maximum per-
greater pressure when braking. This also
missible water depth to be exceeded.
applies after the brake discs or the brake
pads/linings have been replaced. Failure to observe these notes may result
in damage to the engine, electrical systems
and transmission.
Tyre grip
G Risk of accident Off-road driving
While the vehicle can be fully controlled at a Points to remember
certain speed on dry roads, you must reduce
your speed on wet or icy roads to achieve the G Risk of accident
same road safety. Otherwise, you could cause Drive slowly in rough terrain with which you
an accident. are unfamiliar. This will allow you to detect
Pay particular attention to the road conditions unexpected obstacles more easily and, there-
at temperatures around freezing point. fore, to reduce the risk of an accident.
If ice has formed on the road surface (e.g. Do not make U-turns on mountain roads. Oth-
from fog), a thin film of water rapidly forms on erwise, the vehicle could tip over. If a slope is
the ice when you brake, considerably reduc- too steep for the vehicle, drive back in reverse
ing tyre grip. Drive with particular care in such gear.
weather conditions. Do not drive at an angle up steep inclines.
Otherwise, the vehicle could tip over. If you
drive up a steep incline at an angle and the
Driving on wet roads vehicle threatens to overturn, steer into the
line of fall immediately.
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
on the road surface, there is a danger of aqua- Never allow the vehicle to roll backwards. The
planing occurring, even if: braking effect of the engine cannot be utilised
in neutral. If you only use the service brake,
Ryou drive at low speeds
you could lose control of the vehicle.
Rthe tyres have adequate tread depth
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 189

G Risk of accident General information

Grains of sand, particles of dirt and other RStop your vehicle and, if necessary, select
abrasive materials can enter the brake sys- the LOW RANGE off-road gear
tem. This can lead to excessive wear and (Y page 114) before driving off-road.
unpredictable braking efficiency.
RSelect a vehicle level suitable for the off-
After the brakes have been exposed to dirty road terrain. Make sure there is always suf-
conditions, have them checked and cleaned ficient ground clearance to prevent dam-
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a age to the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Otherwise,
RCheck that items of luggage and loads are
there is a risk that braking power may be
stowed safely and are well secured
Operation
insufficient in the event of an emergency, or
that braking efficiency may be unpredictable. (Y page 156).
RAlways keep the engine running and in gear
Read this section before driving your vehicle when driving on a downhill gradient. Acti-
off-road. Practise by travelling over more gen- vate DSR.
tle off-road terrain first.
RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at a
The following driving systems are specially
adapted to off-road driving: walking pace.
RLOW RANGE off-road gear (Y page 114) REnsure that the wheels are in contact with
the ground at all times.
Roff-road ABS (Y page 50)
RDrive with extreme care on unknown off-
Roff-road 4-ETS (Y page 53) road routes where visibility is poor. For
Roff-road ESP® (Y page 52) safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first
Rdifferential locks (Y page 116) and survey the off-road route.
RCheck the depth of water before fording
RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)
(Y page 113) rivers and streams.
RLook out for obstacles such as rocks, holes,
tree stumps and furrows.
Off-road driving RAlways keep the side windows and the slid-
G Risk of accident ing/tilting sunroof* closed during the jour-

ney.
Damage to the vehicle creates the risk of an
accident for yourself and other road users. If RDo not stray from marked routes or paths.
in doubt, have your vehicle checked at a quali-
i Information about retrofitting special all-
fied specialist workshop which has the nec-
terrain tyres is available from any
essary specialist knowledge and tools to carry
out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose.
Checklist before driving off-road
X Engine oil level: check the engine oil and
H Environmental note top it up if necessary.
Protection of the environment is of primary X Vehicle toolkit: check that the jack is
importance. Treat nature with respect. working and make sure you have the wheel-
Observe all prohibiting signs. brace, a robust tow cable and a folding
spade in the vehicle.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 190

X Wheels and tyres: check the tyre tread brake pads/linings and axle joints checked
depth and tyre pressure. and cleaned.
X Check for damage and remove foreign X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road
objects, e.g. small stones, from the travel, check for foreign objects in the
wheels/tyres. wheels and drive train and remove them if
X Replace any missing valve caps. necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the
X Replace dented or damaged wheels. balance and cause vibrations.
Checklist after driving off-road

Travelling uphill
Operation
Driving over rough terrain places greater

demands on your vehicle than driving on nor- Approach/departure angle
mal roads. After driving off-road, check the
vehicle. This allows you to detect damage
promptly and reduce the risk of an accident
to yourself and other road users.
X Deactivate the LOW RANGE off-road gear
(Y page 114).
X Deactivate DSR (Y page 113).
X Set the differential lock setting to AUTO on
the selector wheel (Y page 116).
X Lower the vehicle level again to a level suit-
able to the road conditions, e.g. to the high- The table shows approach and departure
way/high-speed level. angles : and ; when the vehicle is loaded
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and and ready to drive.
check for damage.
: ;
X Clean the front and rear licence plates.
X Clean the wheels/tyres with a water jet and Vehicle level
remove any foreign objects.
Off-road level 3 32° 27°
X Clean the wheels, wheel arches and the
vehicle underside with a water jet; check Off-road level 2 31° 26°
for foreign objects and damage.
Off-road level 1 28° 23°
X Check whether twigs or other parts of
plants have become trapped. These Highway level 26° 21°
increase the risk of fire and can damage
fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bel- RFollow the line of fall when driving on slopes
lows of the axle joints and propeller shafts. and steep gradients.
X After the trip, examine without fail the
RBefore driving on extreme uphill and down-
entire undercarriage, wheels, tyres, brakes,
hill gradients, select the LOW RANGE off-
bodywork structure, steering, chassis and
road gear.
exhaust system for damage.
RObserve the warnings for off-road driving
X After driving for extended periods across
sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty (Y page 188).
conditions, have the brake discs, wheels, RDrive slowly.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 191

RAccelerate gently and make sure that the Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
wheels are gripping. brow of a hill
RAvoid high engine speeds, except when Rloss of traction
driving on sandy and muddy routes with Rthe vehicle from travelling too quickly down
high driving resistance. the other side
RSelect a shift range appropriate to the gra-
dient. Driving downhill
RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients, RDrive slowly.
select shift range 1.
RDo not drive at an angle down steep
Operation
i The vehicle will not roll backwards when inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive
stopping on an uphill gradient if: with the front wheels aligned straight. Oth-
Rthe automatic transmission is in position erwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip
D. and overturn.
Ryou have selected the LOW RANGE off- RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,
road gear. select shift range 1.
Depress the brake pedal when stopping on RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
steep uphill gradients. Hill start assist will gently. When doing so, make sure that the
aid you when you pull away again vehicle is facing in the direction of the line
(Y page 90). of fall.
RCheck that the brakes are working normally
Maximum gradient-climbing capability after a long downhill stretch.
On good road surfaces and with the LOW i Off-road ABS is activated when the
RANGE off-road gear selected, the full gradi- LOW RANGE off-road gear is selected.
ent-climbing capability is available.
At speeds below 30 km/h, the front wheels
i If the load on the front axle is reduced lock cyclically during braking. The digging-
when pulling away on a steep uphill slope, in effect achieved in the process reduces
the front wheels have a tendency to spin. the stopping distance when driving off-
4ETS recognises this and brakes the road. The steerability of the vehicle is con-
wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque siderably reduced when the wheels lock.
is increased and it is easier to pull away.
Brow of hill Driving over obstacles

When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly Observe the following rules when driving over
reduce pressure on the accelerator immedi- tree stumps, large stones and other obsta-
ately before reaching the brow of the hill. cles:
Make use of the vehicle’s own impetus to RSelect the LOW RANGE off-road gear
travel over the brow. (Y page 114).
This style of driving prevents: RAvoid high engine speeds.
RSelect shift range 1.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 192

RDrive very slowly. RSelect the LOW RANGE off-road gear

RAs far as possible, try to drive straight over (Y page 114).
the centre of obstacles, front wheel first, RRestrict the shift range to 1 or 2.
then rear wheel. RAvoid high engine speeds.
! Obstacles could damage the floor of the REnter and exit the water where the ground
vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask is level and at a steady walking pace.
passengers for guidance when driving over
! Under no circumstances should you
large obstacles. Any damage to the vehicle
accelerate before entering the water. The
always increases the risk of an accident.
bow wave could cause water to enter and
Operation
damage the engine and neighbouring

Fording assemblies.
RDrive slowly and at an even speed through
the water.
RDo not stop.
! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors
while fording. Otherwise, water could get
into the vehicle interior and damage the
vehicle’s electronics and interior equip-
ment.
RWater offers a high degree of resistance,
and the ground is slippery and in some
The table shows fording capability : when cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and
the vehicle is loaded and ready to drive. dangerous to pull away in the water.
REnsure that a bow wave does not form as
Fording
you drive.
depth
RClean any mud from the tyre tread after
Vehicle level crossing a ford.
Off-road level 3 60 cm RApply the brakes to dry them after crossing
a ford.
Off-road level 2 50 cm
Off-road level 1 50 cm
Driving on sand
! The depth of water must not exceed the Observe the following rules when driving on
value specified in the table. Note that the sand:
possible fording depth is less in flowing RSelect a higher vehicle level.
water. RSelect a shift range appropriate to the ter-
REstablish how deep the water is and the rain.
characteristics of the body of water before
fording.
RSelect the highest possible vehicle level.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 193

Trailer towing* 193
RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist- Symmetrical dipped beam

ance. The vehicle could otherwise dig itself
into the sand. If your journey takes you to countries where
vehicles are driven on sides of the road oppo-
RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles, if pos-
site to the country in which the vehicle is reg-
sible. Make sure that the ruts are not too istered, your headlamps must be switched to
deep, that the sand is firm enough and that symmetrical dipped beam. Oncoming traffic
your vehicle has sufficient ground clear- will be dazzled less.
ance.
X Have the headlamps switched over at a
qualified specialist workshop, e. g. a
Operation
Ruts
Observe the following rules when driving G Risk of accident
along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with Remember to set the headlamps back to
loose gravel: asymmetrical dipped beam when you return
to driving on the same side of the road as that
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and of the country in which your vehicle was reg-
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. istered. You may otherwise dazzle the oncom-
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged ing traffic and could cause an accident.
or bottom out and get stuck.
RSelect the LOW RANGE off-road gear
(Y page 114). Trailer towing*
RSelect a higher vehicle level.
Folding out the ball coupling
RAvoid high engine speeds.
Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle,
RSelect shift range 1. you must fit the ball coupling.
RDrive slowly. The telescopic lever is under the boot/lug-
RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the gage compartment mat on the left-hand side.
wheels on one side on the middle section
of turf if possible.
Driving abroad
Points to remember
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
is also available in other countries. The
Service Hotline's current telephone numbers
for use when you are abroad are to be found
in the "Service24h" chapter of the Service G Risk of accident
Booklet. Make sure that the ball coupling is fully
Only low-octane fuel is available in certain engaged both when it is folded in and when it
countries. is folded out. The indicator lamp is not lit.
You can find further information about fuel Do not pull the telescopic lever if a trailer is
grades on (Y page 172). attached. The trailer could otherwise come
loose.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 194

194 Trailer towing*
X Pull telescopic lever : out forwards. come loose. This could cause an accident. Fit
X Pull telescopic lever : upwards. the ball coupling carefully and make sure that
The ball coupling disengages and folds out it engages in position correctly.
from under the rear bumper.
The detachable ball coupling is located in the
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The trailer power stowage well under the luggage compartment
socket folds away automatically. floor.
X Guide telescopic lever : back again.
X Take the ball coupling and the key from the
stowage well under the luggage compart-
ment floor (Y page 209).
Operation
X Press the ball coupling in the direction of

the arrow by hand until it engages in a ver-
tical position. X Pull protective cap : underneath the
Indicator lamp ; goes out. bumper vertically downwards in the direc-
The Trailer tow hitch tion of the arrow and out of the ball coupling
Check locking mech. message is shown recess.
in the multi-function display until the ball X Place protective cap : in the stowage well
coupling is engaged. under the luggage compartment floor.
X Remove the protective cap from the ball
coupling.
Installing the ball coupling (vehicles

with exterior spare wheel*)
Before you can tow a trailer with your vehicle,
you must fit the ball coupling.
There is a key for the ball coupling.
X Make a note of the key number.
You can use this number to obtain a
replacement key from a Mercedes-Benz X Pull protective cap ; off the lock in the
Service Centre. handwheel.
X Insert key : into the lock in the hand-
G Risk of injury wheel.
If the ball coupling does not engage correctly X Turn key : anti-clockwise.
when it is mounted, the vehicle/trailer com-
bination is not secured and the trailer could
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 195

Trailer towing* 195
i The key remains inserted when you and the key can be removed. If the ball cou-
remove the ball coupling. pling is not securely mounted, it may come
loose.
The ball coupling must be locked and the key
must be removed when towing a trailer. This
is the only way to guarantee that the ball cou-
pling is secured and cannot come loose while
the vehicle is in motion. If the ball coupling
cannot be locked and the key cannot be
removed, remove the ball coupling and clean
Operation
it.
If the ball coupling can still not be fitted
(locked) after it has been cleaned, remove the
ball coupling. The trailer tow hitch must then
X Pull handwheel ? away from the ball cou-
not be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation
pling in the direction of the arrow and turn
is not guaranteed.
it clockwise until it engages.
The white dot on the ball coupling is aligned Have the entire trailer coupling checked at a
with the red area on the handwheel. qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-
X Insert the ball coupling vertically up into
Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In par-
ball coupling recess = in the direction of
ticular, work relevant to safety or on safety-
the arrow until it engages. related systems must be carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
X Handwheel ? turns automatically, aligning

green area A on handwheel ? with white : Socket
dot B on the ball coupling.
X Turn key : to the stop in the direction of
the arrow (lock). Coupling up and uncoupling a trailer
X Remove key :.
Coupling up a trailer
X Press protective cap ; onto the lock.
G Risk of injury
G Risk of accident Never lock, unlock, open or close a vehicle
The ball coupling is only securely mounted door or tailgate when coupling up or decou-
when the green area on the handwheel is pling a trailer. The vehicle level could change
aligned with the white dot on the ball coupling and you could endanger yourself or others.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 196

196 Trailer towing*
Never press the ADS button* or operate the X Make sure the DIRECT SELECT selector
level control* while you are coupling up or lever is set to P.
decoupling a trailer. X Depress the parking brake.
X Start the engine.
X Make sure the DIRECT SELECT selector X Close the doors and tailgate.
lever is set to P.
X Secure the trailer against rolling away.
X Depress the parking brake.
X Start the engine. G Risk of injury
X Set the vehicle to highway level The vehicle is lowered as soon as you discon-
(Y page 132). nect the trailer cable. Make sure that nobody
Operation
X Set the adaptive damping system (ADS) is in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the
setting to AUTO or COMF (Y page 129). underbody. You could otherwise trap yourself
or others.
X Switch off the engine.
As soon as you decouple the trailer, the unla-
X Close the doors and tailgate.
den vehicle rises slightly. Make sure that you
X Position the trailer level behind the vehicle.
or others are not injured in the process.
X Couple up the trailer.
X Establish the electrical connection X Remove the trailer cable and decouple the
between the vehicle and the trailer. trailer.
i If you have coupled a trailer, the vehicle
will remain at highway level.
The vehicle automatically lowers to high- Notes on towing a trailer
way level if you drive faster than 8 km/h
with a trailer. The vehicle is not lowered to G Risk of accident
the high-speed level even if you are travel- When reversing the vehicle towards the
ling at higher speeds. trailer, make sure there is nobody between
This also applies when using accessories the trailer and the vehicle.
that are plugged into the socket of the Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If
trailer coupling (e.g. a bicycle rack). you do not couple the trailer to the towing
vehicle correctly, the trailer could become
Decoupling a trailer detached.
Make sure that the following values are not
G Risk of injury
exceeded:
Do not disconnect a trailer with an engaged
Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
overrun brake. Otherwise, your hand could
become trapped between the bumper and Rthe permissible trailer load
drawbar. Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing
vehicle
! Do not uncouple a trailer with overrun Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle
brake between the bumper and drawbar,
weight of both the towing vehicle and the
otherwise your vehicle could be damaged
trailer
by the spring action of the overrun brake.
You will find the applicable permissible val-
ues, which must not be exceeded, in the vehi-
cle documents.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 197

Trailer towing* 197
You will find the values approved by the man- When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling
ufacturer on the vehicle identification plates characteristics will be different in comparison
and those for the towing vehicle in the "Tech- to when driving without a trailer.
nical data" section. The vehicle/trailer combination:
Ris heavier
You will find installation dimensions and loads
in the "Technical data" section Ris restricted in its acceleration and gradi-
(Y page 297). ent-climbing capability
The maximum drawbar load of the trailer Rhas an increased braking distance
drawbar on the ball coupling is 140 kg. How-
Ris affected more by strong crosswinds
ever, the actual noseweight must not exceed
Operation
the value given on the trailer coupling or Rdemands more sensitive steering
trailer identification plates. The lowest weight Rconsumes more fuel
applies.
On long and steep downhill gradients, you
! Use a noseweight as close as possible to must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time.
the maximum permissible noseweight. Do
not use a noseweight of less than 50 kg, i This also applies if you have activated
otherwise the trailer may come loose. cruise control, Distronic* or Speedtronic.
Bear in mind that the payload and the rear This will use the braking effect of the engine,
axle load are reduced by the actual nose- so less braking will be required to maintain
weight. the speed. This relieves the load on the brake
When towing a trailer, where possible set the system and prevents the brakes from over-
tyre pressures for the permissible gross heating and wearing too quickly. If you need
weight which you find in the table on the additional braking, depress the brake pedal
inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap (higher repeatedly rather than continuously.
values). G Risk of accident
Never depress the brake pedal continuously
Driving tips while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. never cause
i Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabi- the brakes to rub by applying constant slight
lisation (Y page 51).
In Germany, the maximum permissible speed and can lead to the brakes failing completely.
for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on
the type of trailer and is either 80 km/h or Driving tips
100 km/h. Before beginning the journey, RMaintain a greater distance from the vehi-
check the trailer's documents to see what the cle in front than when driving without a
maximum permitted speed is. trailer.
G Risk of accident RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake
Always observe the maximum speed permit- gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.
ted in Germany for vehicle/trailer combina- Then, increase the braking force rapidly.
tions, even in countries where higher speeds RThe values given for gradient-climbing
are permitted. This lowers the risk of an acci- capabilities from a standstill refer to sea
dent. level. When driving in mountainous areas,
note that the power output of the engine,
and consequently the vehicle's gradient-
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 198

198 Trailer towing*
climbing capability, decrease with increas-

ing altitude.
If the trailer swings from side to side:
X Do not accelerate.
X Do not counter-steer.
X Brake if necessary.
G Risk of accident
On no account should you attempt to draw the
vehicle/trailer combination out by increasing
Operation
speed. X Press the ball coupling in the direction of

the arrow until it engages behind the
bumper.
Folding in the ball coupling Indicator lamp ; goes out and the mes-
sage in the multi-function display disap-
i Fold the ball coupling back in if you are
pears.
not using the trailer tow hitch.
Removing the ball coupling (vehicles

with exterior spare wheel*)
X Pull the protective cap off the lock in the
handwheel.
X Use the key to unlock the lock in the hand-
wheel.
X Hold the ball coupling. Pull the handwheel
away from the ball coupling and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
The red area on the handwheel is aligned
X Place the protective cap on the ball cou-
with the white dot on the ball coupling.
pling.
X Pull out the ball coupling downwards.
G Risk of injury X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty.
Make sure that no persons or animals are in X Press the protective cap into the ball cou-
the pivoting range of the ball coupling. Other- pling recess until it engages.
wise, they could be injured. X Make sure that the protective cap is firmly
in place.
X Pull telescopic lever : out forwards.
X Pull telescopic lever : upwards.
Storing the ball coupling
The ball coupling disengages and folds out
from under the rear bumper. Indicator X Place the ball coupling with the key inser-
lamp ; flashes. ted in the ball coupling stowage compart-
X Guide telescopic lever : back again. ment in the stowage well under the luggage
compartment floor.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 199

Service 199
G Risk of accident Trailer with 7-pin connector

Do not carry the ball coupling in the vehicle If your trailer has a 7-pin connector, you can
interior if it is not secured. connect it to the 13-pin socket on the ball
Otherwise, you and others could be injured by coupling using an adapter or, if necessary, an
the ball coupling being thrown around if you: adapter cable. Both of these can be obtained
Rbrake sharply at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a
Rchange
direction suddenly
Rare involved in an accident Fitting the adapter
Information on cleaning and care of the trailer
Operation
coupling can be found at (Y page 203).
Trailer power supply

When it leaves the factory, your vehicle's
trailer socket outlet is equipped with a per-
manent power supply and a power supply that
is switched on via the ignition lock.
The permanent power supply is supplied via
trailer socket pin 9.
X Open the socket cover.
The power supply that is switched on via the
X Insert connector with lug : into
ignition lock is supplied via trailer socket
pin 10. groove ; on the socket and turn the con-
nector clockwise to the stop.
! You can connect consumers with a power X Make the cover engage.
rating of up to 240 W to the permanent
X If you are using an adapter cable, secure
power supply and up to 180 W to the power
the cable to the trailer with cable ties.
supply that is switched on via the ignition
lock. ! Make sure that there is sufficient cable
You must not charge a trailer battery using play so that the cable cannot become
the power supply. detached when cornering.
The trailer's turn signal lamps are only guar-
anteed to function when bulbs are used.
Service
You can obtain further information about
installing the trailer electrics from a qualified ASSYST PLUS service interval display
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
X To switch the connected power supply
The service due date is shown in the multi-
on or off: turn the key in the ignition lock
function display, for example:
to position 2 or 0, respectively.
Service A in .. days
Service A in .. km
Service A due now
The letter indicates how much time the work-
shop will require to carry out the service work.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 200

200 Service
The letters displayed range from A for a short AdBlue® service indicator
service duration (approx. 1 hour) to H for a
long service duration (approx. 8 hours). i For Blue-TEC vehicles only.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display The BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment
does not take into account any periods of must be operated with a reducing agent
time during which the battery is disconnec- (AdBlue®) in order for it to function correctly.
ted. AdBlue® is topped up as part of maintenance
Maintaining the time-dependent service work. Under normal operating conditions, a
schedule: full tank of AdBlue® should last until the next
X Note down the service due date displayed service due date.
Operation
before disconnecting the battery. Depending on how and where the vehicle is
or used, there may be an increase in the
AdBlue® consumption. If the AdBlue® supply
X Subtract the battery disconnection periods
does not last until the next service, it will be
from the service date shown on the display
necessary to top it up sooner.
after reconnecting the battery.
The following messages tell you about the
AdBlue® supply:
Hiding a service message
Refill AdBlue at workshop See Own‐
X Press the . reset button on the instru- er's Manual
ment cluster (Y page 25). Refill AdBlue at workshop No start
in: ... km
Service overdue Before taking a trip with your vehicle outside
A display message is shown in the multi-func- Europe, have the AdBlue® supply checked
tion display, for example: and, if necessary, topped up at a qualified
specialist workshop. Before using your vehi-
Service A exceeded by .. days
cle for an extended period in countries out-
Service A exceeded by .. km side Europe, contact a qualified specialist
You will also hear a warning tone. workshop.
i If you fail to have the service performed ! Have the AdBlue® tank topped up at a
by the specified date, you may be violating qualified specialist workshop only. The
applicable laws. Your warranty may be inva- vehicle may otherwise be damaged or
lidated and goodwill settlements may be soiled.
refused. Damage or consequential damage is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied
Calling up a service due date warranty.
X Switch on the ignition. You can obtain general information about
X Press V or U to select the standard BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment and
display menu on the steering wheel AdBlue® from any Mercedes-Benz Service
(Y page 99). Centre.
X Press & or * to select the service Further information about AdBlue®
information. (Y page 288).
The multi-function display shows the
¯ symbol and the service due date.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 201

Care 201
Care You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car

wash from the beginning.
Care and cleaning products
! Do not wash vehicles with an exterior
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for spare wheel bracket* in an automatic car
retaining the quality in the long term. wash.
Use only care products and cleaning agents
recommended and approved by Mercedes- If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
Benz. cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ! Make sure that the automatic car wash is
of the following: suitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in
Operation
the exterior mirrors before the vehicle is
Rdry, rough or hard cloths washed. There is otherwise a risk of dam-
Rabrasive cleaning agents age to the exterior mirrors.
Rsolvents
! When washing your vehicle in a tow-
Rcleaning agents containing solvents through car wash, make sure that the auto-
and do not scrub. matic transmission is in position N, other-
wise the vehicle could be damaged.
Do not touch the surfaces and protective
RVehicles with a key:
films with hard objects, e.g. rings or ice
scrapers. You could otherwise scratch or Do not remove the key from the ignition
damage the surfaces and protective film. lock. Do not open the driver's or front-
passenger door when the engine is
H Environmental note switched off, as this automatically shifts
Dispose of empty packaging, cleaning cloths the automatic transmission to park posi-
and polishing wads in an environmentally tion P and locks the wheels, unless you
responsible manner. have previously shifted the automatic
transmission to N.
! Do not park the vehicle for a long period RVehicles with KEYLESS GO*:
of time directly after cleaning, especially if
the wheels have just been cleaned with a Do not open the driver's or front-
wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause passenger door when the engine is
rapid corrosion of the brake discs and switched off, as this shifts the automatic
brake pads/linings. After cleaning, park transmission to park position P and locks
the vehicle when it is at normal operating the wheels.
temperature.
! Make sure that the side windows are com-
pletely closed, that the ventilation/heater
Exterior care blower is fully turned off and that the wind-
screen wiper switch is set to 0. Otherwise,
Automatic car wash the rain/light sensor may be activated, trig-
gering unintended wiper movements. This
G Risk of accident could cause damage to the vehicle.
The efficiency of the brakes is reduced after
using an automatic car wash. This could cause After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
an accident. For this reason, following a car wax and drying agents from the windscreen
wash, drive with particular care until the and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears
brakes are dry. and reduce wiping noises caused by residue
on the windscreen.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 202

202 Care
High-pressure cleaners and rinse off the treated surface after-

wards.
G Risk of accident Remove:
Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circu-
Rtree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rub-
lar-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your
vehicle, in particular the tyres. You could oth- bing gently with a cloth soaked in petro-
erwise damage the tyres and cause an acci- leum ether or lighter fluid.
dent. Rtar stain with tar remover
Rwax with silicone remover
! Observe the instructions issued by the
equipment manufacturer concerning the ! Do not affix:
Operation
distance to be maintained between the Rstickers

nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner and the
vehicle (at least 30 cm). Rfilms
Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle Rmagnetic plates or similar items

around when cleaning your vehicle. to painted surfaces. Otherwise, you could
Do not aim directly at any of the following: damage the paintwork.
Rtyres
Rdoor joint Cleaning the wheels

Relectrical components ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to
Rbattery
remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
Rconnectors
Rlights Cleaning the windows

Rseals X Clean the inside and outside of the win-
Rtrim elements dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
product approved and recommended by
Rventilation slots Mercedes-Benz.
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to failures or leaks.
! Clean the water drainage channels of the
windscreen and the rear window at regular
intervals. Under certain circumstances,
Cleaning the paintwork
deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected may prevent water from draining away
by corrosion and damage caused by inade- leading to corrosion damage.
quate care cannot always be completely
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- Cleaning the wiper blades
cialist workshop immediately, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. G Risk of injury
X Remove the following types of dirt immedi- Before cleaning the windscreen or wiper
ately, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. blades, turn the key to position 0 in the igni-
tion lock or press the Start/Stop button* until
Soak:
all indicator lamps have gone out in the instru-
Rinsect remains with insect remover ment cluster. The windscreen wipers could
Rbird droppings with water otherwise move and cause injury.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 203

Care 203
! Do not clean the wiper blades too often, ! If you clean the sensors using a high-pres-
and avoid rubbing too hard, as this could sure cleaner or steam cleaner, observe the
result in damage to the graphite coating. manufacturer's information on maintaining
This could cause wiper noise. the correct distance between the vehicle
and the high-pressure cleaner.
X Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen.
Cleaning the reversing camera*
X Clean the wiper blades carefully with a
damp cloth.
X Fold the wiper arms back again before
switching on the ignition.
Operation
Cleaning the headlamps
X Clean the plastic lenses of the headlamps
with a wet sponge and windscreen washer
fluid or cleaning cloths.
! Only use washer fluid or cleaning cloths
suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
washer fluid or cleaning cloths could
camera lens :.
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps. ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the reversing camera with a high-
Cleaning the sensors* pressure cleaner.
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes

Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. Reg-
ular care of the exhaust tail pipes will ensure
that their original shine is restored.
! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with
alkaline-based cleaning agents such as
wheel cleaner.
X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome
care product approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Trailer coupling*
The ball coupling must be cleaned if it
becomes dirty or corroded.
X Remove any rust using a wire brush.
X Clean sensors : for the driving systems
X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or
with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
a brush.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 204

204 Care
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a high- Interior care

pressure cleaner. Do not use solvents.
Cleaning the steering wheel boss and
dashboard
G Risk of injury
When cleaning the steering wheel boss and
dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or
cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning
agents containing solvents cause the surface
to become porous, and as a result plastic
Operation
parts may break away and be thrown around

the interior when an airbag is deployed which
may result in severe injuries.
: Ball neck head
; Locking balls X Wipe the dashboard and steering wheel
= Guide pin boss with a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a
microfibre cloth) and cleaning agent.
? Guide faces
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
A Release lever
products recommended and approved by
B Protective cap Mercedes-Benz.
X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease posi-
tions : to B and the ball coupling recess Cleaning the COMAND display
of the vehicle. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that
X Treat the lock under protective cap B with it is switched off and has cooled down.
an acid and resin-free oil. X Clean the display surface using a commer-
X Check that the vehicle's trailer coupling is cially-available microfibre cloth and TFT/
working properly. LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-
! Observe the note on care provided by the
trailer manufacturer. fibre cloth.
! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-
i Maintenance of the ball coupling and
lowing:
trailer coupling can also be performed by
Ralcohol-based solvents or petrol
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household clean-
Dispose of oily and greasy cloths in an envi-
ronmentally-responsible manner. ing agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not exert pressure when cleaning the dis-
play surface as this may lead to irreversible
damage.
Cleaning the seat covers

! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen-
uine leather, artificial leather or
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 205

Care 205
Alcantara® covers, as these are too aggres- vehicle's high-quality trim and help retain
sive and, if used often, may damage the its overall appearance.
cover.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
! Clean: cloth (e.g. a microfibre cloth).
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
Rgenuine leather covers with a damp
products recommended and approved by
cloth, then wipe the covers down with a
Mercedes-Benz.
dry cloth. Make sure that the leather
does not become soaked. For leather
care, use a leather care agent recom- Cleaning the wooden trim* and trim
mended by Mercedes-Benz. You can strips
Operation
obtain information about this from any X Wipe the wooden trim and trim strips with
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. a damp, lint-free cloth (e.g. a microfibre
Rartificial leather covers with a cloth mois- cloth).
tened with a solution containing 1% X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). products recommended and approved by
Rcloth covers with a microfibre cloth mois- Mercedes-Benz.
tened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. washing-up liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning
results depend on the type of dirt and
how long it has been there.
RAlcantara® covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure you wipe entire seat sections
to avoid leaving visible lines.
i Note that regular care is essential to

ensure that the quality (both appearance
and comfort) of the covers is retained over
time.
Cleaning the plastic trim

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-
ces:
Rstickers
Rfilms
Rscented oil bottles or similar items

You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Ensure that cosmetics, insect repellent

and suntan lotion do not come into contact
with the vehicle's trim. This will protect the
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 206

206
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 207

207
Where will I find...? ........................... 208

Display messages ............................. 211
Troubleshooting ................................ 233
Locking/unlocking in an emer-
gency ................................................. 250
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO
head restraints .................................. 252
Replacing batteries (key and
remote control) ................................. 253
Changing bulbs ................................. 254
Replacing the wiper blades .............. 261
Practical advice
Flat tyre ............................................. 262
Battery ............................................... 272
Jump-starting .................................... 276
Towing and tow-starting .................. 277
Fuses .................................................. 280
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 208

208 Where will I find...?
Where will I find...? Setting up the warning triangle

Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the stowage
space under the luggage compartment floor.
X Fold feet = down and out to the side.

Practical advice
X Pull side reflectors ; up to form a triangle

and lock them at the top using press-
stud :.
X Pull release handle ;.
X Fold luggage compartment floor :
upwards. First-aid kit
i Check the expiry date of the first-aid kit
Removing the warning triangle annually, and replace the contents when
necessary.
The first-aid kit is located behind the side trim
in the luggage compartment.
X Remove warning triangle :.
X Open the side trim (Y page 259).

X Remove first-aid kit :.
Fire extinguisher*
i Have the fire extinguisher refilled after
each use and checked every two years.
Otherwise, it may fail in an emergency.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 209

Where will I find...? 209
Observe the legal requirements in all coun- Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being
tries concerned. supported by the jack. If you do not raise the
The fire extinguisher is located underneath vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack
the front of the driver's seat. (e.g. if the engine is started or if a door or the
tailgate is opened or closed) and you could be
seriously injured.
i When using the jack, you should also

observe the safety notes in the "Flat tyre"
section (Y page 262).
X Open the luggage compartment floor
(Y page 208).
Practical advice
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit/exterior
spare wheel bracket*
X Pull tab : upwards.
X Remove fire extinguisher ;.
Vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT, jack and

"Minispare" emergency spare
wheel*
The vehicle tool kit, TIREFIT, jack and
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel are in the
stowage space under the luggage compart-
ment floor.
: TIREFIT kit28*
G Risk of injury ; Electric air pump28
The jack is designed only to raise and hold the = Centring pin
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
? Safety net
changed.
A folding wheel chock
You must use axle stands if you are carrying
out work on the vehicle. B Ratchet ring spanner
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm, C Wheel wrench
non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden D Warning triangle
blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. E Jack29
Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve F Fuse allocation chart
its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted
G Towing eye
height.
Do not start the engine at any time while a
wheel is being changed.
28 Not on vehicles with an exterior spare wheel bracket.

29 Depending on the date of production of the vehicle, the appearance and stowage location of the jack as well
as the other tools may differ from the illustrations.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 210

210 Where will I find...?
Exterior spare wheel bracket* X Remove safety net :.
G Risk of injury
The spare wheel is heavy. Make sure that
nobody is injured as you remove the spare
wheel.
On vehicles with an exterior spare wheel

bracket, the spare wheel is located outside
the vehicle behind the tailgate.
i If the vehicle is fitted with mixed tyres, the
spare wheel is the same type as on the front
wheels. : Jack30
Practical advice
; TIREFIT kit31*
= Towing eye
? Electric air pump
A Ratchet ring spanner
B Warning triangle
C EASY-PACK load-securing kit*
D Folding wheel chock
E Centring pin
F Wheel wrench
X Unscrew and remove screws : with the Vehicles with a "Minispare" emer-
wheel wrench. gency spare wheel*
X Remove the spare wheel from the spare
wheel bracket.
Vehicles with BlueTEC
: Centring pin
; Towing eye
= Wheel wrench
? Ratchet ring spanner
: Safety net
30 Depending on the date of production of the vehicle, the appearance and stowage location of the jack as well
as the other tools may differ from the illustrations.
31 Not for vehicles with an exterior spare wheel bracket.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 211

Display messages 211
A Velcro fastener Please respond in accordance with the dis-

B Jack play messages and follow the additional
notes in this Owner's Manual.
C Wheel bolts
D Folding wheel chock G Risk of accident
E Fuse allocation chart No further messages can be displayed if the
F Stowage well instrument cluster and/or the multi-function
display fails.
G Warning triangle
This means that you will not see information
Removing the "Minispare" emergency about the driving situation, such as the speed,
spare wheel* outside temperature, warning/indicator
lamps, display messages or system failures.
The vehicle's handling characteristics may be
Practical advice
affected. Adjust your driving style and speed
accordingly.
Immediately consult a qualified specialist
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Remove the warning triangle and jack.
X Turn emergency spare wheel retainer : Calling up display messages
anti-clockwise and remove it.
X Remove the insert.
The on-board computer saves certain display
messages, which you can call up.
X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel.
repeatedly, until either the original menu or
the message memory menu is shown.
Display messages If there are display messages, the multi-
function display shows, e.g. 2 messages.
Notes X Using & or * scroll through the dis-
play messages.
G Risk of accident
The on-board computer only records and dis-
plays malfunctions and warnings from certain Hiding display messages
systems. For this reason, you should always You cannot hide display messages of the
make sure that your vehicle is safe to use. You highest priority. The multi-function display
could otherwise cause an accident by driving shows these messages continuously until
an unsafe vehicle. their causes have been remedied.
Certain display messages are accompanied Use the buttons on the multi-function steer-
by a warning tone or a continuous tone. ing wheel.
The multi-function display shows high-priority X Use the V, U, & or * button
display messages in red. on the steering wheel to select another dis-
play.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 212

212 Display messages
The following tables contain all the display

messages.
Text messages
The operating safety of your vehicle could be compromised if service work is carried out improp-
erly. You could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident. Safety systems may also not
be able to protect you or others as intended.
Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The workshop must
have the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-
Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular,
Practical advice
work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

120 km/h Maximum The maximum speed has been exceeded32.
speed X Drive more slowly.
exceeded
ABS ABS, ESP G Risk of accident
unavaila‐
ble See ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability
Owner's Program) and therefore also PRE-SAFE® are temporarily
Manual unavailable. The self diagnosis function might not be com-
plete, for example.
BAS (Brake Assist) is also deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without
the functions listed above.
X Carefully drive a short, gently winding stretch of road at a
speed above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, ABS and ESP® are avail-
able again.
G Risk of accident
ABS, ESP® and therefore also PRE-SAFE® are unavailable due
to undervoltage. BAS has also been deactivated.
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 213


ABS ABS, ESP G Risk of accident
inopera‐
tive See ABS, ESP® and therefore also PRE-SAFE® are unavailable due
Owner's to a malfunction. BAS has also been deactivated.
Manual The brake system continues to function normally, but without
Refill See Own‐ The AdBlue® level has fallen below the reserve range. A warn-
AdBlue at er's Man‐ ing tone also sounds.
Practical advice
workshop ual X Have the AdBlue® reservoir filled as soon as possible at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Refill No start The AdBlue® level is only sufficient for the indicated route. A
AdBlue at in: XXXX warning tone also sounds.
workshop km X Have the AdBlue® reservoir filled as soon as possible at a
Refill Engine The AdBlue® tank is empty. A warning tone also sounds. You
AdBlue at start not can no longer start the engine.
workshop possible X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Check See Own‐ The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also
AdBlue er's Man‐ sounds.
ual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
AdBlue No start The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

in: XXXX sounds.
km X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
AdBlue Engine The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. A warning tone also

start not sounds. You can no longer start the engine.
possible X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Auxiliary Malfunc‐ The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no lon-
battery tion ger being charged.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P
before you switch off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 214


DISTRONIC - - - km/h An activation condition for Distronic* is not fulfilled.
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store
the speed (Y page 119).
or
X Check the activation conditions for Dis-
tronic* (Y page 119).
DISTRONIC Override Distronic* is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC inopera‐ Distronic* is faulty or the display has failed.

Practical advice
tive X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC currently Distronic* is deactivated and is temporarily inoperative if:

unavaila‐ Rthe Distronic* cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
ble See
Owner's Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Manual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due
to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Rthe radar sensor system has not detected any vehicles or
stationary objects, e.g. traffic signs, for a long time.
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Distronic* becomes available again and the display message
disappears when:
Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while you are driving.
Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available
again.
Rthe system is within the operating temperature range.
If the display message continues to be shown:
X Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator grille
(Y page 203).
X Restart the engine.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 215


ESP unavaila‐ G Risk of accident
ble See
Owner's ESP® and therefore also PRE-SAFE® are temporarily unavail-
Manual able. The self diagnosis function might not be complete, for
example. BAS has also been deactivated.
X Carefully drive a short, gently winding stretch of road at a
speed above 20 km/h.
If the display message disappears, ESP® is available again.
G Risk of accident
ESP® and therefore also BAS and PRE-SAFE® are unavailable
Practical advice
due to undervoltage.
If the display message is shown during the journey and the

d warning lamp is flashing, then 4ETS (Electronic Traction
System) is deactivated. Otherwise, the brakes on the drive
wheels could overheat.
X Let the brakes cool down until the display message disap-
pears and the d warning lamp goes out.
4ETS is activated again.
ESP inopera‐ G Risk of accident

tive See
Owner's ESP® and therefore also Brake Assist and PRE-SAFE® are
Manual unavailable due to a malfunction. The d warning lamp also
lights up in the instrument cluster.
Select only when The vehicle is moving.

position P vehicle X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to
is at a road and traffic conditions.
standstill X
Move the selector lever to P.
Vehicle not in The driver's door is open and the automatic transmission is
position P in position R, N or D.
X Move the selector lever to P.
X Engage the parking brake.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 216


Child See Own‐ G Risk of injury
seat in er's Man‐
wrong ual Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition* on the front-
position passenger seat: the child seat is incorrectly positioned.
X Fit the child seat in the correct position.
G Risk of injury
Vehicles with automatic child seat recognition* on the front-
passenger seat: the child seat recognition sensor is faulty.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Practical advice
Compass unavaila‐ The compass* is malfunctioning.

ble X Have the compass* checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Compass - - - The compass* is not calibrated.

X Calibrate the compass* (Y page 167).
Compass - - - The compass* is malfunctioning because of exterior interfer-

ence.
As soon as the source of the interference has been removed:
X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove
it.
X Wait until the total distance recorder has disappeared from
the multi-function display.
X Calibrate the compass* (Y page 167).
No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the operational readiness symbol appears in the
multi-function display (Y page 111).
Drive to without You cannot change the transmission position due to a mal-
workshop changing function.
gear If transmission position D is selected:
X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the
transmission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 217


P To start You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission
the in position R or D.
engine, X Shift the automatic transmission to P or N.
shift to
either P
or N
Depress position P X Depress the brake pedal.
brake to
shift out
of
Practical advice
PRE-SAFE inopera‐ G Risk of injury
tive See
Owner's Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occu-
Manual pant safety systems, e.g. airbags, remain available.
Tyre pres‐ inopera‐ The tyre pressure monitor* is malfunctioning.

sure moni‐ tive X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheels checked at a
tor qualified specialist workshop.
Tyre pres‐ inopera‐ The fitted wheels do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors.
sure moni‐ tive No The tyre pressure monitor* is deactivated.
tor wheel sen‐ X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
sors The tyre pressure monitor* is activated automatically after
driving for a few minutes.
Tyre pres‐ Wheel sen‐ The tyre pressure monitor* is not receiving signals from one
sure moni‐ sor miss‐ or more wheels because:
tor ing Ra wheel without a suitable tyre pressure sensor has been
fitted, e.g. the emergency wheel*.
Rthe battery on one of the wheel electronics unit is dis-
charged.
Ra wheel electronics unit has malfunctioned.
A line is displayed in the multi-function display for the affected
tyre instead of the tyre pressure value.
X Have the tyre pressure monitor* and wheels checked at a
If wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors are fitted, the
tyre pressures appear in the multi-function display after
driving for a few minutes.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 218


Tyre pres‐ currently No sensor signals can be received due to radio interference.
sure moni‐ unavaila‐ The tyre pressure monitor* is temporarily malfunctioning.
tor ble X Drive on.
The tyre pressure monitor* restarts automatically as soon
as the problem has been solved.
Tyre pres‐ Check G Risk of accident

sure tyres
The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a signif-
icant loss in pressure.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or
Practical advice
braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as

you do so.
X Check the tyres.
X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pres-
sure (Y page 180).
X If necessary, repair any defective tyres or change the wheel
(Y page 262).
X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system once the tyre
pressure is correct (Y page 182).
Check then A tyre pressure loss warning system display message

tyres, restart appeared.
Run Flat X Correct the tyre pressure on all tyres (Y page 180).
Indicator X Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system
(Y page 182).
Run Flat inopera‐ The tyre pressure loss warning system is faulty.
Indicator tive X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Please tyre pres‐ Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*:

correct sures There is insufficient pressure in one or more tyres or the tyre
pressures on individual wheels differ too much.
X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If neces-
sary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 180).
Cruise inopera‐ Speedtronic and cruise control are faulty.

control tive X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
and SPEED‐
TRONIC
DISTRONIC inopera‐ Distronic* and Speedtronic are malfunctioning.
and SPEED‐ tive X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
TRONIC
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 219


Cruise - - - km/h A condition for activating cruise control has not been met.
control X Activate ESP® (Y page 52)
X If conditions permit, drive faster than 30 km/h and store
the speed (Y page 117).
Symbol messages
Practical advice
workshop.
E The tailgate is open.

X Close the tailgate.
G Risk of accident
Vehicles with an anti-theft alarm system*:
The bonnet is open.
X Stop immediately, paying attention to road and traffic con-
ditions.
X Close the bonnet.
; At least one door is open.

X Close the doors.
? The engine fan is faulty.

X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can
continue driving to the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop/start driving.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 220

# The battery is not being charged.

Possible causes are:
Ra faulty alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the
engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
Practical advice
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise over-
heat.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
# Battery/
Alterna‐
The battery is faulty.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to
tor Stop road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under
vehicle any circumstances.
# Brake wear The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
J EBV, ABS,
ESP inop‐
G Risk of accident
EBV (Electronic Brake Force Distribution), ABS (Anti-lock
erative
See Own‐ Brake System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) and there-
er's Man‐ fore PRE-SAFE® are unavailable due to a fault. BAS (Brake
ual Assist) is also deactivated.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 221

J Check
brake
G Risk of accident
There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
fluid
level X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not con-
tinue driving under any circumstances.
X Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault.
! Release
parking
You are driving with the parking brake applied.
X Release the parking brake.
Practical advice
brake
+ Restraint
sys. mal‐
G Risk of injury
The restraint systems are faulty.
function
Consult X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
workshop
· Clean
fuel fil‐
There is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained
off33.
ter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
° Level
selection
You cannot change the vehicle level, because:
Ryou are exceeding the permissible speed for the selected
not per‐ vehicle level
mitted
Ryou are towing a trailer
Rthe socket of the trailer coupling is in use, e.g. by a cycle
rack
X Drive slower and reselect the desired vehicle level.
X Observe the notes on trailer towing (Y page 196).
° Compres‐
sor cool‐
You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first
needs to cool down because of frequent level changes.
ing down X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level.
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Allow the compressor to cool down.
When the compressor has cooled down, the display mes-
sage disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the
selected level.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 222

° Malfunc‐
tion
The level control has malfunctioned.
X Drive as appropriate for the current vehicle level, but do not
exceed 80 km/h.
X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
° Rising The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3. The display

20 km/h max. message indicates the maximum speed allowed for off-road
level 3.
X Do not exceed a maximum speed of 20 km/h.
Practical advice
° 20 km/h max. You are driving in off-road level 3. The display message indi-
cates the maximum speed allowed for off-road level 3.
Æ being low‐ The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road
ered level 2. The display message indicates the maximum speed
20 km/h max. allowed for off-road level 3.
X Do not drive faster than 20 km/h until the vehicle has
reached off-road level 2.
Æ Bring
speed
G Risk of accident
You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-
below
road level.
20 km/h
X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling character-
istics.
X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steer-
ing movements.
X Be aware of the altered handling characteristics.
8 Locking
system
The differential locks are faulty.
inopera‐ X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist work-
tive Con‐
shop.
sult work‐
shop
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 223

8 Diff.
lock sys‐
The differential locks are too hot and have been disengaged.
tem over‐ X Allow the differential locks to cool down.
heated.
The differential locks reengage as soon as they have cooled
Wait
down.
briefly.
Ã inopera‐
tive
DSR is deactivated due to a malfunction.
X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
8 Stop vehi‐ A gearshift process has been cancelled. LOW RANGE is in the
cle Apply neutral position. There is no connection between the engine
Practical advice
parking and the drive wheels.
brake X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions.
X Depress the parking brake firmly. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Repeat the shift process.
Å Consult
workshop
The LOW RANGE system is malfunctioning.
If X Firmly depress the parking brake to park.
parked,
X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist work-
apply pk.
brake shop.
Å max.
speed
You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift
process.
70 km/h X Drive more slowly.
The gearshift process is carried out.
Å max.
speed
You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift
process.
40 km/h X Drive more slowly.
The gearshift process is carried out.
Å Engage N
briefly
You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic trans-
mission is not in the N position.
X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.
Å Shifting
process
The gearshift process has been cancelled.
X Repeat the shift process.
cancelled
Reactivate
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 224

? Coolant The coolant is too hot.

Stop car, X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the
turn engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
engine off X
Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by slush.
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting
the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display
(Y page 100).
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified special-
Practical advice
ist workshop immediately.
The poly-V-belt may have torn.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the
engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Open the bonnet.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise over-
heat.
If the poly-V-belt is OK:
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting
the engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display
(Y page 100).
+ Top up
coolant
The coolant level is too low.
X Top up the coolant, observing the warning notes before
See Own‐ doing so (Y page 177).
er's Man‐ X Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified spe-
ual
cialist workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often
than usual.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 225

D Power
steering
G Risk of accident
There is no power assistance for the steering. You will need
malfunc‐
to use more force to steer.
tion See
Owner's X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force
Manual required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact
the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Practical advice
Left-hand The left-hand or right-hand cornering lamp* is faulty.
Cornering X Change the bulb (Y page 254).
light
or
Right-
hand Cor‐
nering
light
b Left-hand
dipped
The left-hand or right-hand dipped-beam headlamp is faulty.
X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 254).
beam X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
or
Right-
hand
dipped
beam
b AUTO
lights
The light sensor is faulty.
inopera‐
tive
b Trailer
Left-hand
The left-hand or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is faulty.
X Change the bulb.
turn sig‐
nal
or
Trailer
Right-
hand turn
signal
b Trailer The trailer brake lamp is faulty.

brake lamp X Change the bulb.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 226

b Trailer
Left-hand
The left-hand or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.
X Change the bulb.
tail lamp
or
Trailer
Right-
hand tail
lamp
b Turn sig‐
nal, rear
The rear left-hand or right-hand turn signal is faulty.
X Change the bulb (Y page 254).
left
Practical advice
or
Turn sig‐
nal, rear
right
b Turn sig‐
nal in
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror
is faulty. The display message will only appear if all LEDs have
mirror, failed.
left X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
or
Turn sig‐
nal in
mirror,
right
b Turn sig‐ The front left-hand or right-hand turn signal is faulty.

nal, X Change the bulb (Y page 254).
front left
or
Turn sig‐
nal,
front
right
b Left-hand The left-hand or right-hand brake lamp is faulty.

brake lamp X Change the bulb (Y page 254).
or
Right-
hand
brake lamp
b 3rd brake
lamp
The third brake lamp is faulty. The display message will only
appear if all LEDs have failed.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 227

b Main The left-hand or right-hand main beam headlamp is faulty.

beam, left X Halogen headlamp: replace the bulb (Y page 254).
or X Bi-xenon headlamp*: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Main
beam,
right
b Licence
plate
The left-hand or right-hand licence plate lamp is faulty.
lamp, left
or
Licence
Practical advice
plate
lamp,
right
b Switch The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle.
off lights X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã.
or
X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in
to the stop.
b Front fog‐ The front left-hand or right-hand foglamp is faulty.

lamp, left X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
or
Front fog‐
lamp,
right
b Rear left- The left-hand or right-hand rear foglamp is faulty.

hand fog‐ X Change the bulb (Y page 259).
lamp
or
Rear
right-
hand fog‐
lamp
b Parking
lamp,
The front left-hand or right-hand parking lamp is faulty.
front left
or
Parking
lamp,
front
right
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 228

b Reversing The left-hand or right-hand reversing lamp is faulty.

lamp, left X Change the bulb (Y page 254).
or
Reversing
lamp,
right
b Left-hand
tail lamp
The left-hand or right-hand tail lamp is faulty.
or
Right-
hand tail
Practical advice
lamp
b Left day‐ The left or right daytime driving lamp is faulty.

time driv‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ing lamp
or
Right
daytime
driving
lamp
¸ Replace
air
The engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced.33
cleaner
element
4 Check
engine
The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 176).
oil level X
If necessary, top up the engine oil.
when next
X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs
refuelling
topping up more often than usual.
4 Add
1 litre
The oil level is too low33.
X Check the engine oil level (Y page 176).
engine
X If necessary, top up the engine oil.
oil when
next refu‐ X Have the engine checked for leaks if the engine oil needs
elling topping up more often than usual.

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 229

4 Engine The oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.
oil level X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to
Stop car, road and traffic conditions.
turn X Switch off the engine.
engine off
X Top up the engine oil and check the level (Y page 176).
4 Engine
oil level
You have added too much engine oil33. There is a risk of dam-
age to the engine or to the catalytic converter.
Reduce X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the specified level.
oil level Observe the legal requirements.
Practical advice
4 Engine
oil level
The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level or the
measuring system is malfunctioning.33
Consult X Check the engine oil level (Y page 176).
workshop
If the engine oil level is OK:
If the engine oil level is not OK:
X Top up the engine oil.
X If the warning message disappears: consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X If the warning message does not disappear: keep the vehi-
cle at a standstill and notify a qualified specialist workshop.
4 Engine
oil level
The measuring system is malfunctioning33.
cannot be
measured
h Tyre pres‐ G Risk of accident

sure Cau‐
The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly.
tion,
The affected wheel is highlighted in the tyre pressure display
tyre
defect of the tyre pressure monitor*.
you do so.
X Repair the faulty tyre or replace the wheel (Y page 262).
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 230

h Tyre pres‐ G Risk of accident

sure
The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped signifi-
Check
cantly. The affected wheel is highlighted in the tyre pressure
tyres
display of the tyre pressure monitor*.
you do so.
X Check the tyres.
X If necessary, repair any defective tyres or change the wheel
(Y page 262).
Practical advice
X Check the tyre pressure. If necessary, correct the tyre pres-

sure (Y page 180).
The display message will disappear automatically after you
have been driving for a few minutes with the corrected tyre
pressure.
h Please
correct
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitor*: the pressure is insuffi-
cient in at least one of the tyres or the pressure difference
tyre pres‐ between the individual tyres is too great.
sure(s) X Check the tyre pressures at the next opportunity. If neces-
sary, correct the tyre pressure (Y page 180).
+ Change
key bat‐
The KEYLESS GO* key batteries are discharged.
X Change the batteries (Y page 253).
teries
+ Key does
not
You have put the wrong key in the ignition lock.
X Use the correct key.
belong to
vehicle
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 231

+ Key not
detected
The KEYLESS GO key* is not in the vehicle.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
(red display centrally or start the engine.
message)
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Locate the KEYLESS GO key*.
The KEYLESS GO key* is not detected while the engine is

running because there is interference from a strong source of
radio waves.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible,
Practical advice
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Operate the vehicle using the key in the ignition lock if nec-
essary.
+ Key not
detected
The KEYLESS GO* key cannot be detected at present.
X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS GO func-
(white dis- tion* in the vehicle.
play mes-
X If the key with the KEYLESS GO* function still cannot be
sage)
detected: operate the vehicle with the key in the ignition
lock.
+ Key detec‐ The KEYLESS GO key* has been detected inside the vehicle
ted in during locking.
vehicle X Remove the KEYLESS GO key* from the vehicle.
+ You need
a new key
The key must be replaced.
+ <Remove
starting
The KEYLESS GO* key cannot be detected continuously.
X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
button, position.
then
insert key
& inopera‐
tive Bat‐
The on-board voltage is too low. The auxiliary heating/venti-
lation* has switched off or cannot be switched on.
tery weak X Drive for a longer distance.
The battery is being charged. The auxiliary heating/venti-
lation* can be reactivated as soon as there is sufficient on-
board voltage.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 232

& Inopera‐
tive
The fuel level in the fuel tank is too low. The auxiliary heat-
ing* cannot be switched on.
Refuel X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
vehicle
& inopera‐
tive See
The auxiliary heating* is temporarily malfunctioning or is
defective.
Owner's X When the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has
Manual cooled down, make up to four attempts to switch on the
auxiliary heating*, waiting several minutes between each
attempt.
Practical advice
X If the auxiliary heating* does not switch on, visit a qualified

C There is only a small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
8 Reserve
fuel
The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. The opera-
tion of the auxiliary heating* can no longer be guaranteed.
~ Please
enter PIN
You have not yet logged on to your mobile phone*.
X Enter the PIN for the SIM card.
~ Bluetooth
ready
The Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and
the audio system or COMAND APS* is not activated.
X If desired, activate the Bluetooth connection between the
mobile phone and the audio system or COMAND APS* (see
separate operating instructions).
~ No tele‐
phone
Your mobile phone is not inserted in the bracket*.
X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket* (Y page 164).
inserted
¥ Top up
washer
The washer fluid level has dropped to approximately ⅓ of the
total reservoir capacity.
fluid X Top up the windscreen washer fluid (Y page 178).
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 233

Troubleshooting 233
Troubleshooting
Points to remember
workshop.
Practical advice
Warning and indicator lamps in switches and buttons
Problem Possible causes/consequences and X Solutions

One or all of the indica- The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are
tor lamps in the seat switched on.
ventilation* button are X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. rear window
flashing. The seat ven- heating or interior lighting.
tilation* has switched Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation*
off automatically. will switch back on automatically.
One or all of the indica- The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are
tor lamps in the seat switched on.
heating* button are X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. rear window
flashing. The seat heat- heating or interior lighting.
ing* has switched off Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation*
automatically. will switch back on automatically.
The steering wheel The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are
heating* indicator lamp switched on. The steering wheel heating* has switched off auto-
on the lower left lever of matically.
the steering column is X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. rear window
flashing. heating or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel
heating* will switch back on automatically.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 234

234 Troubleshooting

The indicator lamp in Cooling has been deactivated due to a malfunction.
the Á button on the X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
2-zone automatic air
conditioning
Thermatic/multi-zone
intelligent automatic
air conditioning
Thermotronic* control
panel is lit. The cooling
system cannot be
switched on.
Practical advice
The indicator lamp in The on-board voltage is too low, because too many consumers are
the ª rear-window switched on.
heating button is flash- X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. seat heating*
ing. The rear-window or interior lighting.
heating has switched Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window heating
off prematurely or can- will switch back on automatically.
not be switched on.
Vehicles with auto- A special Mercedes-Benz child seat with automatic child seat rec-
matic child seat recog- ognition has been fitted to the front-passenger seat. The front-
nition on the front- passenger airbag has therefore been disabled as desired.
passenger seat*:
The 4 PASSENGER G Risk of injury
AIRBAG OFF warning There is no child seat fitted to the front-passenger seat. The auto-
lamp on the centre con- matic child seat recognition* is malfunctioning.
sole is lit. X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat,
for example:
Rnotebook
Rmobile phone
Rcards with transponders, e.g. ski passes or access passes
If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF warning lamp is still lit:
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 235

Troubleshooting 235
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

! The yellow ABS G Risk of accident
warning lamp is
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a fault. ABS
lit while the
engine is run- (Anti-lock Brake System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ning. and also PRE-SAFE® are therefore temporarily unavailable.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. Therefore, the wheels could lock if you
brake hard.
X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
(Y page 211).
Practical advice
! The yellow ABS G Risk of accident

warning lamp is
The on-board voltage is too low. ABS has been deactivated due to
lit while the
undervoltage.
engine is run-
ning. Therefore, ESP®, BAS and PRE-SAFE® are also deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. Therefore, the wheels could lock if you
brake hard.
X Switch off consumers that are not required, e.g. rear window
heating or interior lighting.
ABS will be available again as soon as the vehicle's electrical
system voltage increases.
d The yellow ESP® G Risk of accident
J warning lamp,
! the red brake EBV is faulty. ABS, Brake Assist, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are there-
fore no longer available. The brake system continues to function
system warning
normally, but without the functions listed above. Therefore, the
lamp and the
wheels could lock if you brake hard.
yellow ABS
warning lamp X Drive on carefully.
light up while the X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
engine is run-
ning. A warning
tone also
sounds.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 236

236 Troubleshooting

warning lamp
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
flashes while the
skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
vehicle is in
motion. Cruise control or Distronic* is deactivated.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
pulling away.
X Release the accelerator pedal while you are driving.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP®.
Practical advice
Exceptions: (Y page 52)

warning lamp is
ESP® is deactivated. ESP® will not stabilise the vehicle if it starts
lit while the
to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
engine is run-
ning. X Reactivate ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 52)

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

warning lamp is
ESP® is unavailable due to a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilise
lit while the
the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
engine is run-
ning. In addition, X Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display
a message (Y page 211).
appears in the X Drive on carefully.
multi-function X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
display.
+ The red SRS G Risk of injury
warning lamp is
There is a malfunction in the restraint system. The airbags or belt
lit while the
tensioners may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event
engine is run-
of an accident, not be triggered at all.
ning.
J The red brake You are driving with the parking brake applied.
system warning X Release the parking brake.
lamp comes on The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
while the vehicle
is moving. A
warning tone
also sounds.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 237

Troubleshooting 237

J The red brake G Risk of accident
system warning
There is insufficient brake fluid in the fluid reservoir.
lamp comes on
while the engine X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
is running. A attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
warning tone under any circumstances.
also sounds. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
(Y page 211).
Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault.
; The yellow
Practical advice
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry.
engine diagnos- X Start the engine three to four times after refuelling.
tics warning Emergency running mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not be
lamp lights up checked.
while the engine
is running.
; The yellow There may be a fault, for example:
engine diagnos- Rin the engine management
tics warning
Rin the ignition system
lamp lights up
while the engine Rin the exhaust system
is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with petrol engines)
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine can
run in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
h The yellow tyre G Risk of accident
pressure moni-
The tyre pressure monitor* has detected a sudden or significant
tor* warning
pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
lamp is on.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
manoeuvres. Pay attention to traffic conditions as you do so.
(Y page 211).
The warning light will go out after the flat tyre has been changed
and you have been driving for a few minutes.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 238

238 Troubleshooting

7 The red seat belt The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
warning lamp to fasten their seat belts.
lights up for 6 X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 75).
seconds after
the engine is
started34.
7 After the engine G Risk of injury
starts, a warning
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
tone sounds for
up to 6 sec- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 75).
34 The warning tone ceases.
Practical advice
onds .
7 The red seat belt G Risk of injury
warning lamp
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
lights up after
the engine X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 75).
starts, as soon The warning lamp goes out.
as the driver's
door or the G Risk of injury
front-passenger There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
door is closed. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them safely.
The warning lamp goes out.
7 The red seat belt G Risk of injury
warning lamp
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. At
flashes and an
the same time, you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly
intermittent
driven faster than 25 km/h.
audible warning
sounds. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 75).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning
ceases.
G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. At the same time,
you are driving faster than 25 km/h or have briefly driven faster
than 25 km/h.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them safely.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warning
ceases.

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 239

Troubleshooting 239

The yellow reserve fuel The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. The operation of
warning lamp lights up the auxiliary heating* can no longer be guaranteed.
while the engine is run- X Refuel at the nearest filling station.
ning.
Warning tones

The anti-theft warning You have opened the vehicle with the anti-theft alarm system still
alarm* is triggered. activated*.
Practical advice
X Switch off the alarm (Y page 54).
You hear a warning A message appears in the multi-function display.

tone. X See the explanations for the display message (Y page 211).
You are driving with the parking brake applied.

X Release the parking brake.
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle.
X Turn the light switch to $ or Ã.
or
X If the rear foglamp is switched on: press the light switch in to
the stop.
G Risk of injury
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 75).
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 240

240 Troubleshooting
Accident

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of fire
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank has been damaged. The leaking fuel
creates a risk of fire or explosion.
X Switch off the ignition immediately.
X Remove the ignition key.
Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. The leaking
fuel creates a risk of fire or explosion.
Practical advice
You are unable to X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

determine the extent of
the damage.
You cannot detect any X Start the engine as normal.
damage.
The NECK-PRO head Your vehicle has been involved in a rear-end collision.
restraints/NECK-PRO X Reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
luxury head restraints* restraints* (Y page 252).
on the driver's and the
front-passenger's seat
have been triggered.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 241

Troubleshooting 241
Fuel and fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of explosion or fire
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.
X Turn the key to position 0 (Y page 63) in the ignition lock imme-
diately and remove it.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not released.
not be opened. Or:
Practical advice
The key batteries are discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 250).
X Open the tailgate (Y page 61).
X Manually unlock the tailgate using the emergency release
(Y page 251).
The fuel filler flap is released, but the opening mechanism is jam-
med.
X Release the fuel filler flap by hand (Y page 251).
The fuel tank in a vehi- There is air in the fuel system.

cle with a diesel engine X Refuel the vehicle (at least 5 litres).
has been run com- X Turn the ignition on for at least 10 seconds. Turn the key to
pletely dry and the
position 2 (Y page 63) in the ignition lock.
engine will not start.
X Start the engine continuously for up to 10 seconds until it runs
smoothly.
If the engine does not start:
X Turn the ignition on again for at least 10 seconds. Turn the key
to position 2 (Y page 63) in the ignition lock.
X Start the engine again continuously for up to 10 seconds until
it runs smoothly.
If the engine does not start after three attempts:
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 242

242 Troubleshooting
Engine

The engine will not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. You can hear the RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
starter motor operat-
RThe on-board voltage is too low because the starter battery is
ing.
too weak or discharged.
X Before the next start attempt, turn the key back to position 0
(Y page 63) in the ignition lock or press the Start/Stop but-
ton* until all the indicator lights in the instrument cluster have
gone out.
Practical advice
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 88). When doing so,
remember that excessively long and frequent attempts to start
the engine will drain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
The engine will not The fuel tank has been run dry.
start. You can hear the X Refuel the vehicle.
starter motor operat-
ing. The reserve fuel
warning lamp is on and
the fuel gauge
shows 0.
The engine will not The on-board voltage is too low because the starter battery is too
start. You cannot hear weak or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 276).
If the engine does not start despite attempting to jump-start it:
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 243

Troubleshooting 243

Vehicles with a petrol There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical
engine: component of the engine control unit.
The engine is not run- X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
ning smoothly and is X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist
misfiring. workshop.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
ture gauge shows a is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
value above 120 †. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
Practical advice
You also hear a warning to cool down.
tone. X Check the coolant level (Y page 177). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and top up the coolant if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The
coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled suffi-
ciently.
X If the coolant temperature is less than 120 †, you can continue
driving to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving on
mountain roads and stop/start driving.
The engine does not The ignition lock is faulty.

switch off. X Open the fuse box in the engine compartment (Y page 281).
X Remove fuse 120 using the fuse extractor.
The engine stops.
If you wish to start the engine again:
X Replace the fuse.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 244

244 Troubleshooting
Automatic transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear. X Turn the key in the ignition to position 0 (Y page 63) or press
the Start/Stop button* repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
Practical advice
the instrument cluster go out.

X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
PARKTRONIC*

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched itself off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
warning display are lit. specialist workshop.
You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in
the PARKTRONIC but-
ton lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 203).
warning display are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 245

Troubleshooting 245

Only the red segments The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
in the PARKTRONIC ultrasound waves.
warning display are lit. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds.
Headlamps
Practical advice
The headlamps are mis- Air humidity is very high.
ted up on the inside. X Drive with the headlamps switched on.
The headlamps are demisted after a short distance.
The headlamp housing is not sealed and moisture has been able
to enter.
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windscreen
are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the key from the ignition
lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windscreen wipers back on.
The windscreen wipers G Risk of accident

fail completely.
The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The windscreen washer The spray nozzles are misaligned.

fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-
nozzles no longer hits shop.
the centre of the wind-
screen.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 246

246 Troubleshooting
Side windows

A side window will not Objects are trapped between the window and the door frame.
close. X Remove the objects.
X Close the side window.
There are objects in the window guide rail which are preventing
the side window from closing.
X Remove the objects.
X Close the side window.
Practical advice
You cannot see the cause.

X Close the side window with increased force or without the anti-
entrapment feature (Y page 86).
Mirrors

An exterior mirror has Vehicles with exterior mirrors that cannot be folded in/out elec-
been pushed out of trically:
position. X Move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually.
Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors*:

X Press the mirror-folding button* (Y page 72) repeatedly until
you hear a distinct click.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the
mirror as usual (Y page 72).
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 247

Troubleshooting 247
Key

You cannot lock or The key batteries are discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from close
using the key. range and try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.
If this does not work:
X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element
(Y page 250).
X Check the key batteries and replace them if necessary
(Y page 253).
Practical advice
The key is faulty.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle as described in the "Opening and clos-
ing in an emergency" section (Y page 250).
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock KEYLESS GO* is in standby mode because the vehicle has not
or unlock the vehicle been unlocked for an extended period.
using KEYLESS GO*. X Pull the door handle twice and then insert the key into the igni-
tion lock.
KEYLESS-GO* is malfunctioning.
X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the key. Point the tip of the key at the driver's door handle from
close range and press the %/& button.
X Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle as described in the "Opening and clos-
ing in an emergency" section (Y page 250).
You have lost a key. X Have the key cancelled at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
You have lost the emer- X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
gency key element. X If necessary, have the manual locks changed too.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 248

248 Troubleshooting

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the key. X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating* or inte-
rior lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 272).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 276).
or
Practical advice
The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the key cannot be detected as easily.
started using KEYLESS X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
GO*. The key is in the
vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle using the key in the ignition lock.
Trailer towing*

The ball coupling can- G Risk of accident
not be locked.
The ball coupling is dirty.
The key cannot be
The trailer coupling is damaged.
removed from the ball
coupling. X Remove the ball coupling and clean it (Y page 203). If the ball
coupling still cannot be locked, remove the ball coupling. It must
no longer be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation is not guar-
anteed.
X Have the entire trailer coupling checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 249

Troubleshooting 249
Auxiliary heating/ventilation*

FAIL The starter battery is not charged sufficiently or the system
is faulty.
X Charge the starter battery.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating
using the remote control.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
$ FAIL The signal transmission between the transmitter and the vehi-
Practical advice
cle is faulty.
X Change your position in relation to the vehicle, moving
closer if necessary.
X Make another attempt to switch the auxiliary heating on or
off using the remote control.
© FAIL There is not enough fuel in the fuel tank, or the auxiliary heat-
ing is faulty.
X Make another attempt to switch on the auxiliary heating
using the remote control.
X Have the auxiliary heating checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Parking up the vehicle

The vehicle is to be left The battery can be damaged through exhaustive discharge.
parked up for longer X Disconnect the battery (Y page 273) or connect to a trickle
than four weeks. charger.
i Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
The vehicle is to be left Damage resulting from non-use may occur if the vehicle is parked
parked up for longer up for long periods.
than six weeks. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 250

250 Locking/unlocking in an emergency
Locking/unlocking in an emergency Removing the emergency key element

(vehicles without KEYLESS GO*)
Emergency key element
If you use the emergency key element to
unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-
theft alarm system* will be triggered
(Y page 54).
There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
X Press the % or & button on the key.
or
X Insert the key into the ignition lock.
or
Practical advice
X Press the start/stop button* in the ignition X Push release catch : in the direction of
lock. The key must be in the vehicle. the arrow and at the same time remove
or emergency key element ; from the key.
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS
GO*. The key must be outside the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle
Removing the emergency key element If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked cen-
(vehicles with KEYLESS GO*) trally with the key or KEYLESS GO*:
X Remove the emergency key element from
the key (Y page 250).
X Push release catch : in the direction of

the arrow and at the same time remove
emergency key element ; from the key. X Insert the emergency key element into the
lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.
X Firmly turn the emergency key element
anti-clockwise as far as it will go to position
1 and hold it in this position.
i On right-hand-drive vehicles, turn the
emergency key element clockwise.
X Pull the door handle firmly.
The locking knob pops up.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 251

Locking/unlocking in an emergency 251
The door is unlocked. Unlocking the spare wheel bracket*

X Turn the emergency key element back and
remove it.
X Pull the door handle again.
Locking the vehicle

If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked cen-
trally with the key or KEYLESS GO*:
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
door on the front-passenger side and the
tailgate.
Practical advice
X Take crank : from the glove compart-
X Open the driver’s door and the rear door on
ment.
the driver’s side.
X Press the locking button on the driver’s i You can also use a screwdriver, key or
door (Y page 59). similar implement.
The locking knobs in the front-passenger X Insert crank : into the opening under the
door and in the rear doors drop down.
spare wheel bracket.
X Press the locking knobs in the front-
X Push crank : up in the direction of the
passenger door and in the rear doors down
arrow.
manually, if necessary.
The spare wheel bracket is released.
X Close the driver's door from the outside.
X Press down the locking knob of the driver's
door by reaching in through the open rear Emergency fuel filler flap release
door.
G Risk of injury
i Make sure that you have the vehicle key
The edges on the inside of the vehicle body
on your person and that it is not left in the
can be sharp. You could injure yourself when
vehicle.
using the fuel filler flap emergency release.
X Close the rear door on the driver’s side. Avoid contact with the edges on the inside of
X Check whether the doors and the tailgate the vehicle body.
are locked.
The emergency release is located in the lug-
gage compartment behind the side trim on
the right-hand side, when viewed in the direc-
tion of travel.
X Open the tailgate.
X Open the right-hand side trim panel
(Y page 259).
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 252

252 Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints
X Pull emergency release : in the direction X Tilt the top of the head restraint cushion
of the arrow. forwards in the direction of arrow :.
Practical advice
The fuel filler flap is unlocked. X Push the head restraint cushion down in
X Open the fuel filler flap. the direction of arrow ; as far as it will go.
X Push the head restraint cushion firmly
backwards in the direction of arrow = until
Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head it engages.
restraints X Repeat this procedure for the second head
restraint.
If NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints* have been triggered
in an accident, you must reset the head
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints*
restraints on the driver’s and front-passenger
seat. Otherwise, the additional protection will i If you have problems resetting the head
not be available in the event of another rear- restraints, have this work carried out at a
end collision. You can recognise when head qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
restraints have been triggered by the fact that Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
they have moved forwards and can no longer
be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
head restraints* checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre, if your vehicle is involved in a
rear-end collision.
NECK-PRO head restraints

i This work requires a lot of strength. If you X Remove the resetting tool : from the vehi-
have difficulty resetting the head cle document wallet.
restraints, have this work carried out at a X Insert resetting tool : into guide ;
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
between the head restraint cushion and the
rear cover of the head restraint.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 253

Replacing batteries (key and remote control) 253
X Press resetting tool : downwards until Changing batteries (key with KEYLESS
you hear the head restraint deployment GO*)
mechanism engage.
You require two CR 2025 3 V cell batteries.
X Pull out resetting tool :.
X Firmly press back the head restraint cush-
ion until it engages =.
X Repeat this procedure for the second head
restraint.
Replacing batteries (key and remote

control)
Practical advice
Notes
It is advisable to have the batteries replaced
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a
X Insert emergency key element : into the
G Risk of poisoning opening in the key and push in the direction
Batteries contain toxic and caustic substan- of the arrow.
ces. For this reason, keep batteries away from Battery tray ; is released.
children. X Pull battery tray ; out of the key.
If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor
immediately.
Do not dispose of batteries with the house-
hold rubbish. They contain highly toxic sub-
stances.
Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe-
Service Centre, or to a special collection point
for old batteries.
X Remove old batteries : from the battery
tray.
Key
X Insert the new batteries beneath the con-
Checking the batteries tact spring with the positive pole facing
upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.
X Press the & or % button.
X Push the battery tray back into the key
The batteries are in working order if the
battery charge indicator lamp lights up housing until the battery tray engages.
briefly. X Check the function of all key buttons on the
vehicle.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 254

254 Changing bulbs
Changing a battery (key without KEY- Auxiliary heating* remote control

LESS GO*)
One 6 V pin battery, type 2CR11108 is
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. required.
Practical advice
X Prise apart the side arms of battery

cover ; and pull off battery cover ;.
X Press the emergency key element into the X Remove old battery :.
opening in the key in the direction of X Insert the new battery. Observe the polarity
arrow ; until cover : of the battery tray signs on the back of the remote control
opens. Be sure that your fingers are not when doing so.
stopping the cover from opening. X Slide battery cover ; back onto the
remote control.
X Use the remote control to check the vehi-
cle's auxiliary heating functions.
Changing bulbs
Notes on changing bulbs
i If you need assistance in changing the
bulbs, contact a qualified specialist work-
shop which has the necessary specialist
X Remove the cover of the battery tray. knowledge and tools to carry out the work
X Repeatedly tap the key against your palm required. Mercedes-Benz recommends
until battery = falls out of the key. that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
X Insert the new battery with the positive Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
do so. tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
X Insert the front tabs of the battery tray's cialist workshop.
cover first and then press to close it. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
X Check the function of all key buttons on the vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
vehicle. that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp settings checked regu-
larly. Only use the types of bulbs specified
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 255

Changing bulbs 255
here. If the new bulb still does not light up, they are very hot. You should therefore wear
consult a qualified specialist workshop. eye protection and gloves when you are
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with changing them.
your bare hands. Even minor contamination
can burn into the glass surface and reduce G Risk of injury
the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint- Xenon bulbs are under high voltage. You could
free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb get an electric shock and be seriously or even
when fitting. fatally injured if you touch the electric con-
tacts on xenon bulbs. Therefore, do not
G Risk of injury remove the cover on xenon bulbs.
Bulbs and lights can become very hot. For this
Do not change xenon bulbs yourself, but have
reason, allow them to cool down before
them replaced at a qualified specialist work-
changing the bulb. Otherwise you could burn
shop which has the necessary specialist
Practical advice
yourself when you touch them.
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Oth- required.
erwise, they could damage them, for example,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
and injure themselves.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur-
Never use a bulb which has been dropped. pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
Such a bulb may explode and injure you. on safety-related systems must be carried out
Halogen bulbs are pressurised and could at a qualified specialist workshop.
explode when you change them, especially if
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 256

256 Changing bulbs
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

You can replace the following bulbs:
Halogen headlamps Bulb type
: Dipped-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
; Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
= Side lamp/parking lamp: W 5 W
? Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
A Turn signal lamp: WY 5 W
Practical advice
Bi-xenon headlamps* Bulb type

: Main-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
; Side lamp/parking lamp: W 5 W
= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
? Turn signal lamp: WY 5 W
Tail lamps with LEDs Bulb type

: Rear foglamp: H 21 W
; Reversing lamp: P 21 W
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 257

Changing bulbs 257
Tail lamp (exterior spare wheel bracket*) Bulb type

: Rear foglamp: H 21 W
; Reversing lamp: P 21 W
= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
? Tail lamp/parking lamp/brake lamp:
P 21 W
Practical advice
Licence plate lamp (interior spare wheel Bulb type
bracket) : Licence plate lamp: C 5 W
Licence plate lamp (exterior spare wheel Bulb type

bracket*) : Licence plate lamp: W 5 W
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 258

258 Changing bulbs
Changing the front bulbs X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and

remove it.
Dipped-beam headlamps (halogen X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.
headlamps)
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise.
Side lamp/parking lamp

Practical advice
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the bonnet.
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Turn bulb holder ; anti-clockwise and
remove it.
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder ;.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Open the bonnet.
X Turn bulb holder : anti-clockwise and
X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
remove it.
X Align housing cover : and turn it clock-
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder :.
wise.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise.
Main-beam headlamps
Turn signal lamp

X Open the bonnet.
X Turn housing cover : anti-clockwise and
remove it. X Open the bonnet.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 259

Changing bulbs 259
X Turn bulb holder : (WY 5 W)/; X Turn release buttons = 90° in the direc-
(PY 21 W) anti-clockwise and pull it out. tion of the arrow and remove stowage com-
X Remove the bulb from bulb holder :/;. partment ?.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb X To close: insert stowage compart-
holder :/;. ment ? and turn release buttons = in the
X Insert bulb holder :/; and turn it clock- opposite direction to the arrow until the
wise. slots on the release buttons are in a vertical
position.
X Insert side trim panel ; and turn
Changing the rear bulbs catch : 90° in the opposite direction to

the arrow.
Opening and closing the side trim pan-
els Right-hand side trim panel
Practical advice
You must open the side trim panel in the lug-
gage compartment before you can change
the bulbs in the tail lamps.
Left-hand side trim panel
X To open: insert a suitable object, e.g. a

coin, into the slot of release catch : on
side trim panel ;.
X Turn release catch : 90° in the direction
of the arrow and remove side trim
panel ;.
X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn

catch : 90° in the opposite direction to
the arrow.
X To open: turn catch : 90° in the direction

of the arrow and remove side trim
panel ;.
X Insert a suitable object, e.g. a coin, into the
slots of release buttons =.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 260

260 Changing bulbs
Tail lamps with LEDs X Switch off the lights.

X Insert a plastic card into the gap between
the bumper and lamp cluster :.
X Push the plastic card in the direction of the
arrow.
Lamp cluster : pops out.
X Remove lamp cluster :.
: Rear foglamp
Practical advice
; Reversing lamp

X Open the luggage compartment.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 259).
X Turn the corresponding bulb holder anti-
; Turn signal lamp
clockwise and remove it.
= Tail lamp/parking lamp/brake lamp
X Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Turn the corresponding bulb holder anti-
X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. clockwise and remove it.
X Close the side trim panel (Y page 259). X Press the lamp slightly into the holder, turn
it anti-clockwise and pull it out.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and
Tail lamp (exterior spare wheel
turn it clockwise.
bracket*)
X Insert the corresponding bulb holder and
On vehicles with an exterior spare wheel turn it clockwise.
bracket*, the following lamps are located in X Insert lamp unit : and press in firmly.
the bumper: Lamp unit : snaps into place.
Rturn signal lamp
Rtail lamp/parking lamp/brake lamp Licence plate lamp
Rlicence plate lamp
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 261

Replacing the wiper blades 261

X Open the tailgate.
X Remove screws :.
X Remove licence plate lamp.
X Replace the bulb.
X Insert licence plate lamp.
X Replace and tighten screws :.
Replacing the wiper blades

X Press both release clips ;.
Windscreen wiper blades X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
Practical advice
G Risk of accident arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
The windscreen will no longer be wiped prop- X Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
erly if the wiper blades are worn. This could arrow A.
prevent you from observing the traffic condi-
tions, thereby causing an accident. Replace Fitting
the wiper blades twice a year, ideally in spring
and autumn.
G Risk of accident
The wiper arms could start moving and cause
an injury if you leave the windscreen wipers
switched on.
Remove the key from the ignition lock before
replacing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the windscreen wiper

blades, make sure that you touch only the
wiper arm of the windscreen wiper. X Position new wiper blade : with
recess B on lug A.
Removing X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining
X Remove the key from the ignition lock.
clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-
X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
screen.
correctly.
X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-
screen.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 262

262 Flat tyre
Rear window wiper blade X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper

arm :.
G Risk of injury X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win-
The wiper arm could be set in motion and dow.
injure you if the windscreen wipers are
switched on.
Remove the key from the ignition lock before Flat tyre
replacing the wiper blade.
Flat tyre equipment variants
Removing Your vehicle may be equipped with:
Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 209)
Ra "Minispare" emergency spare

Practical advice
wheel* (Y page 210)

Ra spare wheel* (Y page 210)
Preparing the vehicle

X Make sure that highway level* is selec-
ted35 (Y page 129).
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-
ground.
dow until it engages.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
X Firmly depress the parking brake.
wiper arm :.
X Move the DIRECT SELECT selector lever to
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
P.
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
it releases.
Make sure that they are not endangered as
X Remove wiper blade ;.
they get out of the vehicle.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger
Fitting area whilst a wheel is being changed. Any-
X Place the new wiper blade ; onto wiper one who is not directly assisting in the
arm :. wheel change should, for example, stand
behind the barrier.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
X Vehicles without KEYLESS GO*: remove
arrow until it engages.
the key from the ignition lock.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated
X Vehicles with KEYLESS GO*: open the
correctly.
driver's door.
The on-board electronics have status 0,
which is the same as the key having been
removed.
35 Not on steel-sprung vehicles.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 263

Flat tyre 263
X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package* X Do not remove any foreign objects which
or Off-Road Pro engineering package*: have penetrated the tyre, e.g. screws or
remove the Start/Stop button from the nails.
ignition lock. X Remove the TIREFIT kit, the accompanying
X Get out of the vehicle. "max. 80 km/h" sticker and the electric air
X Close the driver’s door. pump from the stowage well underneath
the luggage compartment floor
X Place the warning triangle (Y page 208) at
(Y page 209).
a suitable distance. Observe legal require-
ments.
i Only operate the electric air pump using
the socket in the footwell of the second row
of seats (Y page 163), even if the ignition
Practical advice
is turned off.
An emergency cut-off ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the
on-board voltage is too low, power to the
sockets is automatically cut-off. This
ensures that there is sufficient power to
start the engine. X Affix part : of the sticker within the driv-
er's field of vision.
X Affix part ; of the sticker near the valve
Using the TIREFIT kit
on the wheel with the defective tyre.
You can use the TIREFIT kit to seal small
punctures, particularly those in the tyre tread. G Risk of injury
You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures TIREFIT must not come into contact with your
down to -20 †. skin, eyes or clothing.
RIf TIREFIT comes into contact with your
G Risk of accident
In the following cases your safety is especially eyes or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly
endangered, as tyre sealant is insufficient if: with clean water.
Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre RChange out of clothing which has come into
greater than 4 mm. contact with TIREFIT immediately.

Rthe wheel rim is damaged. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, consult a doc-
tor immediately.
Ryou have driven at very low tyre pressures
or on a flat tyre. Keep TIREFIT away from children.
RIf TIREFIT is swallowed, immediately rinse
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified
specialist workshop which has the necessary your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out of water.
the work required. RDo not induce vomiting. Consult a doctor
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a immediately.
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- RDo not inhale TIREFIT fumes.
pose. In particular, work relevant to safety or
on safety-related systems must be carried out
at a qualified specialist workshop.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 264

264 Flat tyre
i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It can

then be removed like a layer of film.
If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro-
ethylene.
G Risk of injury
Comply with the manufacturer's safety
instructions shown on the sticker on the elec-
tric air pump.
Your vehicle may be equipped with one of two

different air pumps. Version 1 can be identi-
X Remove the cap from valve E on the faulty
fied by the flap, behind which the hose with tyre.
Practical advice
the pressure gauge and cable are located;

version 2 has a pressure release button in the
air hose of the electric air pump.
Version 1
X Make sure pressure release screw F on

pressure gauge G is fully closed.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve E.
X Insert connector A into the socket in the

footwell of the second row of seats
X Open flap ; on the electric air pump.
(Y page 163).
X Pull connector A with cable and air pump
hose B out of the housing. ! The socket/cigarette lighter* in the front
X Screw air pump hose B onto flange C of centre console is not designed for operat-
TIREFIT sealant filler bottle :. ing the electric air pump.
X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : head X Vehicles without KEYLESS GO*: turn the
downwards into recess = of the electric key to position 2 (Y page 63) in the ignition
air pump. lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS GO*: press the
Start/Stop button twice (position
2 (Y page 63)).
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 265

Flat tyre 265
X Press on/off switch ? on the electric air ! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of
pump to I. the filler hose. This may cause stains.
The electric air pump is switched on. The Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
tyre is inflated. which contained the TIREFIT kit.
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The X Stow away the TIREFIT kit, the electric air
pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar. pump and the warning triangle.
Do not switch off the electric pump dur- X Pull away immediately.
ing this phase. X Stop after driving for approximately ten
X Let the electric pump run for five minutes. minutes and check the tyre pressure with
The tyre should then have a pressure of at the electric air pump.
least 1.8 bar.
G Risk of accident
! Do not operate the electric air pump for
Practical advice
If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar,
longer than eight minutes at a time without the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive
a break. It may otherwise overheat. any further. Consult a qualified specialist
The air pump can be operated again once workshop which has the necessary specialist
it has cooled down. knowledge and tools to carry out the work
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for
after five minutes: this purpose. In particular, work relevant to
X Switch off and disconnect the electric air safety or on safety-related systems must be
pump and drive the vehicle forwards or carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
backwards approximately 10 m.
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly. X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar,
X Pump up the tyre again. correct it (see fuel filler flap for values).
To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
G Risk of accident the electric air pump.
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after To reduce the tyre pressure: open pres-
five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. sure release screw F on pressure
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified gauge G.
specialist workshop which has the necessary X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
tyre changed there.
the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as
mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work possible at a qualified specialist workshop,
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- G Risk of accident
cialist workshop.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of
When a tyre pressure of at least 1.8 bar 80 km/h.
is reached: The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in
the driver's field of vision.
X Press on/off switch ? on the electric air
The vehicle's handling characteristics may be
pump to 0.
affected.
The electric air pump is switched off.
X Remove the TIREFIT kit from the wheel.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 266

266 Flat tyre
H Environmental note X Insert connector ? into the socket in the

Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of profes- footwell of the second row of seats
sionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service (Y page 163).
Centre. ! The socket/cigarette lighter* in the front
centre console is not designed for operat-
X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four
ing the electric air pump.
years at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. X Vehicles without KEYLESS GO*: turn the
key to position 2 (Y page 63) in the ignition
Version 2 lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS GO*: press the
Start/Stop button twice (position
2 (Y page 63)).
Practical advice
X Press on/off switch = on the electric air

pump to I.
The electric air pump is switched on. The
tyre is inflated.
i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tyre. The
pressure can briefly rise to around 5 bar.
Do not switch off the electric pump dur-
X Pull connector ? with cable and air pump ing this phase.
hose A out of the housing. X Let the electric pump run for five minutes.
X Screw air pump hose A onto flange B of The tyre should then have a pressure of at
TIREFIT sealant filler bottle :. least 1.8 bar.
X Place TIREFIT sealant filler bottle : head ! Do not operate the electric air pump for
downwards into recess ; of the electric longer than eight minutes at a time without
air pump. a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The air pump can be operated again once
it has cooled down.
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not reached
after five minutes:
X Switch off and disconnect the electric air
pump and drive the vehicle forwards or
backwards approximately 10 m.
This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly.
X Remove TIREFIT sealant filler bottle :
from the electric pump.
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty X Pump up the tyre again.
tyre.
X Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
G Risk of accident
If a pressure of 1.8 bar is not achieved after
five minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 267

Flat tyre 267
Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified

specialist workshop which has the necessary
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
When a tyre pressure of at least 1.8 bar

E Pressure release button
is reached:
F Pressure gauge
X Press on/off switch = on the electric air
Practical advice
pump to 0. X If the tyre pressure is still at least 1.3 bar,
The electric air pump is switched off. correct it (see fuel filler flap for values).
X Remove the TIREFIT kit from the wheel. To increase the tyre pressure: switch on
the electric air pump.
! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out of
the filler hose. This may cause stains. To reduce the tyre pressure: press pres-
sure release button E on the filler hose.
Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic
X Drive to the nearest workshop and have the
which contained the TIREFIT kit.
tyre changed there.
X Stow away the TIREFIT kit, the electric air X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced as soon as
pump and the warning triangle. possible at a qualified specialist workshop,
X Pull away immediately. e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tyre pressure with G Risk of accident
the electric air pump. Do not exceed the maximum speed of
80 km/h.
G Risk of accident The "max. 80 km/h" label must be affixed in
If the tyre pressure is now lower than 1.3 bar, the driver's field of vision.
the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive The vehicle's handling characteristics may be
any further. Consult a qualified specialist affected.
knowledge and tools to carry out the work H Environmental note
required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that Have the used TIREFIT kit disposed of profes-
you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for sionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service
this purpose. In particular, work relevant to Centre.
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every four
years at a qualified specialist workshop,
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 268

268 Flat tyre
Changing a wheel and fitting the Use the folding wheel chock to prevent the
spare wheel vehicle from rolling away.
G Risk of accident
The wheel dimensions and tyre size of the
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel* may dif-
fer from those of the damaged wheel.
Your vehicle's handling characteristics will
change when a "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel* is fitted. Adapt your style of driving
accordingly.
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel*
may only be used for a short time. Do not
Practical advice
exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h and X Fold both plates : upwards.
do not deactivate ESP®. X Fold out lower plate ;.
Never drive the vehicle with more than one X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel* fitted. openings in base plate =.
G Risk of accident
Have the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel* or the spare wheel* replaced with a
new wheel as soon as possible at a qualified
Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
Securing the vehicle on level ground
cialist workshop.
X On level ground: place the folding wheel
Preparing the vehicle chock or similar under the wheel that is
diagonally opposite to the wheel you wish
X Prepare the vehicle as described to change.
(Y page 262).
X If a trailer is coupled, uncouple it.
X Place the wheels in the straight-ahead posi-
tion.
X Remove the following items from the stow-
age well under the luggage compartment
floor:
Rthe wheel wrench
Rthe folding wheel chock

Rthe jack
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 269

Flat tyre 269
X On downhill gradients: place the folding (e.g. if the engine is started or a door or the
wheel chock or similar behind the wheels tailgate is opened or closed), and you could
of the front and rear axle. be seriously injured.
G Risk of accident
If you fail to position the jack correctly, the
vehicle may:
Rslip off the jack
Rinjure you or others

Rbe damaged
Thus, it is important to make sure that the jack
is positioned correctly in the respective jack-
Practical advice
ing points. Before positioning the jack,
X Using wheel wrench ?, loosen the bolts on remove any dirt that may have collected in the
the wheel you wish to change by about one jacking points.
full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com- The jacking points for the jack are located
pletely. behind the wheel housings of the front wheels
and in front of the wheel housings of the rear
X Remove the spare wheel from the exterior wheels (arrows).
bracket* (Y page 210).
or
X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare
wheel* from the stowage well under the
luggage compartment floor (Y page 210).
Raising the vehicle

G Risk of injury
The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle
for a short time while a wheel is being
changed.
The vehicle must be placed on stands if you
intend to work under it.
Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm,
non-slip, level surface. Do not use wooden
blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay.
The vehicle could otherwise fall off the jack
and seriously injure you.
Do not start the engine at any time while the
wheel is being changed.
Do not lie under the vehicle when it is being
supported by the jack. If you do not raise the
X Position jack ; at jacking point :.
vehicle as described, it could slip off the jack
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 270

270 Flat tyre
Fitting a new wheel

G Risk of accident
Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. This could
cause the bolts to loosen in the wheel hub.
G Risk of accident
If a wheel hub thread is damaged, do not drive
the vehicle any further. Consult a qualified
X Make sure that the base of the jack is posi- specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
tioned directly under jacking point :. the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
Practical advice
X Take the socket wrench and ratchet ring

Centre or "Service 24". In particular, work rel-
spanner = out of the vehicle tool kit.
evant to safety or on safety-related systems
X Insert the socket into ratchet ring spanner
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
= and place it on the jack so that the let- workshop.
tering AUF is visible.
X Raise the vehicle with ratchet ring spanner G Risk of accident
= until the tyre is at most three centime- Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
tres off the ground. for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been
approved for Mercedes-Benz and the respec-
tive wheel. Other bolts may work loose or
damage the brake system.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts completely
while the vehicle is still jacked up. The vehicle
could topple off the jack.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-

pletely.
X In place of the wheel bolt, screw centring
pin ? from the vehicle tool kit into the
thread.
X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a

dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub 1 Wheel bolts for 18", 19" and 20" wheels
threads could otherwise be damaged when 2 Wheel bolts for the "Minispare" emer-
you screw them in. gency spare wheel*
X Remove the wheel.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 271

Flat tyre 271
! Always use wheel bolts ; to fit the Lowering the vehicle

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel*. X Place the ratchet ring spanner onto the
Using other wheel bolts to fit the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel* could AB are visible.
damage the brake system. X Lower the vehicle by turning the ratchet
i Wheel bolts 2 can be found with the ring spanner until the vehicle is once again
standing firmly on the ground.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel*.
X Place the jack to one side.
X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
surfaces.
Practical advice
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-
wise pattern in the sequence indica-
X Place the "Minispare" emergency spare ted (: to A). The tightening torque is
wheel* or the spare wheel* onto the cen- 150 Nm.
tring pin and push it on.
G Risk of accident
Have the tightening torque checked immedi-
ately after a wheel is changed. The wheels
could work loose if they are not tightened to
a torque of 150 Nm.
X Turn the jack back to its initial position and

stow it and the rest of the vehicle tool kit in
Vehicles with the "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel*:
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- X Wrap the faulty wheel in the protective film
ger-tight. included with the "Minispare" emergency
X Unscrew the centring pin. spare wheel* and transport the wheel in
X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight. or
X Depending on the size of the wheel, you
may also be able to secure the faulty wheel
in the emergency spare wheel well. In this
case, you will have to remove the stowage
tray from the emergency spare wheel well
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 272

272 Battery
and stow it securely in the luggage com- Immediately rinse acid

partment. splashes off with clean
Vehicles with a spare wheel*: water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
X Use the bolts to secure the faulty wheel to
Wear eye protection.
the exterior spare wheel bracket*.
i Do not activate the tyre pressure moni-
tor* until the defective tyre has been Keep children away.
removed from the vehicle.
Battery Observe this Owner's Man-

ual.
Practical advice
Notes on the vehicle battery

In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-
mum possible service life, it must always be H Environmental note
sufficiently charged. Do not dispose of batteries in the household
Have the battery charge checked more fre- rubbish. Dispose of defective batteries in an
quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short environmentally responsible manner. Take
trips or if you leave it standing idle for a them to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or
lengthy period. to a special collection point for old batteries.
To prevent damage from corrosion, only
replace the battery with one that has a central G Risk of injury
ventilation cover. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre if mends that you only use batteries which have
you wish to leave your vehicle parked up for been tested and approved for your vehicle by
a long period of time. Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehi-
G Risk of injury cle occupants from suffering acid burns
Comply with safety precautions and take pro- should the battery be damaged in the event
tective measures when handling batteries. of an accident.
Risk of explosion To prevent acid burns, observe the following
safety notes when handling batteries:
Rdo not lean over the battery.
Fire, naked flames and Rdo not place any metal objects on a battery.
smoking are prohibited Otherwise, you could cause a short circuit
when handling the battery. and the battery's gas mixture could ignite.
Avoid creating sparks. Rmake sure that you do not create an elec-
Battery acid is caustic. trostatic charge, e.g. by wearing synthetic
Avoid contact with the skin, clothing or as a result of friction on fabrics.
eyes or clothing. Therefore, you should not pull or slide the
Wear suitable protective battery over carpets or other synthetic
clothing, in particular materials.
gloves, an apron and a face
mask.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 273

Battery 273
Rnever touch the battery first. To discharge X Firmly depress the parking brake and move
a possible electrostatic charge, step out of the transmission to position P.
the vehicle first and touch the bodywork. X Position the right-hand front seat as far for-
Rdo not wipe the battery using a cloth. The wards as possible.
battery may explode as a result of electro- X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
static charge or due to flying sparks. radio, blower, etc.).
! Before loosening the terminal clamps of

the battery, switch off the engine and
remove the key or, on vehicles with KEY-
LESS GO*, make sure that the ignition is
not switched on. In the instrument cluster,
Practical advice
all of the indicator lamps must be out. Oth-
erwise, you may destroy electronic compo-
nents, such as the alternator.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends that you

have work involving the battery, e.g. X Get into the rear compartment.
removal, charging and replacement, car-
X Remove battery cover : under the right-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop,
e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. hand front seat.
The battery is located under the front seat on

the right-hand side when viewed in the direc-
tion of travel.
Disconnecting the battery

G Risk of accident
If the battery is disconnected:
Rthe brake boosting effect will not be avail-
able. Greater braking force will then be
required and brake pedal travel will be lon- X Use a sharp knife on carpet ; to cut along
ger. If necessary, depress the brake pedal the dashed white line until you reach the
with maximum force. perforated part.
Rthe transmission is locked in position P X Position the right-hand front seat at its rear-
most position.
! Always disconnect the battery in
the order described below. Never swap the
battery terminals. You may otherwise dam-
age the vehicle electronics.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 274

274 Battery
X Fold the piece of cut carpet ; in the direc- X Remove protective cover A from battery
tion of the arrow. B.
Practical advice
X Adjust the right-hand front seat to its high-

est position.
X Position the right-hand front seat as far for-
wards as possible.
X Turn the key to 0 (Y page 63) in the ignition
lock and remove it or make sure that no
ignition position has been selected with
KEYLESS GO*. In the instrument cluster, all
of the indicator lamps must be out.
X Disconnect negative terminal clamp D

from the battery and put it down so that it
does not touch positive terminal clamp C.
X Remove the cover from positive terminal
clamp C.
X Remove positive terminal clamp C from
the battery.
X Remove fastening clip ?. Removing the battery

X Remove air duct = by pulling it in the
X Disconnect the battery (Y page 273).
direction of the arrow.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 275

Battery 275
You can obtain information about battery

chargers which allow the battery to be
charged while still installed from a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
G Risk of injury
There is a risk of acid burns during the charg-
ing process due to the gases which escape
from the battery. Do not lean over the battery
during the charging process.
X Remove breather hose E.
X Loosen battery attachment bolts F which
G Risk of injury
Practical advice
hold the battery in place. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the
skin, eyes or clothing.
i For this you need a 13 mm socket wrench
with an extension that is at least 30 cm ! Never charge the battery when it is instal-
long. led unless the battery charger has been
X Release bracket G. tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
These battery chargers allow the battery to
be charged while it is still installed.
! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-

mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-

start connection point.
X Open the bonnet.
X Connect the battery charger by its positive
terminal and earth point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in
X Lift battery H at the side until the lower
the jump-starting procedure
edge is free. (Y page 276).
X Pull out battery H in the direction of the
arrow.
Charging and fitting the battery

G Risk of injury
Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated
area. As the battery is being charged, gases
can escape and generate minor explosions.
This could injure you and other persons or
cause damage to the paintwork or acid cor-
rosion on the vehicle.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 276

276 Jump-starting
Jump-starting
If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the

engine can be jump-started from another
vehicle or from an external battery using jump
leads.
Observe the following points:
Ryou may only jump-start when the engine
and catalytic converter are cold.
Rdo not start the engine if the battery is fro-
Jump-start connection point zen. Let the battery thaw first.
: Earth point (negative terminal) Rjump-starting may only be performed from
Practical advice
; Positive terminal (under the cover) batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.

Ronly use jump leads which have a sufficient
Reconnecting the battery cross-section and insulated terminal

clamps.
! Always disconnect the battery in
the order described below. Never swap the i Jump leads and further information about
battery terminals. You may otherwise dam- jump-starting can be obtained from any
age the vehicle electronics. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
radio, blower, etc.). attempts.
X Connect the positive terminal clamp and Do not use a rapid-charging device to start
secure the cover. the engine.
X Connect the negative terminal clamp.
G Risk of injury
X Connect the breather hose. There is a risk of acid burns when jump-start-
i If the battery power supply has been inter- ing a vehicle due to the gases which escape
from the battery. Do not lean over the battery
rupted (e.g. if it has been reconnected), you
while the engine is being jump-started.
must carry out the following tasks:
Rset the time (Y page 104).
G Risk of explosion
On vehicles with COMAND and a naviga-
Gases escaping from the battery during jump-
tion system*, the clock is set automati-
starting may cause minor explosions. Avoid
cally.
creating sparks. Keep naked flames away
Rreset the sliding/tilting sun- from the battery, and do not smoke.
roof* (Y page 151). Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
Rreset the function for folding the exterior tective measures when handling batteries.
mirrors in/out automatically* by folding You will find these under "Battery" in the
the mirrors out once (Y page 73) index.
Rreset the side windows (Y page 86). X Make sure that the two vehicles do not
touch.
X Depress the parking brake firmly.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 277

Towing and tow-starting 277
X Shift the transmission to position P.

X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g.
radio, blower, etc.).
X Open the bonnet (Y page 174).
Practical advice
X Open cover : of positive terminal ;. Towing and tow-starting
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehi- Points to remember
cle to positive terminal = of donor battery
C using the jump lead, beginning with your G Risk of accident
own battery. If you have the vehicle towed, you must use a
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and rigid towing bar if:
run it at idling speed. Rthe engine is not running.
X Remove cover A from earth point B. Rthere is a brake system malfunction.

X Connect negative terminal ? of donor bat- Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
tery C to earth point B of your vehicle or the vehicle's electrical system.
using the jump lead, connecting the jump The power steering and the brake force boos-
lead to donor battery C first. ter do not work when the engine is not run-
X Start the engine. ning. Greater braking force will then be
X First remove the jump lead from earth required and brake pedal travel will be longer.
point B and negative terminal ?, then If necessary, depress the brake pedal with full
from positive terminal ; and positive ter- force.
minal =, each time disconnecting from the Before towing away, make sure that the steer-
battery on your own vehicle first. ing can be moved and is not locked.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz weight must not exceed the maximum per-
Service Centre. missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 278

278 Towing and tow-starting
It is better to have the vehicle transported N and turn the key to position
than to have it towed. 2 (Y page 63) in the ignition lock.
When towing, observe the legal requirements RBefore towing the vehicle, make sure that
in all countries concerned. the battery is connected and charged. Oth-
! When towing, pull away slowly and erwise:
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, - you cannot switch on the ignition.
the vehicles could be damaged. - you cannot shift the transmission to posi-
tion N.
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
as this could damage the vehicle. If in - you have no support when braking.
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
i Switch off the automatic locking feature
! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum before the vehicle is towed (Y page 107).
Practical advice
of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must Otherwise, you could be locked out when
not be exceeded. pushing or towing the vehicle.
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire Deactivate tow-away protection*
vehicle must be lifted up and transported. (Y page 55) before the vehicle is towed.
! On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*, use the

key instead of the Start/Stop button. Turn Fitting the towing eye
the key to position 2 in the ignition lock and
Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch*: if you
shift the automatic transmission to N. Then
intend to use the vehicle for towing, fit the ball
turn the key back to 0 and leave it in the
coupling and connect the towbar to this.
ignition lock.
! Only secure the tow cable or towing bar Opening the covers
to the towing eyes. You could otherwise The mountings for the removable towing eyes
damage the vehicle. are located in the bumpers. They are located
RTow-starting the vehicle is not permitted. at the front and rear behind covers.
RThe vehicle may not be towed with the front
or rear axle raised.
RIf the vehicle has suffered transmission
damage, have it carried away on a trans-
porter or trailer.
RIf the engine does not start, try jump-start-
ing it (Y page 276).
RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle,
have it towed to the nearest qualified spe-
Service Centre.
RIf you are towing the vehicle, move the
automatic transmission selector lever to
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 279

Towing and tow-starting 279
X Press cover : inwards on the marking in X Turn the key to position 2 (Y page 63) in
the direction of the arrow. the ignition lock.
X Take cover : off the opening.
i On vehicles with KEYLESS GO*: use the
key instead of the start-stop button.
Vehicles with the off-road styling pack- X Move the transmission to position N.
age*
Removing the towing eye

X Take the wheel wrench from the vehicle
tool kit (Y page 209).
X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the
towing eye and turn it anti-clockwise.
Practical advice
X Unscrew the towing eye.
X Replace the cover and press it until it

engages.
X Return the towing eye and the wheel
X Use a suitable object such as a screwdriver wrench to the vehicle tool kit.
to prise off cover : at the recess and
remove it.
Transporting the vehicle
Securing the towing eye
The towing eyes or trailer coupling* can be
X Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or trans-
from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 209). porter if you wish to transport it.
X Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the
! Only secure the vehicle by the wheels or
stop.
wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such
X Insert the wheel wrench handle into the
as axle or steering components. Otherwise,
towing eye and tighten it. the vehicle could be damaged.
Towing the vehicle Recovering a vehicle that has become

! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum stuck
of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must Take great care when recovering a vehicle
not be exceeded. whose drive wheels have become embedded
For towing distances over 50 km, the entire in loose earth or mud, particularly if the vehi-
vehicle must be lifted up and transported. cle is laden.
When recovering the vehicle do not use jerky
! You should not have the vehicle towed movements and do not pull it at an angle. The
with the front or rear axle raised. chassis could otherwise be damaged.
Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a
trailer attached.
Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible
using the tracks it made when it became
stuck.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 280

280 Fuses
Towing in the event of malfunctions nents on the circuit and their functions will
fail.
In the event of damage to the transfer Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
case the same rating, which you can recognise by
Have the propeller shafts between the axles the colour and value. The fuse ratings are lis-
and the transfer case removed. ted in the fuse allocation chart. A Mercedes-
Have the vehicle towed with the front axle Benz Service Centre will be happy to advise
raised. you.
G Risk of fire
In the event of damage to the front axle Only use fuses that have been approved for
Have the propeller shaft between the rear Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
axle and the transfer case removed. required fuse rating for the systems con-
Practical advice
cerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge

Have the vehicle towed with the front axle
faulty fuses. A circuit overload could other-
raised.
wise cause a fire. Have the cause traced and
rectified at a qualified specialist workshop,
In the event of damage to the rear axle
Have the propeller shaft between the front
axle and the transfer case removed. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-
Have the vehicle towed with the rear axle
raised.
Service Centre.
! New bolts must always be used when the ! Only use fuses that have been approved
propeller shafts are refitted. The specified
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
tightening torques must be observed.
have the correct fuse rating for the system
i Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. concerned. Otherwise, components or sys-
tems could be damaged.
In the event of damage to the electrical The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
system Rdashboard fuse box on the front-passenger
If the battery is defective, the automatic side

transmission will be locked in position P. To Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the
shift the automatic transmission to neutral, right-hand side of the vehicle
you must supply power to the vehicle’s elec- Rfuse box in the luggage compartment on
trical system in the same way as jump-start- the right-hand side of the vehicle
ing (Y page 276).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter
Fuse allocation chart
or trailer.
The fuse allocation chart is located with the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 209) in the stowage
Fuses compartment under the luggage compart-
ment floor.
Notes on changing fuses
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 281

Fuses 281
Before changing a fuse X To open: open the bonnet (Y page 174).

X Remove moisture from the fuse box using
X Park the vehicle.
a dry cloth.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Fold clamps ; upwards.
X Fold up fuse box cover : and remove it
towards the front of the vehicle.
X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
Dashboard fuse boxes
lying correctly in lid :.
X Insert lid : into the bracket at the rear of
the fuse box.
! The cover must be fitted properly; other-
wise, moisture or dirt could affect the oper-
Practical advice
ation of the fuses.
X Fold down lid : and secure with
clamps ;.
X Close the bonnet (Y page 175).
! Do not use a pointed object such as a

screwdriver to open the cover in the dash- Fuse box in the luggage compartment
board. You could damage the dashboard or
the cover.
X To open: open the front-passenger door.
X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of
the arrow and remove it.
X To close: clip in cover : at the front.
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.
X Close the front-passenger door.
Fuse box in the engine compartment

X To open: open the tailgate.
X Turn catch : in the direction of the arrow.
X Open cover ; downwards.
Illustrated: GL 320 CDI
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 282

282
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 283

283
Notes on the technical data ............. 284

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 284
Vehicle electronics ........................... 284
Vehicle identification plates ............ 286
Service products and capacities ..... 287
Vehicle data, GL 450 4MATIC .......... 292
Vehicle data, GL 500 4MATIC .......... 292
Vehicle data, GL 350 CDI 4MATIC
BlueEFFICIENCY ................................ 293
Vehicle data, GL 350 BlueTEC ......... 293
Vehicle data, GL 450 CDI 4MATIC ... 294
Tailgate opening dimensions ........... 295
Tyres and wheels .............................. 295
Technical data
Trailer coupling* ............................... 297
Frequencies for garage door open-
ers* .................................................... 298
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 284

284 Vehicle electronics
Notes on the technical data H Environmental note

Daimler also supplies reconditioned assem-
i The technical data was determined in blies and parts which are of the same quality
accordance with EU directives. All data as new parts. For these, the same warranty
applies to the vehicle's standard equip- applies as for new parts.
ment. Therefore, the data may differ for
vehicles with optional equipment. You can Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved
obtain further information from a conversion parts and accessories are availa-
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. ble from Mercedes-Benz Service Centres.
There, you can also receive advice about tech-
You can find technical data on the Internet at: nical modifications and have the parts pro-
www.mercedes-benz.com fessionally fitted.
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ber and engine number when ordering genu-
ine Mercedes-Benz parts. You will find these
numbers on your vehicle's identification
Technical data
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts and con-

version parts and accessories which have plates, for example (Y page 286).
been specifically approved for your vehicle for
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is Vehicle electronics
unable to evaluate other parts. Therefore, Tampering with the engine electron-
Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for ics
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles, even if they have been independently or G Risk of accident
officially approved. Only have work on the engine electronics and
In Germany and some other countries, certain related components carried out at a qualified
parts are only officially approved for installa- specialist workshop which has the necessary
tion or modification if they comply with legal specialist knowledge and tools to carry out
requirements. All genuine Mercedes-Benz the work required. Mercedes-Benz recom-
parts meet this requirement. The use of non- mends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service
approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's Centre for this purpose. In particular, work
general operating permit. This is the case if: relevant to safety or on safety-related sys-
Rthey cause a change of the vehicle type tems must be carried out at a qualified spe-
from that for which the vehicle's general cialist workshop. Otherwise, the vehicle’s
operating permit was granted. roadworthiness could be affected.
Rother road users could be endangered. ! Only have maintenance work on the
Rthe emission or noise levels are adversely engine electronics and its associated parts,
affected. such as control units, sensors and connec-
The use of non-approved parts could affect tor leads, performed at a qualified special-
your vehicle's operating safety. Therefore, ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service
Mercedes-Benz recommends genuine Centre. Otherwise, vehicle components
Mercedes-Benz parts and conversion parts may wear more quickly and your vehicle's
and accessories that have been approved for warranty and operating permit may be inva-
your vehicle. lidated.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 285

Vehicle electronics 285
Retrofitting of two-way radios and Aerial positions

mobile phones (RF transmitter) The following aerial positions may be used if
Use the Technical Specification RF transmitters have been properly installed:
ISO/TS 2160936 implementation regulation
when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) trans-
mitters.
If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio
equipment (e.g. taxis, hire cars or official vehi-
cles), use the power supply or aerial connec-
tions intended for use with the basic wiring.
Be sure to observe the manufacturer's addi-
tional instructions when installing the fittings.
! Damage resulting from installation work
that has not been carried out correctly is Aerial positions
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz implied
Technical data
: Front roof area (vehicles with sliding/tilt-
warranty. ing sunroof*: observe the roof's sweep)
To ensure correct installation, Mercedes- ; Rear mudguard (recommended installa-
Benz recommends having this work done tion position: on the side which faces the
at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at a centre of the road)
G Risk of accident
Transmission output Incorrect retrofitting of RF transmitters can
cause the vehicle electronics to malfunction,
Transmission output at the aerial base must impair the vehicle's operating safety and,
not exceed the maximum values below. thus, also impair your own safety.
Waveband Maximum trans- To ensure correct installation, Mercedes-
mission output Benz recommends having this work done at a
(PEAK) Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at a quali-
Short wave 100 W
(f < 54 MHz) G Risk of injury
4 m waveband 30 W Improper installation of RF transmitters can
lead to increased electromagnetic radiation in
2 m waveband 50 W the vehicle interior. Using an exterior aerial
Trunked radio/Tetra 35 W takes into account current scientific discus-
sions relating to the possible health hazards
70 cm waveband 35 W that may result from electromagnetic fields.
GSM 900/AMPS 10 W To ensure correct installation, Mercedes-
Benz recommends having this work done at a
GSM 1800 10 W Mercedes-Benz Service Centre or at a quali-
UMTS 10 W
36 ISO/TS 21609 – Technical Specification for Road Vehicles -- (EMC) guidelines for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 286

286 Vehicle identification plates
Deviations with respect to aerial locations,

output and frequencies must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Other aerial positions
There is no restriction for aerial positions in
the outer area of the vehicle for these wave-
bands: trunked radio/Tetra, 70 cm wave-
band, GSM 900/AMPS, GSM 1800 and
UMTS.
Legal provisions for fittings must be
observed. Vehicle identification plate illustration
: Vehicle identification plate
RF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of 100 mW (PEAK) may be used ; Vehicle manufacturer
in the vehicle without restrictions. = EU type approval number
? Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Technical data
! The operating permit may be invalidated

if the instructions for installation and use of A Maximum permissible gross vehicle
RF transmitters are not observed, e.g. weight
approved wavebands, maximum output B Maximum permissible towing weight
and aerial positions on the vehicle. C Maximum permissible front axle load
D Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle identification plates E Paint code
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-

cle identification number (VIN) and Vehicle identification number (VIN)
paint code number
In addition to the information on the vehicle
The vehicle identification plate is located on identification plate, the vehicle identification
the side of the door frame on the right-hand number (VIN) is also stamped onto the right-
side. hand side of the cross member under the
second row of seats.
X Open the front right-hand door.

You will see vehicle identification plate :. X Fold carpet : under the right-hand seat
forwards.
You will see the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN).
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 287

Service products and capacities 287
Engine number regulations, as you could otherwise endanger

The engine number is stamped on the crank-
case. More information can be obtained from Keep service products away from children.
any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. To protect your health, do not allow service
products to come into contact with your eyes
or open wounds. See a doctor immediately if
Service products and capacities any service product is swallowed.
Service products include the following: H Environmental note

Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) Dispose of service products in an environ-
mentally-responsible manner.
Rexhaust gas aftertreatment additive
(AdBlue®)
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Fuel
Rcoolant
G Risk of explosion
Technical data
Rbrake fluid Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames
Rwindscreen washer concentrate and smoking are therefore prohibited when
handling fuels.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
Before refuelling, turn off the engine and the
use products which have been tested and
auxiliary heating*.
specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle and which are listed in this G Risk of injury
Mercedes-Benz Owner's Manual in the rele-
Do not allow fuel to come into contact with
vant chapter since:
skin or clothing.
Rparts and service products are matched.
Allowing fuels to come into direct contact with
Rdamage caused by the use of non-approved your skin or inhaling fuel vapours is damaging
service products is not covered by the to your health.
implied warranty.
You can recognise service products approved Tank capacity
by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-
tion on the containers: Total capacity 100 l
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
Of which reserve Approximately 13 l
RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) fuel
Other designations or recommendations that
relate to a level of quality or a specification in ! Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles with a
accordance with an MB Sheet number (such diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel
as MB 229.5) have not necessarily been vehicles with a petrol engine. Never mix
approved by Mercedes-Benz. diesel with petrol. Even small amounts of
You can obtain further information from any the wrong fuel result in damage to the
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. injection system. Damage resulting from
adding the wrong fuel is not covered by the
G Risk of injury
implied warranty.
When handling, storing and disposing of any
service products, please observe the relevant Further information on refuelling and on
fuels (Y page 172)
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 288

288 Service products and capacities
Notes on fuel consumption You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis-
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in sions by driving carefully and having it serv-
the following situations: iced regularly.
Rat very low temperatures
Rin urban traffic

AdBlue®
Ron short trips
Rwhen
i For BlueTEC vehicles only.
towing a trailer
Rin mountainous terrain AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic, col-
ourless and odourless water-soluble fluid.
i Only for certain countries: the respective
! Only use AdBlue® compliant with
current consumption and emission values
ISO 22241. The use of special additives is
of your vehicle can be found in the COC
not permitted.
papers (EC CERTIFICATE OF CONFORM-
ITY). These documents are supplied when ! Surfaces, such as carpets or paintwork,
Technical data
the vehicle is delivered. which come into contact with AdBlue®

The consumption figures for vehicles falling while refilling should be rinsed immediately
under the EURO4 standard have been with plenty of water. Immediately after
determined in accordance with EU Direc- spilling, remove AdBlue® using a damp
tive 80 / 1268 / EEC while figures for vehi- cloth and cold water. If AdBlue® has
cles falling under the EURO5 standard have already crystallised, use a sponge and hot
been determined in accordance with Reg-
water to clean it off. AdBlue® residues crys-
ulation (EC) No. 715 / 2007, in each case
tallise after a certain period of time and soil
based on the currently applicable version.
the affected surfaces.
The values do not refer to a specific vehicle.
Deviations from these values may occur
High outside temperatures
under normal operating conditions.
If AdBlue® is heated to above 50 † for an
! Do not use any special additives, as they extended period of time, e.g. due to direct
can cause malfunctions and engine dam- sunlight on the AdBlue® tank, AdBlue® may
age. Damage resulting from the use of such start to decompose. Ammonia vapours may
additives is not covered by the Mercedes- develop as a result.
Benz implied warranty.
G Risk of injury
Ammonia vapours may escape if the
CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien- AdBlue® tank cap is opened at high tempera-
tists believe to be principally responsible for tures. Ammonia vapours have a pungent
global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your odour and are particularly irritating to the
vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes.
fuel consumption and therefore depend on: You may experience a burning sensation in
Refficient use of the fuel by the engine your eyes, nose and throat, as well as cough-
Rdriving style ing and watering of the eyes.
Do not inhale ammonia vapours.
Rother non-technical factors, such as envi-
ronmental influences or road conditions
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 289

Low outside temperatures lead to increased emission values, system

malfunctions, catalytic converter damage
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of approx- or damage to the BlueTEC system.
imately –11 †. The vehicle is equipped with
an AdBlue® preheating system at the factory. Vehicle model Total capacity of
Winter operation is therefore also guaranteed the AdBlue® tank
at temperatures below –11 †.
GL 350 BlueTEC 31.7 l
Special additives
! Only use AdBlue® compliant with Engine oil
ISO 22241. Do not add any special addi-
Only Mercedes-Benz approved engine oils
tives to AdBlue® and do not dilute it with
may be used in Mercedes-Benz engines.
water. Doing so may destroy the BlueTEC
exhaust gas aftertreatment system. A list of the engine oils tested and approved
in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Spec-
Damage resulting from the use of such
ifications for Service Products can be called
Technical data
additives or from water is not covered by
up by visiting http://bevo.daimler.com and
the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty.
entering the MB Sheet number. Further infor-
mation on tested and approved engine oils
Purity can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
The purity of AdBlue® is particularly important Service Centre. Engine oils which have been
for avoiding malfunctions in the exhaust gas approved by Mercedes-Benz have the MB
aftertreatment system. Sheet number indicated on the oil container
If AdBlue® is pumped out of the AdBlue® tank, under the "MB approval" notice. The table
e.g. during repair work, it must not be shows which MB Sheet number applies to
returned to the tank as the purity of the fluid which engine:
can no longer be guaranteed.
! Impurities in AdBlue® (e.g. due to other
service products, cleaning agents or dust)
GL 450 4MATIC
GL 500 4MATIC
MB Sheet number 229.3, 229.5 mm
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 290

290 Service products and capacities
GL 350 CDI 4MATIC Blue- GL 350 BlueTEC

EFFICIENCY
GL 450 CDI 4MATIC
MB Sheet number 228.3, 228.5, 228.51, 229.3, —
Vehicles without a diesel 229.31, 229.5, 229.51
particle filter37
MB Sheet number 228.51, 229.31, 229.51 229.51
Vehicles with a diesel par-
ticle filter
i In the event that the:

Rengine oil brand
Rgrade (MB Sheet number)
Technical data
RSAE classification (viscosity)

is not available, you can use another min-
eral or synthetic engine oil which has been
approved by Mercedes-Benz. You must
then have an oil change carried out at the
earliest possible opportunity.
Mixing oils reduces the benefits of high-
grade engine oil.
Capacities
! Do not use lubricant additives, as they can
lead to increased wear and damage to The following values refer to an oil change
mechanical assemblies. The use of lubri- including the oil filter.
cant additives will result in a restriction of Vehicle model Capacity including
your warranty. oil filter
GL 350 BlueTEC 8.5 l
Engine oil viscosity GL 350 CDI
4MATIC BlueEFFI-
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
CIENCY
of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
this means it is thick; a low viscosity means GL 450 4MATIC 9.0 l
that it is thin. GL 500 4MATIC
Select the SAE classification (viscosity) of the
engine oil according to the outside tempera- GL 450 CDI 11.5 l
ture. The following table shows you the vis- 4MATIC
cosity classes to be used depending on the
average air temperature.

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 291

Coolant ! The cooling system contains a supply

which must be renewed after 15 years, or
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- after 250, 000 km at the latest.
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the
following tasks: The warranty is only valid if you top up with
an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor which
Ranti-corrosion protection
has been approved by Mercedes-Benz and
Rantifreeze protection if the recommended mixture ratio is
Rraising the boiling point observed.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is

topped up with a coolant that will ensure Brake fluid
adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-
Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs
tion.
moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling
! Only top up with coolant that has been point.
premixed with the desired antifreeze pro- G Risk of accident
Technical data
tection. You could otherwise damage the If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,
engine. vapour pockets may form in the brake system
Further information on coolants and on fill- when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when
ing can be found in the Mercedes-Benz driving downhill). This would impair braking
Specifications for Service Products, Sheet efficiency.
310.1, or at any Mercedes-Benz Service Have the brake fluid renewed every two years
Centre. with a brake fluid that has been approved by
Mercedes-Benz and have this confirmed in
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
the Service Booklet.
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
i There is usually a notice in the engine
Otherwise, the cooling system will not be compartment to remind you when the next
sufficiently protected from corrosion, and brake fluid change is due.
the boiling point will be too low.
If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in
the correct concentration, the boiling point of Windscreen washer system
the coolant will be around 130 †.
The headlamp cleaning system* and wind-
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- screen washer system are both supplied from
tion in the cooling system should: the washer fluid reservoir.
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the cooling
Further information on windscreen washer
system against freezing down to around fluid and its mixing ratio (Y page 178).
-37 †.
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45 †); otherwise, heat will not be
effectively dissipated
If the vehicle has lost coolant, top it up with
equal amounts of water and antifreeze/cor-
rosion inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor
which has been approved for Mercedes-Benz.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 292

292 Vehicle data, GL 500 4MATIC
Vehicle data, GL 450 4MATIC Vehicle data, GL 500 4MATIC
Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions

Vehicle length 5099 mm Vehicle length 5099 mm
(ECE) (ECE)
Vehicle width 2124 mm Vehicle width 2124 mm
including exterior including exterior
mirrors mirrors
Minimum vehicle 1840 mm Minimum vehicle 1840 mm
height38 height39
Maximum vehicle 1950 mm Maximum vehicle 1950 mm
height38 height39
Technical data
Minimum ground 202 mm Minimum ground 202 mm

clearance38 clearance39
Maximum ground 307 mm Maximum ground 307 mm
clearance38 clearance39
Ground clearance 217 mm Ground clearance 217 mm
when the suspen- when the suspen-
sion is set to High- sion is set to High-
way level38 way level39
Wheel base 3075 mm Wheel base 3075 mm
Vehicle weights Vehicle weights

Unladen weight 2430 kg Unladen weight 2445 kg
(in accordance (in accordance
with EC directive) with EC directive)
The unladen weight includes the driver The unladen weight includes the driver
(68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel
tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment
increase the unladen weight and reduce the increase the unladen weight and reduce the
maximum payload. maximum payload.
Maximum roof 90 kg Maximum roof 90 kg
load load
You will find weight information specific to You will find weight information specific to
the vehicle on the vehicle identification the vehicle on the vehicle identification
plate (Y page 286). plate (Y page 286).
38 The value stated may vary due to the tyres fitted and the state of the suspension system.
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 293

Vehicle data, GL 350 BlueTEC 293
Vehicle data, GL 350 CDI 4MATIC Vehicle weights

BlueEFFICIENCY
Unladen weight 2450 kg
(in accordance
Vehicle dimensions with EC directive)
Vehicle length 5099 mm The unladen weight includes the driver
(ECE) (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel
Vehicle width 2124 mm tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment
including exterior increase the unladen weight and reduce the
mirrors maximum payload.
Minimum vehicle 1840 mm Maximum roof 90 kg

height40 load
Maximum vehicle 1950 mm You will find weight information specific to

height40 the vehicle on the vehicle identification
Technical data
plate (Y page 286).
Minimum ground 202 mm
clearance40
Maximum ground 307 mm Vehicle data, GL 350 BlueTEC
clearance40
Vehicle dimensions
Ground clearance 217 mm
when the suspen- Vehicle length 5099 mm
sion is set to High- (ECE)
way level40 Vehicle width 2124 mm
Wheel base 3075 mm including exterior
mirrors
Minimum vehicle 1840 mm
height41
Maximum vehicle 1950 mm
height41
clearance41
Maximum ground 307 mm
clearance41
Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 294

294 Vehicle data, GL 450 CDI 4MATIC
Vehicle dimensions Vehicle dimensions

Ground clearance 217 mm Maximum ground 307 mm
when the suspen- clearance42
sion is set to High-
way level41 Ground clearance 217 mm
when the suspen-
Wheel base 3075 mm sion is set to High-
way level42
Vehicle weights Wheel base 3075 mm
(in accordance Vehicle weights
with EC directive)
The unladen weight includes the driver (in accordance
(68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel
Technical data
with EC directive)
tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment
increase the unladen weight and reduce the The unladen weight includes the driver
maximum payload. (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel
tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment
Maximum roof 90 kg increase the unladen weight and reduce the
load maximum payload.
You will find weight information specific to Maximum roof 90 kg
the vehicle on the vehicle identification load
plate (Y page 286).
You will find weight information specific to
the vehicle on the vehicle identification
plate (Y page 286).
Vehicle data, GL 450 CDI 4MATIC
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle length 5099 mm
(ECE)
Vehicle width 2124 mm
including exterior
mirrors
Minimum vehicle 1840 mm
height42
Maximum vehicle 1950 mm
height42
clearance42
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 295

Tailgate opening dimensions ! If you fit tyres other than those tested and
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, charac-
teristics such as handling, noise levels and
fuel consumption, etc. may be adversely
affected. In addition, when driving with a
load, tyre dimensional variations could
cause the tyres to come into contact with
the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tyres or the
vehicle.
i Further information about tyres and

wheels can be obtained from any
: Tailgate opening height Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
; Maximum headroom
i You will find a table of tyre pressures on
Technical data
: ; the inside of your vehicle's fuel filler flap.
You will find further information about tyre
2100 – 2210 mm 1906 – 2016 mm pressures in the "Operation" section
(Y page 180).
i The values specified may vary due to the i Notes on vehicle tyres:
tyres fitted and the state of the suspension.
Always
Rfit tyres of the same size on a given axle
Tyres and wheels (left/right)
Rfit the same type of tyres on your vehicle
Points to remember
at a given time (summer tyres, winter
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec- tyres, All Season tyres, All Terrain tyres,
ommends that you only use tyres which MOExtended tyres)
have been approved specifically for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres are i Vehicles with the MOExtended run-flat
specially adapted for use with the control system are not equipped with the TIREFIT
systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are kit43.
marked as follows: Therefore, it is recommended that you
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original additionally equip your vehicle with the
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Exten- TIREFIT kit* if you fit tyres that do not fea-
ded* (tyres with run-flat characteristics) ture run-flat properties, e.g. winter tyres.
If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz can- i A TIREFIT kit is available from any quali-
not accept any responsibility for damage fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-
which may occur. Information about tyres Benz Service Centre.
can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 296

Tyres
i BA: Both axles

GL 350 CDI 4MATIC GL 450 4MATIC /
BlueEFFICIENCY / GL 500 4MATIC /
GL 350 BlueTEC GL 450 CDI 4MATIC
18" BA All-weather tyres44, 45 265/60 R18 110 H –
M+S
All-terrain tyres 265/60 R18 110 H –
for44, 46 M+S
Winter tyres44 265/60 R18 110 H –

M+S i
Light-alloy wheels 8J x 18 H2 ET53 –
Technical data
19" BA Summer tyres47 275/55 R19 111 V 275/55 R19 111 V
All-terrain tyres46, 47 275/55 R19 111 H 275/55 R19 111 H

M+S M+S
Winter tyres 265/55 R19 109 H 265/55 R19 109 H
M+S i M+S i
Light-alloy wheels 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET56 8.5 J x 19 H2 ET56
20" BA Summer tyres47 275/50 R20 109 W 275/50 R20 109 W
All-weather tyres47, 48 275/50 R20 109 H –

M+S MOExtended
Light-alloy wheels 8.5 J x 20 H2 ET56 8.5 J x 20 H2 ET56
44 Not in conjunction with Code 845 (3rd row of seats, electrically folding).
45 All-season tyres with M+S certification. Only certain tyre brands are approved. Ask your Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for information.
46 All-terrain tyres for retrofitting. Only certain tyre brands are approved. Ask your Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre for information.
47 Snow chains not permitted.
48 Tyres with run-flat characteristics and only in combination with an activated tyre pressure loss warning
system or tyre pressure monitor*.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 297

Trailer coupling* 297
AMG equipment*
All models
21" BA All-weather tyres47, 49 295/40 R21 111V XL
Light-alloy wheels 10J x 21 H2 ET37
Spare wheel*
Your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT, a "Minispare" emergency spare wheel* or a spare
wheel*, depending on the country, the engine and the wheels fitted.
i The GL 350 BlueTEC model is not equipped with a "Minispare"/collapsible emergency
spare wheel*.
! The maximum tyre pressure given in the table on the inside of the fuel filler flap must be
Technical data
set for the spare wheel*.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel*50

GL 450 4MATIC / GL 500 4MATIC /
GL 350 CDI 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY / GL 450 CDI 4MATIC
19" Tyres T 165/90 – 19 119 M
Tyre pressure 4.2 bar
Wheels 4.5B x 19 ET 40
Trailer coupling* ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,

changes to the cooling system may be nec-
Mounting dimensions essary, depending on the vehicle type.
G Risk of accident If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,
observe the anchorage points on the chas-
Only have a trailer coupling retrofitted at a
sis frame.
qualified specialist workshop which has the
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to
carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
systems must be carried out at a qualified

49 Theuse of these tyres alters the vehicle width to 1954 mm.
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 298

298 Frequencies for garage door openers*
For trailer tow hitches fitted at the factory, the

overhang dimension is 1,215.5 mm.
Trailer loads
All models
Permissible trailer load, 750 kg
unbraked
Permissible trailer load, 3,500 kg
braked51
Maximum drawbar nose- 140 kg
weight52
Permissible rear axle 2,000 kg
Technical data
Anchorage points for the trailer coupling

load when towing a trailer
: Anchorage points
; Overhang dimension
Frequencies for garage door openers*
Country Radio type approval number MHz frequency

range
Egypt W-KLE-17 / 08 March 06 27, 30, 40, 418, 433,
868
Andorra 20 July 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Australia 28 June 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Barbados Registration not required 27, 40, 433, 868
Belgium Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 27, 40, 433, 868
05
Bulgaria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 12 April 27, 40, 433, 868
07
Chile 38447/F-23 No.3.3634 40, 433
Denmark Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE20 April 27, 40, 433, 868
05
Germany Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE7519301 27, 40, 433, 868
29 April 05
51 At a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill.
52 The drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 299

Frequencies for garage door openers* 299

range
Estonia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 May 27, 40, 433, 868
05
Finland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 27, 40, 433, 868
13 May 05
France Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
13 May 05
French Guyana Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
13 May 05
Gibraltar Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE13 May 27, 40, 418, 433,
05 (UK) 868
Technical data
Greece Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC 27, 40, 433, 868
R&TTE11409/18/4/2005 18 May 05
United Kingdom Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 27, 40, 418, 433,
05 868
Guadeloupe Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
13 May 05
Ireland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 27, 40, 433, 868
05
Iceland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 27, 40, 433, 868
05
Italy DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15347 27, 40, 433, 868
DGPGSR/II/347487/FOR/15348
Jordan TRC/LPD/2005/23 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Canary Islands 000438/2005, 000439/2005 27, 40, 433, 868
000440/2005, 000441/2005
000445/2005, 000446/2005
000447/2005, 3 June 2005
Croatia SDR 224/06 27, 40, 433, 868
Kuwait 5 October 2005 27, 30, 40, 418, 433,
868
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 300

300 Frequencies for garage door openers*

range
Latvia 2920/O&M/2006 July 3 27, 40, 433, 868
Lebanon Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 40, 433, 868
27.4-1B-1609 26 April 06
Liechtenstein Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 14357 27, 40, 433, 868
27 May 05
Lithuania Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC 27, 40, 433, 868
R&TTE27.4-1B-1609 6 May 05
Luxembourg Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC 27, 40, 433, 868
R&TTE150405/9538 24 May 05
Malta Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 27, 40, 433, 868
Technical data
05
Martinique Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
05
Mexico 280 to 390
Monaco Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE10668 27, 40, 433, 868
13 May 05
New Zealand 20 March 06 27, 30, 40, 433
The Nether- Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 27, 40, 433, 868
lands 05
Norway Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC 27, 40, 433, 868
R&TTE05/02424-SA644 18 May 05
Austria Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 27, 40, 433, 868
05
Poland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE21 April 27, 40, 433, 868
05
Portugal ANCOM-S08399/05 27, 40, 433, 868
Reunion Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE11 July 27, 40, 433, 868
05
Romania Article 6.4 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 30, 40, 433, 868
Russia POCC DE.MJ05.H00015 13 Mai05 433
Saudi Arabia 11_02_05/5024-5-6 418, 433
Sweden Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 27, 40, 433, 868
05
* optional
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 301

Frequencies for garage door openers* 301

range
Switzerland Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE14357 27, 40, 433, 868
27 May 05
Slovakia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 40, 433, 868
Slovak
206/11/2005 4 May 05
Slovenia Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE 27, 40, 433, 868
500-1/2005-437 9 May 05
Spain 000438/2005, 000439/2005, 000440/2005 27, 40, 433, 868
000441/2005, 000445/2005, 000446/2005
000447/2005
Technical data
South Africa 11 October 2005 27, 40, 433
Syria 279/4/14 / 05 March 06
Czech Republic General Licence GL-30/R/2000 Reg. No. 844 13 27, 40, 433
May 05
Turkey National Certification 23 July 07 433
Hungary Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE18 May 27, 40, 433, 868
05
United Arab 1623/5/10-2/26/76 433
Emirates
Cyprus Article 6 of Directive 1999/5/EC R&TTE5 May 05 27, 40, 433, 868
* optional Z
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 302

302
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 303

303
X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 304

304

Mercedes GL Suv 2009 x164 Owners Manual 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes GL Suv 2009 x164 Owners Manual 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Disclaimer

Internal use only

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 1

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz lish in the interactive Owner's Manual on

Some warning and indicator lamps may have

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 2

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 3

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 21

Introduction ......................................... 17 Safety ................................................... 33

Operation ........................................... 171

Practical advice ................................ 207

Technical data ................................... 283

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 4

1, 2, 3 ... Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 234

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 5

Automatic transmission Belt tensioners

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 6

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 7

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 8

DVD audio Engine oil .......................................... 289

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 9

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 10

Overview .......................................... 25 Key positions

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 11

Luggage cover ................................... 157 Mobile telephone

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 12

Oil level Parking position

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 13

Rear-compartment seats .................... 67 Seat belt

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 14

Socket ................................................ 163 Cup holder ..................................... 153

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 15

Thermotronic Trip computer

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 16

Vehicle battery .................................. 272 Windscreen wipers ............................. 84

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 17

Protection of the environment Personal driving style

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 18

Operating safety your vehicle to be damaged, which in turn

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 19

Correct use After a fault has been rectified, the informa-

Data stored in the vehicle

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 20

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 21

Exterior view ....................................... 22

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 22

Function Page Function Page

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 23

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 24

Function Page Function Page

? Cruise control lever 117 H Adjusts the steering wheel

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 25

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 26

Instrument cluster, miles

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 27

Indicator and warning lamps

D K Reserve fuel warning lamp 239

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 28

28 Multi-function steering wheel

Multi-function steering wheel

i Further information on operating the multi-function steering wheel (Y page 97).

X164_AKB; 2; 3, en-GB 2009-03-31T14:14:58+02:00 - Seite 29